Home

Barco BlendPRO-II Instruction manual

1. sss 75 hardware sme hestueii eise ilu 31 VOTSION pi ees a 112 widescreen lock o oo o 75 widescreen lock connection 77 Blue COMO uri a ni 157 179 contrast and brightness 99 Mask cia rata 158 180 Mate ai ae ed rite 159 174 threshold 0005 158 180 Border ooo 151 menu description 151 MODE sd at or ere Ble eser 151 SL gu esa 151 size specified in 00 151 Style i eer RR mE RS 151 Bottom edge ii ewe ip REDE ED 97 FIGHT ssl eu t Rue ncs 43 164 BPII Program output monitor 0000 104 test pattern o ooocoooooooooo 105 BrackKeiS da st oer cet eror 86 Brightness sueslleslesseeslsn 91 Brite LCD settings oooooo oooo 139 BUE SU risotto diss orate orae urls 105 Bus destination aUX 35 40 source selection o o o o ooo 35 Button color use Of nunnur eee 36 SQUICO MEME EXE 44 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide C Cable information 005 55 Calibration touch screen 76 Capture A tee eee che aid othe e 144 stillframe it ee ees 176 still frame from background input 247 still frame from layer 247 still frames 143 246 Card slot memory coccccccocoo 32 Center justified o o 218 configuration 00 0 eee eee 83 Cha
2. suss 237 use Keys in mix mode 232 use Keys in split mode 231 use LOGO v REED RES 251 use move ata exiis 238 239 use inext nc se m m Rech 244 use PIPs in mix mode 229 use PIPs in split mode 229 use previous 00 0c eee ee 245 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide Index Use reset ieo feed pc ome 237 use Swap Z order 236 use this guide 005 17 work with layers o o o o 226 Hue MONDE ERR RERUM E 99 effects e ine netic voe RIEN 153 Hyperlinks oeiia ena a aa eE 17 ID remote enable setup 186 SySIem aida Peace pe eee EAS 76 Image effects menu description 153 overlapten soaa ires 81 Image PRO oa rd oe a 20 E A DE 120 Aux destination 41 117 195 destination setup o o 196 Dia dd Rhos ea 121 Information cables and adapters 55 Statii wed eel eget oe REF UNS 147 INPUT aia Mer ee 87 89 Input background and DSK 56 configuration menu description 93 connector eeeeclsee ee 90 default router patch table 198 DSK eines censa o manet 180 menu description 89 menu functions 0055 90 menu tree 2 22 ee eee 88 Patch ii esate diate eead deere ees 121 patching setup 198 resolution specifications 263
3. 246 SYSTEM sia nies wea ER gs be hed 20 P Page wd ene as pee eee 40 Panel lin rr 34 Gd ix faeces RR eee eae EA 32 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide Index A AE eae 130 Patch router inputs 0 00 eee ee 125 table default router input 198 table default router output 194 PDF file usage 0 0 2 17 navigating and searching 17 Pending a move 0 eee eens 239 Permanent memory frame grab 143 Phase adjustment leues 209 Glock iesea ea RU VeL 96 setup widescreen 209 Physical specifications 258 Picture in Picture oooooooooooooo 19 AAA AR 260 Ethernet connector 260 serial connector 4 261 tally connector 5 262 dip 19 adjustment menu description 149 adjustment menu functions 149 adjustment menu tree 148 adjustment sub menus 150 DUO oppo ier ebRDOLIXU EIS 46 HiPOsition soi mm 149 PY SIZE Bb ee ERE 149 how to modify 00 eee eee 230 Move Rate 000e eee 149 ptioritys zi ae ea kann ad 22 Reset cone RE SR gp Sean 150 switch sources susluss 226 using with mix mode 229 using with split mode 229 V P6SIlIOT sors Aedes eR eRIS 149 V Size ssc ceed ud ELLA 149 POIL ute ia aed eh e iced 124 controller console
4. suus 33 controller ext comm lesse 33 Ethernet uir De do 33 Power connection 0 eee eee 76 UP System Carora eee 187 PrePRO II AUX uua seca See a VE REPE 120 Aux destination 117 195 destination setup o o 196 DER 121 Prerequisites operations 0c eee eee eee 216 system setup 00 184 PresentationPRO ll 0 4 120 Aux destination 41 Preset DUTLONS cr trail 39 delete iso 39 deleting eie etr wed ege 244 Index learn ii wre Pa e eve 39 hext eiu o a iene EUR 40 NOS c hae eae tee A 245 PAYO Wii aa ee ate Ata 40 DIeVIOUS xe tr IS 40 recallihg cinc pid Sees ely eee es 244 register cv note res eir aye ae 39 Section o otee sare Ie EU dde epis 34 section description 39 SIONN i osse i ee 244 Presets resources ceee eere 243 USING sai iod ea 243 using next and previous 244 Preview black ito ner Di RN 49 lookahead sees 48 219 output monitor sess 104 program move on llessssss 238 test pattern 00022 28s 105 Previous preset 2000 cee eee 40 Priority background ooo 22 DSK ox ue une dudas pex 22 kGy unes tuv e bue roe Dee 22 PUPS s scie ha ee at od i ee E 22 Program clear layers from usus 234 modify layers on 0 234 OUIPUIS ui 75 program move on
5. 143 destinations genlock 103 functions specifications 258 justification o oo ooooo 107 A A A b edi eel 75 119 lock connection o oooooo 77 MAPK EMS ias ns a Peres 218 phase setup leues 209 sample Aux destination chart 61 sample DVI connection chart 60 sample standard destination chart 60 settings menu description 106 WIRES tates tet eta te ase atlas 146 Wipe DUO decus se EU M 50 transition o 146 241 Working with Keys in mix mode 0 232 Keys in split mode 231 PIPs in mix mode 229 292 PIPs in split mode 229 Presels ette cian drena 243 Stillirames tee de eae ES 246 talli amp Sz fai it atr tee Ss 253 transitions oooooooo o 241 X X Axis Control o ooooooooooooo ooo 42 XLR Connector o oooooooooooooo 35 Y Y Axis Control oooo oooooooooo oo 42 YPbPr sources color balance 99 Z Z Axis Control eese 42 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide
6. 198 router output patch table 194 Definitions exu is odia 19 Delete applies toS id id a 93 frame from memory us 144 preset rica 39 PFESCIS sii a 244 Description joystick section o ooo oooooo 42 layer control section 48 layer functions section 46 preset section oooooooooocooo 39 source selection bus 44 touch screen menu section 38 transition section 50 280 DEST AUX button 00000 41 Destination o oooooooo o 90 102 ACUM a 222 AC coa a gO Se et Sas ote oh he 120 UN a ott heen il rt Sect lh a 41 Aux Setup 2 2 eee eee ee 120 Aux blank chart 0005 72 Aux ImagePRO Aux PrePRO Il Aux 117 clear iaa as res dd 223 ImagePRO Aux 0 e ee eee 120 ImagePRO aux 0c ee eee ee 41 menu description 117 PrePRO ll Aux o oooooooooo 120 PresentationPRO Il Aux 41 route sources 002 eee eee 223 routing examples 224 SA VERE 117 Setup AUX Sau ext orbi ere 195 196 setup overview AUX 195 setup PrePRO ll 196 setup standard 192 setup ImagePRO 196 single screen lsususs 41 standard blank chart 71 Status A a 118 NAAA hee eus 117 widescreen
7. 0 000 cece eee eee 202 Wide Screen Projector Setup 0000 cee eee eee 203 Background Setup 0 0 eee eee 205 Input Set p ci storie trs arn Saad ees Slee 206 10 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide Table of Contents Standard Input Setup esee 206 Widescreen Phase and Color Balance Setup 209 Phase Adjustments 2 000 0 eee eeeaee 209 Color Balance Adjustments 22 00000 210 DSK Setup Procedure 0 0 cee eres 211 LOGO Setup Procedure 0 c cece tees 212 Saving the Setup i c eru En 213 Backup to Flash Memory Card 0 0 c cece eee eee 213 Chapter 6 QD EIOHONS asta oa teo are tak apio 215 Ini This Ghapter ta ele PB er abe Rer TR 215 Prerequisites fit ei IR Sue S WR 216 Operational Configuration llle 217 Monitor Eayo t uu cd pa E REL Ex Rm RR 217 Touch Screen Calibration llis esses 217 Wide Screen Markers 0 0000 cee eet eee 218 Lookahead Preview 0 0 ce eee eee 219 Understanding Raster Boxes 2000 0c o 220 A Mord About LOS viu na et da Ge da tO dw eee 221 Setting User Preferences 0 0 0 cece ence eee eee 221 Understanding Input File MappinQ oooooooooo o 221 Working with Destinations see 222 Activating Destinations 0 0 cee eee eee 222 Clearing Destinations illie 223 Routing Sources to Destinations
8. 94 Auto Trans button o oooooooooo 51 Aux destination 41 117 120 195 blank connection chart 72 setup coococcoo e a E 120 195 196 setup menu ooo 120 setup overview less 195 B Background 0c eee eee eee 19 DULONS lt a dis pU 48 A A eee 172 FG als FG 2 FG 98 ci an 172 176 format 2 ovis impie mph hee 107 INPUT ciis ede Lot het ore P RO 56 input setup Menu 170 input setup menu tree 171 LOS loss of signal 221 Mattes sid Seto Sa A RECO URSI 172 menu functions DVI 175 menu functions frame grab 176 menu functions matte 173 menu functions shared 172 priority 2 oci uel eee 22 setup sources llless 205 Still frame Linda toes 172 YDE eo ra a RI a a RE 172 Backup and restore utility 254 system configuration 253 278 system flash memory 253 Backup Restore controller options 141 menu description 141 SP to restore 141 Baud Rate oooooooonnno 130 BESAR ceda 19 At a io SIN E 48 Pr e 48 matte menu co 174 Black invalid video esses 140 LOGO source slsen 182 PV Wii ad eee es 49 Blank connection charts 66 BlendPRO l eese 20 connections
9. Figure 3 4 Typical three projector system Content Creation When projecting an image across a large screen it is important to maintain sufficient resolution to obtain a crisp clear image from the perspective of the viewer Generally high resolution source material is used to maintain content that is pleasing to the eye There are two methods that are commonly used to generate wide screen source material each of these methods is explained below e Use of a Single High Definition Image High Definition source material has a resolution of 1920 pixels x 1080 lines Images of this type can be reformatted to drive multiple screens The reformatting ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 79 3 Hardware Installation Overview of Edge Blending Technology 80 HDTV Image 1920 x 1080 Image for Projector 1 1280 x 1024 is usually performed by a seamless switching system such as the Encore Video Processor or BlendPRO II Reformatting allows the resultant images to provide seamless switching integration of picture in picture PIP video and keying features Note that the input image can be effectively spread to cover multiple screens however the inherent resolution of the output image remains that of the source material 1920x1080 pixels 1920 1080 Image for Projector 2 1280 x 1024 Figure 3 5 HD Source Material Formatting Use Of Multi Head Graphics Boards Standard multi head graphics boards
10. lssesesssss 239 Programmable lockout code 136 Programming a move cuatri 0I Oe dada 238 EDID nai dol 190 Projector Setup cues mae a ta 82 202 Total 55 oe er eed ee tena 106 Pulldown compensation 91 Q Quadruple destination system 24 R Raster Box SL 255 5 Ao ad ela 104 test pattern oooooommo eee eee 105 understanding 0 0e0ee 220 Rate transition oooooooo 146 Ratio 2usicwgrsereacbia ieee Me ne eee ales 94 GIOD a ees 164 288 Rear panel 0 000 eee eee eee 32 Recall presets 00 cee eee eee 244 Red COOK Lx Sit daveb acto oe teats An 157 179 contrast and brightness 99 LED a oa as 39 LED blinking 45 LED solid ovio e tee adn ek 44 Mask s ett ao 158 180 matte orcos 159 174 threshold ooo 157 179 Remote control DHCP enable disable 186 A REO 150 DuttOM ws ee ters ee ods is 43 o Wie ias aa O eS 111 Key ar ii etur ba ot irit ee ires 161 menu description 111 OPUON decedens ee oer ee 111 rotary encoders sues 113 SOUICO ri rada ore heaps 169 Pa een ethene eh SU 111 USING aaa 237 Resolution specifications input and output 263 Resources RPM 243 Restore and backup utility 254 from flash memory usus 191 system configuration 253 system from flash memory 2
11. 0 eee eeee 239 Pending and Triggering Moves 0 0 eee eee ee eee 239 Pend on PrevieW ooooccoococo eese 239 Pend on Program 00 2c cece eee 240 Move Notes o he hal dect Aid ta fria eher dior 240 Working with Transitions 0 2 0 eee tees 241 GUD uen gi A es tm Se oe O 241 MiS A dA NA E edo ace mune 241 WDC ren Birdies eid tans add 241 Manual Transitions llle 242 Transition NoteS 0 002 eee ee ee 242 Working with Presets ooooooooroncrrrrne eee 243 A Word About Resources 00 e eet ees 243 Storing Presets arta ege oes tese 244 Recalling Presets 2 lille 244 Deleting Presets esie ra Aska ce hod REG RUE 244 Using Next and Previous l l 244 Preset Notes occ eee se eet es ee SE 245 Working with Still Frames 0 eee 246 Still Frame Capture Overview 00 cee ee 246 Capturing Still Frames from a Background Input 247 Capturing Still Frames from a Layer 0 000 eee eee 247 Saving Still Frames in Permanent Memory 0 5 248 Naming a Saved Still Frame 0 0 eee 249 Wsing the DSK s os A pone ad a a led v 250 Using the EOGQ eh arte eh Ree RE ios EE 251 Locking and Unlocking the Controller llle 252 Working with Tallies llle mV 253 Using Backup and Restore 253 System Backup ei eek BR EP eter 253 System Restore 1 2 2 eee ee 254 Appendix A Spe ifitohonS
12. 73 marking terms 0000 eee eee 5 Erase selected frame 144 Ethernet connection dialog 274 connections lessen 74 connector pinouts 260 DOLE ok o aaa 33 setup menu 222 0000 ee 129 Exclamation Points 86 Ext Comm port settings eee eee 135 port controller 0005 33 Extended Display Identification Data 137 External routing 0 eee eee eee 44 blank chart analog router l O 66 blank chart digital router l O 67 chart sample analog router I O 59 chart sample digital router I O 59 F Factory default returnto 189 FCC statement 00220 000 eee 2 Feathering 0 0 ee eee eee eee 107 edge 1 odsccsta nh add ae o ot ite Som ete 82 Features ScreenPRO Il Controller 20 Feet adjustable o ooooooooo 33 FG_1 FG_2 FG_3 DSK 181 File mapping understanding 221 NAME ccc eee ee ee 93 MUMBO ospite anh diy le lene 93 Fill matte cipal 157 Self ia e ee oe E 157 source DSK 00000 eee 179 source key 00 ee eee eee eee 157 Fine adjust e pann neea miia Da cece eee 150 DUO o be A e ols as 43 KOY 2 cos iu ned Bhd act cuenta an ite a 161 SOUICE ik sane cy rire dedi dled ae bee 169 Firmware files oo oo ooooo 270 Flash loader
13. o o ooo oooooo 244 restore from flash memory 191 restore system from flash memory 254 return to factory default 189 route aux and standard destinations 223 save setup eeeeeess 213 save still frame in permanent memory 248 set up Aux destinations 196 set up background sources 205 setup DSK 000ee eee 211 setup genlock 201 set up ID and remote enable 186 set up ImagePRO Aux destination 196 setup LOGO 212 set up output format 199 set up PrePRO Il Aux destination 196 setup routers 000 193 set up single screen projectors 202 set up standard inputs 206 Set Up SYNC ii ee eee eee 200 set up wide screen projectors 203 set up widescreen color balance 210 set up widescreen phase YUV RGB 209 set user preferences 221 setup standard destinations 192 store presets 00000 244 switch sources 20055 226 troubleshoot Ethernet connection 275 unlock controller 252 upgrade software via Ethernet 274 upgrade software via serial 272 Use Clone nose s eL ERE 235 use cut fill 232 use destinations 222 usefreeze oios ir 236 use fullscreen o ooo oooo o 235 use join mode
14. 020005 132 oversample sizing 97 PIP adjustment 005 149 resel ant fk tee he eer eee eee 111 rotary encoder 114 router specification 127 RS 232 setup Lus 130 Settings ito be thes 104 shadow e i Rein 152 sizing menu lesse 95 software version 00005 112 Status i c na ned DEMO ETE 147 Sy SM e et Lee di 109 TBar and Joystick 115 test pattern 105 user preference 2 0e0 e 140 wide screen settings 106 Menu functions frame grab 1 eee eee 144 INPUT 2 tarios eases een ee eee 90 LOGO L5 uos ass o ree dri es 182 Index PIP adjustment 0 149 source adjustment 168 Menu tree background input setup 171 p ONE 177 frame grab seeueus 142 Input 2 e arae ree Cam ELE a 88 Key cui i ERR eee eae ees 155 166 miscellaneous 133 OUDIT 2 2 DR ee 100 PIP adjustment 00 148 source adjustment 166 SYSTE er fl MG cae Pn ia 108 Mirror clone cce le Ye 163 MISC iuste b te cae Balms tera tote PE Le 87 Miscellaneous menu description 134 menu tree oooocoocooo cero 133 Mix DUO orri ache eee cos 50 effects ii a ee ee 19 mode operations 228 mode understanding 228 mode workin
15. 12 13 14 Ensure that your router s are properly connected to the ScreenPRO Il Controller system In Chapter 3 refer to the System Installation section on page 73 For Ethernet controlled routers ensure that your router s protocol is supported The list of supported manufacturers currently includes the Folsom MatrixPro series and routers from Sierra Extron Leitch Isis DVILink and DPI For Ethernet controlled routers ensure that you know each router s IP address If required preset IP addresses at the routers themselves Refer to each router s User s Guide for instructions Please note that MatrixPRO routers default to the following IP addresses MatrixPRO Analog Router 192 168 0 241 MatrixPRO SDI Router 192 168 0 242 From the Home Menu press SYSTEM to access the System Menu Press ROUTER SETUP to display the Router Specification Menu On the Number line select the number of the router that you wish to configure On the Manufacturer line select the router manufacturer On the Router Type line select the type of router being used On the Number of Inputs line select the router s input count On the Number of Outputs line select the routers output count On the Communication Type line select the type of communication that you are using to connect to the router Press COMM SETUP to display the appropriate Comm Setup Menu for the selected device For Ethernet controlled routers verify that
16. Referto Figure 3 1 on page 58 for an illustration of a Sample System with External Routing e Refer to Figure 3 2 on page 62 for an illustration of a Sample System with Internal Routing You will need one or more of the items listed below Table 3 19 Equipment List ScreenPRO II Controller System Item ScreenPRO II Controller chassis Required ScreenPRO ll Required quantity based on production and screen requirements Video projector Required quantity based on single or widescreen requirements Video cables Customer supplied Genlock Genlock Loop Widescreen Lock PC s Mac s Required for BG and DSK DVI sources and discreet RGB sources TBD DA s Required for signal distribution when internal routing utilized E Use the following steps to install ScreenPRO II Controller 1 Follow the unpacking procedures as listed in the Unpacking and Inspection section on page 54 2 As required refer to the Physical and Electrical Specifications section on page 258 in Appendix A for electrical and mechanical details 3 As required refer to the ScreenPRO Il Controller Rear Panel section on page 32 in Chapter 2 for the locations of all connectors 4 If you are rack mounting peripheral equipment such as the BlendPRO II and MatrixPRO routers follow the rack mount procedures as outlined in each individual User s Guide ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 73 3 Hardwa
17. ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 183 5 System Setup Setup Prerequisites Setup Prerequisites Before starting to set up your ScreenPRO II Controller system please review the following important prerequisites e Ensure that you are familiar with all ScreenPRO II Controller system hardware including all Controller sections and the functions of all buttons within the sections Refer to Chapter 2 Hardware Orientation on page 31 for details e Ensure that hardware is properly installed and that all sources routers and peripherals are properly connected Refer to Chapter 3 Hardware Installation on page 53 for details e fyou will be using a widescreen configuration ensure that all Widescreen Lock connections to from BlendPRO II are properly installed In Chapter 3 refer to the BlendPRO II Widescreen Lock Connections section on page 77 for details e Ensure that you are familiar will all ScreenPRO II Controller menus and sub menus Refer to Chapter 4 Menu Orientation on page 85 for details e Ensure that your connection charts are complete and readily available for reference throughout this chapter In Chapter 3 refer to the Connection Charts section on page 56 for details Please note e nthis chapter when a procedure tells you to scroll to a certain line use the rotary knob labelled NAV to move the highlight When a procedure tells you to adjust or select a certain
18. ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 109 4 Menu Orientation System Menu Press INPUT PATCH to display the Input Source Patch Menu Refer to the Input Source Patch Menu section on page 125 for details Press ROUTER SETUP to display the Router Specification Menu Refer to the Router Specification Menu section on page 127 for details System Sub Menus The following sub menus can be accessed from the System Menu 110 System Reset Menu Software Version Menu Diagnostics Setup Menu Destination Setup Menu Network Setup Menu Input Source Patch Menu Router Specification Menu ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation System Menu System Reset Menu From the System Menu press RESET to display the System Reset Menu Device ALL Reset Option All Detected SPs Reset Type SOFT Figure 4 18 System Reset Menu sample The System Reset Menu enables you to perform various system reset functions The following functions are provided e Device selects which device s to reset Choose between ALL CONTROLLER SP or BP Note BP BlendPRO II SP ScreenPRO II e Reset Option for the selected device s chooses the specific subset that you wish to reset Choose between All Detected SPs or Active Dests e Reset Type selects the type of reset that you wish to perform Choose between SOFT or FACTORY Note that selecting SOFT will
19. The Top Knob is generally assigned to navigating menu fields For example turning the knob moves a highlight up and down a list of parameters allowing you to adjust the highlighted function This knob also adjusts adjacent parameters The Bottom Knob is generally assigned to adjusting the highlighted parameter as labeled on the Touch Screen Presels Seclion The figure below illustrates the Presets Section PRESETS Page BEGG Be Figure 2 3 Presets Section A Preset is a register in which you can store and recall entire Controller setups One preset represents a single look of the Controller including the current state of all mixers layers sources and the DSK The Controller provides buttons for 36 Presets 6 pages of 6 presets each Following are descriptions of each button s function e Preset Buttons press to recall a Preset to the Preview bus If resources are available the look stored with that preset will be recalled If the button does not light system resources are not currently available to process the request When lit the Red LED above each button indicates the currently selected page A If LED 3 and button 6 are lit the 6th Preset on page 3 is active In Chapter 6 refer to the A Word About Resources section on page 243 for additional important information Learn hold down Learn then press the desired Preset button to store the overall look of the Controller into t
20. joie Color plays an important visual role with the ScreenPRO II Controller s front panel buttons White buttons are used for sources Yellow buttons are functions and modes that apply to the active blinking layer Functions include assigning PIPs and keys to the active layer setting up moves freezing the active layer and swapping layer priority Orange buttons are used to control pages of presets and for special MOVE and MOVE SETUP functions Red buttons are designated important They are used in dual button sequences such as SHIFT Learn and Delete and with important transition functions such as CUT and AUTO TRANS Green buttons indicate unscaled sources such as backgrounds and the DSK Blue buttons indicate sca ed sources ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 2 Hardware Orientation Front Panel Sections Front Panel Sections This section provides detailed descriptions and illustrations of each front panel section The following topics are discussed e Touch Screen Menu Section e Presets Section e Destination Aux Bus e Joystick Section e Source Selection Bus Layer Functions Section e Layer Control Section Transition Section ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 37 2 Hardware Orientation Front Panel Sections Touch Screen Menu Section The figure below illustrates the Touch Screen Menu Section A sample menu is shown for reference H Position
21. 6 Operations Working with Still Frames Naming a Saved Still Frame E Use the following steps to name a saved still frame 1 Ensure that the still you wish to name has been saved in permanent memory If not refer to the Saving Still Frames in Permanent Memory section on page 248 Ensure that the Tally option is physically installed and that a PS 2 keyboard is connected to the rear panel Keyboard connector On the Frame Grab Menu press NAME to display the Frame Grab Name Menu On the Saved Location line select the frame that you wish to name Using the keyboard enter the desired name As you type characters will appear in the menu s New Name field Press Enter on the PS 2 keyboard to save the name Once saved the system attaches the name to the still in permanent memory Press BACK to return to the Frame Grab Menu ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 249 6 Operations Using the DSK Using the DSK E Use the following steps to perform a downstream key 1 Ensure that the DSK is properly set up In Chapter 5 refer to the DSK Setup Procedure section on page 211 for instructions 2 Ensure that BG B is not in use Note In both single and widescreen modes remember that BG B and the DSK are mutually exclusive This occurs because the BG DSK Input B is shared between the DSK and BG B on all individual ScreenPRO II units In the Layer Control Section press DSK to display
22. 7 Press KEY to return to the DSK Adjustment Menu ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 211 5 System Setup LOGO Setup Procedure 8 On the Key Type line select the type of key desired Luma or Color 9 Adjust key parameters as required Fora Luma Key adjust Invert Mode Clip Gain Opacity and Fill Source for the optimum visual key Fora color key pick the desired color then adjust Red Green and Blue Color Threshold Mask and Opacity 10 When your DSK is fully adjusted press HOME to return to the Home Menu 11 Press SAVE to save the new system configuration in memory LOGO Setup Procedure ScreenPRO II Controller system setup Step 18 A Prerequisites Ensure that you are familiar with the LOGO Menu In Chapter 4 refer to the LOGO Menu section on page 182 In this procedures you will set up the system s LOGO Remember that the LOGO can be configured as black or as a frame grab E Use the following steps to set up the LOGO 1 Onthe Destination Bus select the destination whose LOGO you want to configure 2 Onthe ScreenPRO II Controller console press LOGO to display the LOGO Menu 3 To configure a black LOGO a Scroll to the Type line and select Black 4 To configure a frame grab LOGO a Ensure that you have captured a still frame either from a live DVI background or from one of the two layers LAYER A or LAYER B In Chapter 6 refer to the Working with Still Frames
23. The figure below illustrates the two Source Adjustment Menu Trees Figure 4 63 Source Adjustment Menu Trees All functions and sub menus are discussed in the following sections 166 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation Source Adjustment Menus Source Adjustment Menu Description Two similar Source Adjustment Menus are available e Ifa PIP is selected press Source in the Joystick Section to display the Input Source Adjustment Menu e Ifa Key is selected press SIZE amp POS on the Key Menu to access the Key Adjustment menu then press Source in the Joystick Section to display the Key Source Adjustment Menu Both menus are virtually identical in their functionality with the exception of the available branches The figure below illustrates a sample Input Source Adjustment Menu INPUT SOURCE ADJUSTMENT H Size lt 100 0 gt V Size lt 100 0 gt H Position V Position Move Rate 2 0 Key Frame Effect Linear OPERATION JOY Z TO SIZE X Y TO POSITION TRACK SIZE Figure 4 64 Input Source Adjustment Menu sample The figure below illustrates a sample Key Source Adjustment Menu KEY SOURCE ADJUSTMENT H Size lt 1 9 gt V Size lt 0 3 gt H Position V Position Move Rate 2 0 Key Frame Effect Linear OPERATION JOY Z TO SIZE X Y TO POSITION S T A T S K E Y M A T T E TRACK SIZE Figure 4 65 Key Source Adjustment Menu sample
24. e Press MATTE to display the BG Matte Menu Refer to the BG Matte Menu section on page 174 for details e Press SAVE to store all selected background settings In Chapter 6 refer to the Background Transitions section on page 227 for operating instructions ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 173 4 Menu Orientation Background Input Setup Menu BG Matte Menu From the BG Input Setup Menu press MATTE to access the BG Matte Menu BG MATTE Red 528 Figure 4 69 BG Matte Menu sample The Background Matte Menu enables you to create a solid background matte color to use behind your PIPs and Keys Each ScreenPRO Il supports two separate matte colors one for BG_A and one for BG_B Red adjusts the red component of the background matte color from 0 to 1023 e Green adjusts the green component of the background matte from 0 to 1023 e Blue adjusts the blue component of the background matte from 0 to 1023 Press MIN to change the highlighted color to 0 Press MAX to change the highlighted color to 1023 e Press BLACK to change all three colors to 0 Note The default state is a black matte color In Chapter 6 refer to the Background Transitions section on page 227 for operating instructions 174 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation Background Input Setup Menu Background Menu Functions DVI Type The figure below illustra
25. section on page 246 for instructions b Scroll to the Type line and select FG_1 FG_2 or FG_3 212 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 5 System Setup Saving the Setup Saving the Setup ScreenPRO II Controller system setup Step 19 When all system setup procedures have been complete press HOME to display the Home Menu then press SAVE This action saves the state of the Controller in non volatile memory Once pressed the Touch Screen menu reads Saving System Configuration If you cycle power the Controller will return to its state at the time of the save Backup to Flash Memory Card ScreenPRO II Controller system setup Step 20 A Prerequisites Ensure that you are familiar with the Backup Restore Menu In Chapter 4 refer to the Backup Restore Menu section on page 141 In this procedure you will back up your system configuration to a Flash Memory Card Note You can only store one system configuration on a Flash Memory Card E Use the following steps to back up your system 1 oN Oa PY DN Ensure that you have a customer supplied Flash Memory Card available Insert the Flash Memory Card into the Controller s rear panel Memory Card slot From the Home Menu press MISC to display the Miscellaneous Menu Press BACKUP RESTORE to display the Backup Restore Menu On the Device line select Ctrlr SP to perform a complete backup On the Controller
26. EJ a8 Figure 2 2 Touch Screen Menu Section 1 Softkeys 2 Touch Screen 3 Rotary Knobs Following are descriptions of each area 1 Softkeys Eight un labeled softkeys are provided four to the left of the Touch Screen and four below Softkey labels when present appear on the Touch Screen itself Press the adjacent softkey to access the menu or activate the indicated function 2 Touch Screen On the Touch Screen all menus and functions can be accessed in a variety of different ways Touch the desired button on the Touch Screen itself for example the BORDR or SHDOW buttons to access the menu as indicated Press a Softkey that is directly adjacent to a button label Usethe top NAV knob to move the highlight to the desired line then use the ADJ rotary knob to adjust the value Touch a particular line to move the highlight to that line then use the ADJ rotary knob to adjust the value Important When adjusting parameters there is no Enter button If you adjust a value with the knobs or the softkeys that function parameter or value is immediately active in Preview 38 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 2 Hardware Orientation Front Panel Sections 3 Rotary Knobs Two Rotary Knobs are provided to the right of the Touch Screen Each knob controls or adjusts the function that is labeled on the Touch Screen itself immediately adjacent to the knob Please note
27. Key Menu Tree The figure below illustrates the Key Menu Tree Key Type Cut Fill Figure 4 55 Key Menu Tree All functions and sub menus are discussed in the following sections ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 155 4 Menu Orientation Key Menu Key Menu Description The figure below illustrates a sample Key Menu when Luma key is selected Key Type Invert Mode Clip Gain Opacity Fill Source Figure 4 56 Key Menu sample The Key Menu provides tools to adjust the active key To access the menu e Press LAYER A or LAYER B in the Layer Control Section then e Press the KEY button in the Layer Function Section Key Menu Functions The available Key Menu functions change depending upon the type of key selected e Key Type enables you to choose the type of key Choose between Luma or Color when the Mix Mode is enabled Split button is off Choose between Luma Color or Cut Fill when Split Mode is enabled Split button is on Refer to the following sections for details e Luma Key Functions e Color Key Functions e Cut Fill Key Functions 156 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation Key Menu Luma Key Functions A Luma luminance key is one in which the hole cutting information is derived from the luminance brightness level of the key source Note Luma keys can be selected on both the Layer A and Layer B keyers in bot
28. displays the ID of the selected destination s associated ScreenPRO II Note that with wide screen destinations the background for each ScreenPRO Il can be individually adjusted Important In a widescreen configuration because the electronics on individual ScreenPRO II units may not match from unit to unit you may be required to adjust a ScreenPRO II background individually by first selecting a specific destination ID Type selects the desired background type When MATTE is selected a solid color can be used as the background Refer to the Background Menu Functions Matte Type section on page 173 for menu details When DVI is selected a digital graphic from a computer or other DVI source can be used as the background Refer to the Background Menu Functions DVI Type section on page 175 for menu details When FG 1 FG 2or FG 3is selected a captured still frame can be used as the background source Refer to the Background Menu Functions FG Type section on page 176 for menu details 172 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation Background Input Setup Menu Background Menu Functions Matte Type The figure below illustrates a sample BG Input Setup Menu when Matte is selected as the background type BG INPUT SETUP BG_A Destination Figure 4 68 BG Input Setup Menu Matte Type sample The following functions are provided for a Matte background
29. eee eee 41 Destination Aux DUS Ci td 35 40 DUTONS arta etos a a 41 Destinations activate and deactivate 222 A een 223 route standard and aux 223 USING ica tar ao 222 D vice reset oll y 111 DHCP enable disable 186 network 0 ccc eee eee 124 Diagnostics setup menu description 113 Dialog Ethernet connection 274 Direct Map 0 eee ee eee eee 121 Display calibration o o o o 76 Documentation conventions zc a tae Es 18 Symbols seve gol e Sel das 18 terms weet it 18 Download software 271 VIA FEP Bite ect ds ected cum 271 via website ooooooooo 271 Downloading code Lus 188 DSK adjustment menu 178 adjustment menu description color 179 adjustment menu description luma 178 DUON i eese RR RUE ES 49 Cli zem e e eec fedet inate oa 178 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide CO OS ces Son She eee tee vi 178 DMI cp E 181 FGI FG FQ uL x kv 181 fill SOUF G8 3er RI 179 QAM Eea i ea to ioe teh hs eel abt tales 178 INPUT ot essaie ipu 56 180 input setup menu description 180 invert mode o 178 LOSS 7 bs do 221 luma ce tee ae Re LXV e 178 luma key functions 178 menutree siy ee ee eee 177 HOE eiie ARENE ta EE 181 Opacity ri eee 179 180 PHONY iiis ime eine T TOA 22 SOPA ida 211 lyDG 2 oos tp 181 USING
30. 1 BlendPRO ll Widescreen operation Same as Encore 1 x ME system Transitions Transitioning background plus 1 transitioning widescreen PIP same as Encore 1 x ME system Clone Mode Same as Encore Note Additional BlendPRO II units connected to the ScreenPRO Il Controller system will not be recognized Physical and Electrical Specifications The table below lists ScreenPRO II Controller physical and electrical specifications Table A 5 ScreenPRO II Controller Physical and Electrical Specifications Parameter Specification Power 120 240 VAC 50 60 Hz Auto selecting 1 0A maximum Console Light XLR connector Mechanical H 5 95 inches 15 13 cm W 17 00 inches 43 18 cm D 10 00 inches 25 40 cm See below for additional dimensions Weight 17 lbs 13 11 kg Estimated Temperature 0 40 degrees C Humidity 258 0 95 non condensing ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide A Specifications Communications Specifications Please note the following additional mechanical specifications 6 72 57 17 06 cm 11 60 cm 4 82 12 24 cm v Y L 0 25 0 63 cm 1 22 3 09 cm gt lt 11 50 29 21 cm gt 12 72 32 30 cm Figure A 1 ScreenPRO Il Controller Side View Communications Specifications The table below lists ScreenPRO II Controller communications specifications Table A 6 Screen
31. Image Effects Menu section on page 153 for details ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 151 4 Menu Orientation PIP Adjustment Menu 152 Shadow Menu From the PIP Adjustment Menu press SHDOW to display the Shadow Menu H Size lt gt V Size lt gt HPos lt gt V Pos lt gt Transparency TRACK SIZE Figure 4 53 Shadow Menu sample The Shadow Menu enables you place a shadow behind a PIP and adjust its size position and transparency Note You can also access the Shadow Menu from the Border Menu and the Image Effects Menu by pressing SHDOW The following functions are provided Mode enables or disables the PIP s shadow H Size gt adjusts the shadow s horizontal size as a percentage of the PIP s size If TRACK SIZE is checked H and V size adjust proportionally V Size gt adjusts the shadow s vertical size as a percentage of the PIP s size If TRACK SIZE is checked H and V size adjust proportionally H Pos 96 adjusts the shadow s horizontal position as an offset from the base PIP image The value represents a percentage of the PIP s size V Pos lt 6 gt adjusts the shadow s vertical position as an offset from the base PIP image The value represents a percentage of the PIP s size Transparency adjusts the shadow s transparency from 0 full transparency to 1024 opaque Check TRACK SIZE to adjust the shadow s H Siz
32. NEXT IP QUAD to advance to the next 3 digit set of numbers in the address Use the ADJ knob in the normal manner to change the digits e Press TEST COMM to test communications with the defined router Ifthe test is successful a ROUTER CONNECTED message will appear that includes the Router name and version Ifthe testis unsuccessful a ROUTER FAILED message will appear In this condition re check all connections and settings and repeat the test ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 129 4 Menu Orientation System Menu RS 232 Setup Menu On the Router Specification Menu when the Communication Type is set to RS 232 press COMM SETUP to display the RS 232 Setup Menu RS 232 SETUP Baud Rate 9600 Data Bits 8 Parity NONE Stop Bits 1 Figure 4 32 RS 232 Setup Menu sample The RS 232 Setup Menu enables you to set the router s RS 232 communications parameters Baud Rate sets the desired baud rate 9600 14400 19200 28800 38400 57600 115200 Data Bits this value is fixed at 8 Parity this value is fixed at None Stop Bits this value is fixed at 1 e Press TEST COMM to test communications with the defined router Ifthe test is successful a ROUTER CONNECTED message will appear that includes the Router name and version Ifthe testis unsuccessful a ROUTER FAILED message will appear In this condition re check all connections and
33. Scroll to the Brightness line and set the input s brightness 206 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 0 h j 5 System Setup Input Setup Scroll to the Gamma line and set the input gamma Scroll to the Input Sync Type line and set the type of sync used by the selected source Scroll to the Pulldown Compensation line and enable or disable the mode Scroll to the Sync Slice lt mv gt line and adjust as required Scroll to the Sharpness line and set the input s sharpness Press SAVE to save the input configuration 8 Perform additional setups on the Aspect Ratio Menu if required a b c d Press AR to display the Aspect Ration Menu Adjust the Mode and Ratio as required Press SAVE to save the input configuration Press BACK to return to the Input Menu 9 Perform additional setups on the Sizing Menu if required Press SIZING to display the Sizing Menu a b C If 1 1 Sampling was selected Scroll to the Clock Phase line and set the system s A D converter Scroll to the H Total line and set the total pixel count per line Scroll to the H Active line and set the width of the active area Scroll to the H Position line and set the start of the active area s horizontal offset from H sync Scroll to the V Active line and set the number of vertical lines in the image Scroll to the V Position line and set the start of the active area s vertical offset f
34. Setup eS tae Dp net tet ees 206 source adjustment menu description 167 source patch menu description 125 GPs ie teen band M CN AS RES 132 specifications 256 submenus eese 92 SYNC TYPES maed ufa enaoR dE 91 lyDO eas aba ae ban AERE 91 INSPECTION ion uel RR renee RE 54 Installation controller iioc EEUU VY 54 equipment list o o oooooo 73 hardware osse es 53 safety precautions 54 site preparation llus 54 System luar li Renee ob 73 unpacking and inspection 54 283 Index Instructions connection charts 56 Internal routing 0 eee eee eee 44 blank chart analog inputs 68 blank chart digital inputs 69 chart sample analog inputs 63 chart sample digital inputs 63 Interval frames strobe 154 Introduction edge blending technology 79 Invalid video black 140 Invert effects a eot di 153 mode DSK cocine REID 178 mode ki a Beaks rios 157 IP A esi cereos dei 129 address default 274 address router 0 0000 128 port number esses 129 range from to llssesesss 124 J Join mode reli a ees 50 mode using slessss 237 Joystick SECO dui mood e ec tee eee EIS 35 section description 42 Justification
35. Source Graphics Card or Splitter Connects to Computer 1 ScreenPRO II 1 BG DSK In A Single screen BG ScreenPRO Il 2 BG DSK In A Single screen BG Computer 2 ScreenPRO II 1 BG DSK In B Single screen DSK ScreenPRO Il 2 BG DSK In B Single screen DSK Single Screens Sample Standard Destination Chart The ScreenPRO II Controller enables you to configure up to four standard destinations Use the following chart to map the distribution of each destination and the routing of your additional program and preview outputs Table 3 10 Sample Standard Destination Connection Chart Standard Destinations Output Screen BlendPRO II Channel ScreenPRO II 1 Pgm DVI Stage left ScreenPRO II 1 Pgm Analog 1 VGA 1 ScreenPRO II 1 Pgm Analog 2 ScreenPRO II 1 Pvw VGA 2 ScreenPRO II 2 Pgm DVI Stage right ScreenPRO II 2 Pgm Analog 1 VGA 3 ScreenPRO II 2 Pgm Analog 2 ScreenPRO II 2 Pvw VGA 4 64 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 3 Hardware Installation Connection Charts Single Screens Sample Auxiliary Destination Chart The ScreenPRO Ill Controller enables you to configure up to four auxiliary destinations Use the following chart to map the distribution of each auxiliary destination Table 3 11 Sample Aux Destination Connection Chart Aux Destinations Dest Device Inputs from Screen Device PresentationPRO ll Analog DA 1 Out 1 Downstage mon
36. Touch Screen Menu Section 5 Light Adjustment Knob 9 Layer Control Section 2 Presets Section 6 XLR Connector 10 Transition Section 3 Destination Aux Bus 7 Source Selection Bus 4 Joystick Section 8 Layer Functions Section Following are descriptions of each front panel feature 1 Touch Screen Menu Section The Touch Screen Menu Section is used for system configuration setup and operational adjustments such as PIPs and Keys Refer to the Touch Screen Menu Section heading on page 38 for details 2 Presets Section The Preset Section enables you to store and recall Controller setups Each button represents a single look of the projected image Thirty six presets are available Refer to the Presets Section heading on page 39 for details 34 ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 2 Hardware Orientation 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ScreenPRO II Controller Front Panel Destination Aux Bus The Destination Aux Bus enables you to route the Controller s output to one or more destinations such as projectors and Aux auxiliary monitors Four Projector and four Aux destinations are available Refer to the Destination Aux Bus section on page 40 for details Joystick Section The Joystick Section includes a 3 axis joystick that enables you to adjust PIPs Keys and additional system parameters The section also includes dedicated buttons that change the Joystick s assigned function Refer to th
37. Un terminated ScreenPRO II ID 4 OE iaa s RR o Figure 3 3 Required Widescreen Lock Connections sample E For all widescreen systems that utilize BlendPRO II use the following steps to connect Widescreen Lock and Genlock signals 1 External Genlock connections to BlendPRO II are optional a If desired particularly if you will be using synchronous cameras use a BNC cable to connect a PAL or NTSC black burst or a composite sync signal to the GENLOCK IN connector on BlendPRO Il b Do notconnect an external Genlock signal to any ScreenPRO Il unit in your system 2 Widescreen Lock connections are mandatory a Connect a BNC cable from BlendPRO Il s WIDESCREEN LOCK output to the GENLOCK IN connector on the ScreenPRO II unit with the lowest numbered ID ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 77 3 Hardware Installation BlendPRO II Widescreen Lock Connections b Connect the first ScreenPRO II s GENLOCK LOOP connector to the GENLOCK IN connector on the ScreenPRO II unit with the next highest numbered ID C If your system includes three ScreenPRO IIs Connect the second ScreenPRO Il s GENLOCK LOOP connector to the GENLOCK IN connector on the ScreenPRO II with the next highest numbered ID d If your system includes four ScreenPRO lls Connect the third ScreenPRO Il s GENLOCK LOOP connector to the GENLOCK IN connector on the ScreenPRO II uni
38. User s Guide 175 4 Menu Orientation Background Input Setup Menu Background Menu Functions FG Type The figure below illustrates a sample BG Input Setup Menu when a captured frame grab FG_1 FG_2 or FG_3 is selected as the background type BG INPUT SETUP BG_A Destination Figure 4 71 BG Input Setup Menu Frame Grab Type sample When FG_1 FG_2 or FG_3 is selected as the background type a captured still frame can be used as the background This source type cannot be selected until one or more frames have been captured e Press SAVE to store all selected settings Refer to the Frame Grab Menu section on page 142 for details on the Frame Grab Menu In Chapter 6 refer to the Working with Still Frames section on page 246 for frame grab instructions 176 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation DSK Menus DSK Menus The following topics are discussed in this section e DSK Menu Tree e DSK Adjustment Menu e DSK Input Setup Menu DSK Menu Tree The figure below illustrates the DSK Menu Tree E Type DVI Type FG HOME SAVE STATS PICK COLOR GRAB COLOR FORCE ACQUIRE Figure 4 72 DSK Menu Tree All functions and sub menus are discussed in the following sections ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 177 4 Menu Orientation DSK Menus DSK Adjustment Menu The DSK Adjustment Menu provides the tools necessary to adjust t
39. and as long as Toggle is on the last two selected sources will alternate e With Toggle off the source selected in Preview stays in Preview once the transition is complete In this mode you must change Preview sources manually Please note the following important points regarding Mix Mode n Mix Mode there is always a layer available In Preview for a new source to be selected and taken to Program e Four transition combinations are possible Mix Source with Toggle On Mix Source with Toggle Off Swap with Toggle On Swap with Toggle Off ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 6 Operations Working with Layers Working with PIPs in Split Mode In Split Mode the mixer s two layers operate independently Note Even though this mode allows you to display two PIPs or Keys on air it is more restrictive Once both layers are on Program you must transition them off Program make changes and then transition them back on e E Use the following steps to work with PIPs in Split Mode 1 Inthe Layer Control Section ensure that the Split button is On 2 Press the desired layer button A or B Please note The layer button blinks to indicate that it is active for modification Inthe Source Selection Bus the source assigned to the layer blinks On Preview the raster box for the selected layer blinks even if it is hidden under another layer 3 Inthe Layer Functions Section ensure that the
40. press Swap Z Order The visual priority on Preview of the two layers changes Note that the layers remain at their current locations only the priority changes 3 Transition the new look to program with a CUT or AUTO TRANS Using Freeze W Use the following steps to freeze a layer s motion on both Program and Preview This function is useful for PIPs and Keys that use video and animated graphics 1 Inthe Layer Control Section activate the layer that you wish to freeze The button blinks to indicate it is active 2 Inthe Layer Functions Section press Freeze to freeze the layer on both Preview and Program if applicable The button lights to indicate that a freeze is associated with the current layer Note The lit Freeze button indicates the association between the selected layer and the freeze If you select a different layer that does not have an associated freeze the button turns off If you return to the associated layer the button lights again 3 With the layer selected turn off the Freeze button to restore source motion Please note e Ifa source is on Program selecting its layer and pressing Freeze will freeze the image on Program e You can also use Freeze if the PIP or Key is only on Preview and then transition the frozen image to Program 236 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 6 Operations Working with Layer Functions Using Reset 4 The Reset function is
41. this option enables you to assign any of the eight available tallies to any input source There are no restrictions on tally usage For example inputs 1 and 8 could both map to tally 1 if desired Press ADD PATCH to confirm any change that you make on the menu As you dial through the choices the SP Input is mapped to lines will show if the current choice is already in use If the patch already exists and you add it you will be asked to confirm Press DELETE PATCH to delete all input patch registers for the selected input When pressed The Connection Type setting changes to UNDEFINED The Router Input line is cleared This procedure is an excellent starting point if you are uncertain about specific input patch settings In Chapter 5 refer to the Input Patching section on page 198 for important information about the system s default Input Patch Table ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation System Menu Router Specification Menu From the System Menu press ROUTER SETUP to display the Router Specification Menu ROUTER SPECIFICATION Number 1 Name MATRIXPRO1 Manufacturer FOLSOM Router Type ANALOG Number of Inputs 16 Number of Outputs 8 Communication Type ETHERNET COMM DELETE ADD OUTPUT SETUP ROUTER NEW PATCH Figure 4 30 Router Specification Menu sample The Router Specification Menu enables you to define input output and communication parameters for all connect
42. to display the Genlock Menu Source Black Burst Type V Lock Termination 75 Ohm To change termination between 75 Ohm and Hi Z press the Switch on the rear panel next to the Genlock Loop BNC Figure 4 12 Genlock Menu sample The Genlock Menu changes depending on the type of destination selected widescreen or single screen Please note e For single screen destinations the menu tells the ScreenPRO II Controller which type of analog genlock signal is connected to each ScreenPRO Il s Genlock BNC connector and indicates the current setting of the selected ScreenPRO Il s Termination Switch e For widescreen destinations the menu tells the ScreenPRO II Controller which type of analog genlock signal is connected to BlendPRO II s Genlock connector Remember that in this mode each ScreenPRO II s Genlock In connector must be connected to BlendPRO II s Widescreen Lock output and not to an external Genlock source In Chapter 3 refer to the BlendPRO II Widescreen Lock Connections section on page 77 for details The following functions are provided e Source applies to all types of destinations This function sets the genlock source either Black Burst CSync or None e Type applies to all types of destinations Displays the type of genlock When Source None Type Free Run When Source Black Burst Type V Lock When Source CSync Type V Lock e Termination
43. two choices are available Select Input Patch if you want to map Aux sources according to how inputs are patched to buttons on the Source Selection bus Note that this is the typical choice Select Direct Map if you want the Source Selection bus to be a 1 1 mapping of your router inputs for this Aux destination only 8 Onthe Router Name line select the router on which you configured the Aux output s 9 Onthe Router Output line select the specific router output that you wish to designate as the Aux destination Note that only outputs configured as Aux will appear in the list 10 Press BACK to return to the Destination Setup Menu 11 Repeat from step 4 to configure additional Aux outputs 12 Press BACK to return to the System Menu 13 Press HOME to return to the Home Menu 14 Press SAVE to save the new system configuration in memory This completes the procedure for defining Aux destinations The selected button s on the Destination Bus are now active ImagePRO or PrePRO II Aux Destination Setup This section provides instructions for setting up an ImagePRO Aux or PrePRO II Aux destination E Use the following steps to set up an ImagePRO or PrePRO II Aux destination 1 Ensure that your have properly configured one or more router outputs as Aux outputs If not refer to the Router Setup section on page 193 for instructions 2 From the Home Menu press SYSTEM to access the System Menu Pr
44. A or B is pressed f Toggle is On each time you transition the source inside the PIP or Key changes automatically f Toggle is Off you must change sources manually if desired before each transition Ping pong transitions can be performed e n Swap mode both layers can operate independently but only one PIP or key can be on screen at a time and the system alternates between each layer on each transition Each layer can have its own programmed move The toggle mode applies in the normal manner Ping pong transitions cannot be performed 240 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 6 Operations Working with Transitions Working with Transitions This section provides instructions for perform a variety of transitions The following topics are discussed Cut Mix e Wipe e Manual Transitions e Transition Notes Cut Cuts can be performed on both single screen and widescreen destinations E Use the following steps to perform a Cut 1 Set up the desired look in Preview 2 Inthe Transition Section press CUT to instantly cut the setup to Program Mix A Mix or Dissolve can be performed on both single screen and widescreen destinations W Use the following steps to perform a Mix 1 Set up the desired look in Preview 2 Preset the desired transition rate a Press HOME gt EFFECTS to display the Effects Menu b Adjust the Transition Rate field for the desired
45. Approved By 8 3 06 ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide R Pellicano 6 ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 BARCO Visibly yours INOdUCIO Ny 15 Chapter Structure oooocoocococooo teens 16 How to Use This Guides veux oru ari e son RR robada 17 Navigating 4 biceielet MA EIAS Oe tee obe id mentes 17 Table of Contents and Index 000 cee eee eee eens 17 General Operations eese 17 CONVENTIONS aiii ee red abused daa ee ee AR Ed AD x 18 Terms and Definitions 222i 19 System Overview 00 0 enn 20 ScreenPRO Il Controller llle 20 A Word About Layers eee 21 System Combinations 0 0 0 tee 22 Dual Destination System 00 eee eee eee 23 Quadruple Destination System 0 24 Dual Destination plus Widescreen Destination System 25 Dual Destination Dual Aux System Lise 26 Effect Combinations 0 0 00 0 ccc ee ee eee 27 Mixer Effect 1 cs cece sa meisde bee eee eee eee 27 MixeriEllect2 odes edens c Ea eddie Gala 27 Mixer Effect 3 iecoris io RS I IL a 28 Mixer Effect 4 cion a a dd 28 Mixer Effect b coccion coo a 28 Mixer Effect Os esmas alada i 29 Application QUesti0NS oooococococconcoc meh 30 Hardware Orientation o ooooooooooo 31 In This Chapter casio ic id dE ed 31 ScreenPRO Il Controller Re
46. Control Section ensure that the Split button is On Press the Layer A button and configure your fill video as either a PIP or a Key in the normal manner This is the video that will appear inside the key Typically the fill video is a PIP Press the Layer B button and select Key On the Key Type line select Cut Fill Use the Clip Gain and Opacity controls to set the appearance of the fill video as desired Alternate between selecting Layer A and Layer B and use each layer s Size and Position controls to position the fill within the key as desired ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 6 Operations 7 Working with Layers Many creative options are available with Cut Fill keys You can Use the Join mode to link the cut and fill layers together such that they move together as one Refer to the Using Join Mode section on page 237 for details Program a Move with the combined Cut Fill effect Refer to the Using Move section on page 238 for details Program a Move with only the key signal such that the moving key travels over a static fill revealing portions of the fill as the move progresses from point to point 8 Transition the new look to Program with a CUT or AUTO TRANS Refer to the Working with Transitions section on page 241 for details Modifying Keys W Use the following steps to modify a Key 1 Ensure that the Key is selected in the Layer Control Se
47. E Use the following steps to clear a layer from Program 1 Check and compare the Program and Preview monitors and note the layer s that you wish to clear In the Layer Control Section Red LEDs above the buttons indicate the layers that are on Program 2 Ifthe button for the layer that you wish to clear is not lit press to light it and ensure the button is blinking 3 Inthe Layer Control Section press Clear Layer This action turns off the selected layer button and visually clears the layer from Preview This step is valid for all buttons in the Layer Control Section Prior to transition if you want to clear additional layers repeat steps 2 and 3 Transition the new look to program with a CUT or AUTO TRANS The selected layer s will transition off of Program Modifying Layers On Program The ScreenPRO II Controller enables you to modify layers directly on Program without first setting up a look on Preview The mode is typically used for creating and viewing a look on Program especially in conjunction with a large screen projector when the Preview monitor may be too small to realize the desired result W Use the following steps to modify layers directly on Program 1 From the Home Menu press SYSTEM to access the System Menu 2 Scroll to the Modify Layers On Program line and turn the mode ON You can now change PIPs and Keys directly on Program Please note e When you switch sources directly on Program yo
48. Effects Menu ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 2 Hardware Orientation using the Effects Menu Note Front Panel Sections CUT press to instantly cut the images from Preview to Program Auto Trans press to transition automatically from Preview to Program at a pre defined rate using the selected transition type MIX or WIPE Auto transition rates are defined Because the Controller s Effects Menu is destination based WIPE and MIX effects can be assigned per destination For example with destinations 1 and 3 lit select WIPE Next with destination 2 lit select MIX Next select all three destinations and press AUTO TRANS to perform a wipe on destinations 1 and 3 and a dissolve on destination 2 T Bar enables you to perform smooth manual transitions Each time the T Bar is moved from limit to limit the setup on Preview transitions to Program using the selected transition type MIX or WIPE For additional information on transitions and the Effects Menu n Chapter 4 refer to the Effects Menu section on page 146 for menu details e n Chapter 6 refer to the Working with Transitions section on page 241 for operational procedures ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 51 2 Hardware Orientation Front Panel Sections 52 ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide BARCO Visibly yours 3 Hardware Installation In This Chapter This chapter provides c
49. Example Press Learn 2 to store the ScreenPRO II Controller setup in preset register 2 Button labels on the Touch Screen menus are shown in bold uppercase letters between braces A Press BORDER to When a sequence of menu selections is required to complete a given procedure the gt symbol is used to divide each successive menu picks A To access the Genlock Menu press HOME gt OUTPUT gt GLCK 18 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 1 Introduction Terms and Definitions Terms and Definitions The following terms and definitions are used throughout this guide A Background is an unscaled source typically originating from a computer A background source appears at the system s lowest priority visually in back of all other sources The abbreviation BG is also used throughout this guide for Background The term Controller is synonymous with ScreenPRO II Controller A Key is an electronic and visual process whereby one image is electronically superimposed over another source or background Keys are typically used for titles logos and banners A Layer is an image display element such as a PIP Key or Background that has an associated visual priority either in front or in back of another layer A LOGO is a full screen image that is selected from one of three still frames that you can capture with each individual ScreenPRO II unit A maximum of 12 sti
50. II on the outputs of the two ScreenPRO II units designated as widescreen Single Screen Single Screen Widescreen Inputs from routers and direct sources ScreenPRO Il Controller ScreenPRO II en ams pn aa LIT Mt BlendPRO II Ethernet oooo0o0o0o0o Hub Switch Figure 1 5 ScreenPRO II Controller system with one widescreen destination The BlendPRO Ill accepts up to four inputs thus widescreen systems can be configured with dual as shown above triple or quadruple screen blends Important For all Widescreen configurations using BlendPRO II ensure that you review the BlendPRO II Widescreen Lock Connections section on page 77 in Chapter 3 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 25 1 Introduction System Overview Dual Destination Dual Aux System The figure below illustrates a system that includes two individual ScreenPRO II units two single screen projectors and two Aux destinations e The standard Aux destination is a single monitor that takes its input from one router output in a single format e The PresentationPRO Aux destination takes its input s from multiple routers and sources in multiple formats When connected to a single monit
51. LANTRONIX Press COMM SETUP to display one of three Comm Setup Menus depending on the selected Communication Type Refer to the Comm Setup Menus section on page 129 for details Press DELETE ROUTER to delete the current specification and change the selected router Number to lt EMPTY gt Press ADD NEW after choosing an empty configuration s Manufacturer Type Number of Inputs and Number of Outputs to save a new router specification Press OUTPUT PATCH to display the Output Patch Menu Refer to the Output Patch Menu section on page 132 for details Router Interface Notes For selected third party routers additional interface information is provided below Extron Router Support The ScreenPRO II Controller supports Extron routers enabled with Ethernet Inthe Router Specification Menu set the Communication Type to ETHERNET Inthe Ethernet Setup Menu dial in the router s IP address and keep the port number set to 23 Press TEST COMM to establish communications Due to the Extron protocol the router s matrix size will not be read by the Controller but will instead default to 16 x 16 When you return from the Ethernet Setup Menu to the Router Specification Menu dial in the proper number of inputs and outputs to gain full access to the router Note Ensure that you set the router s IP address to work with the ScreenPRO II Controller s 192 168 0 xxx standard e g 192 168 0 245 A
52. LOGO Menu functions are provided e Type enables you to select still frames FG_1 FG 2 FG 3 or Black as the LOGO source Use the Frame Grab Menu io capture frames Refer to the Frame Grab Menu section on page 142 for details e Inthe Temp FG Info section File Name displays the selected still frame s temporary storage register Resolution displays the resolution of the selected still frame Once you have reviewed all of the sections in this chapter please continue with Chapter 5 System Setup on page 183 182 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide BARCO Visibly yours 5 System Setup In This Chapter This chapter provides comprehensive instructions for setting up the ScreenPRO II Controller system The following topics are discussed e Setup Prerequisites e System Setup Sequence e System Power Up e Return to Factory Default e Touch Screen Calibration e Programming EDID e Restore from Flash Memory Card e Standard Destination Setup e Router Setup e AUX Destination Setup input Patching e Output Format Setup e Sync Setup e Genlock Setup e Projector Setup e Background Setup e Input Setup e DSK Setup Procedure e LOGO Setup Procedure e Saving the Setup e Backup to Flash Memory Card Note Once you have reviewed all of the sections in this chapter please continue with Chapter 6 Operations on page 215
53. Menu From the Input Menu press ASPECT RATIO to display the Aspect Ratio Menu ASPECT RATIO SRC_1 Mode Custom Ratio 1 279 Figure 4 5 Aspect Ratio Menu sample The Aspect Ratio Menu enables you to change the input s aspect ratio to pre defined configurations or enter a custom configuration if desired Mode select 16 9 5 4 4 3 3 2 1 1 or Custom aspect ratios e Ratio when Custom is selected use the knob to enter a custom aspect ratio The field is hidden when pre defined ratios are selected 94 ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation Input Menu Sizing Menu From the Input Menu press SIZING to display one of two context sensitive Sizing Menus they change depending on the selected Sampling Mode e 1f1 1 Sampling is selected the 1 1 Sizing Menu appears e fOversample is selected the Oversample Sizing Menu appears Each menu and function is described below 1 1 Sizing Menu The figure below illustrates the 1 1 Sizing Menu All functions apply to the selected source 1 1 SIZING SRC_1 ID ALL Layer Clock Phase H Total H Active H Position V Total V Active V Position FORCE ACQUIRE Figure 4 6 1 1 Sizing Menu sample With 1 1 Sampling enabled the following timing parameters allow you to adjust the image to properly fit the layer s blinking raster box e ID indicates the ID of the associated ScreenPRO II Note The ID
54. Network Setup Menu 0 000 eee eee 124 Input Source Patch Menu 000 cee eee eee 125 Router Specification Menu 0000 eee 127 Comm Setup Menus 0 00 cece eee eee 129 Output Patch Menu 132 Miscellaneous Menu sseseeseeseeee nh 133 Miscellaneous Menu Tree 1 1 0 2 0 cee ee 133 Miscellaneous Menu Description 00e eee ee eee 134 Miscellaneous Sub Menus 00020 esee eee 135 Console Port Setup Menu 0 0 c eee ee eee 135 Lockout Code Menu 0 0 c cece eee eee 136 EDID DVI Input Format Menu 04 137 Keypad Backlight Menu 0 00 eee eee 138 LCD Settings Menu 0 0 6 eee eee 139 User Preference Menu 0 ee eee eee ees 140 Backup Restore Menu 200000 eee eaee 141 Frame Grab Menu si ariii o en eee 142 Frame Grab Menu Tree eee 142 Frame Grab Menu Description 0 000 cece eee eee 143 Frame Grab Name Menu 000 00 eee eee 145 Effects Menu een eerie ci hihi deo qlee Heed 146 Status ME und dh o ake len NER E HENDRER RIDERE 147 PIP Adjustment Menu 00 0 RII 148 PIP Adjustment Menu Tree 0 eee eee 148 PIP Adjustment Menu Description 200e 2 eae 149 PIP Adjustment Menu Functions 0 0 eee eae 149 PIP Adjustment Sub Menus lesse eee eee 150 Border Menu ocio do a re VERE 151 Shadow MenU
55. Setup the desired look on Preview Remember that one preset equals a single look of the Controller including the current state of all mixers layers sources and the DSK 2 Select the page on which you want to store the preset In the Preset Section hold down Page then press the desired Preset button The Red LED above the button lights to indicate the current page 3 To store the preset press Learn the desired Preset button The Touch Screen displays a confirmation message and the overall look of the Controller is now saved into that register Recalling Presets E Use the following steps to recall a preset 1 Check the available resources on Program If the resources layers that you wish to recall are already in use on Program they must first be cleared before the recall is permitted 2 Select the page from which you want to recall the preset In the Preset Section hold down Page then press the desired Preset button The Red LED above the button lights to indicate the current page 3 To recall a Preset simply press the desired Preset button to recall the stored look to Preview Deleting Presets B Use the following steps to delete a preset 1 Select the page from which you want to delete a preset In the Preset Section hold down Page then press the desired Preset button 2 Inthe Preset Section hold down Delete then press the desired Preset button to delete that registe
56. Step 4 In this procedure you will calibrate the Touch Screen A Prerequisite Ensure that you are familiar with the LCD Settings Menu In Chapter 4 refer to the LCD Settings Menu section on page 139 E Use the following steps to calibrate the Touch Screen 1 2 3 4 On the Home Menu press MISC to access the Miscellaneous Menu Press LCD SETTINGS to show the LCD Settings Menu Press LCD Cal to display the first Touch Screen Calibration Menu Follow the directions on the menu to complete the calibration procedure ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 189 5 System Setup Programming EDID Programming EDID ScreenPRO II Controller system setup Step 5 In this procedure you will program EDID Extended Display Identification Data as a prerequisite for background and DSK setup The procedure guarantees proper communications at the preferred resolution between each ScreenPRO Il s DVI inputs and your system s PCs A Prerequisite Ensure that you are familiar with the EDID DVI Input Format Menu In Chapter 4 refer to the EDID DVI Input Format Menu section on page 137 B Use the following steps to program each ScreenPRO II s EDID 1 oo PP amp 10 11 12 13 Ensure that ScreenPRO II output format matches your projector s native resolution In Chapter 4 refer to the Output Menu Functions section on page 102 for output format information Ensure that the computer
57. System Menu 2 Press INPUT PATCH to display the Input Source Patch Menu 3 On the Source Number line select the source button on the Controller that you want to patch 4 Onthe Connection Type line select the method by which the source is connected Select a router by name e g MatrixPRO or Select an individual ScreenPRO II ID or Select ALL SP to assume connections from D As to similar inputs on all ScreenPRO IIs in your configuration 5 If you selected a router on the Router Input line select the physical router input that you wish to associate with the Controller s source number 198 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 11 12 13 5 System Setup Output Format Setup If you selected an individual ScreenPRO II ID or ALL SP on the ScreenPRO Il Input line select the specific input connector on the ScreenPRO Il On the Tally Number line select the tally that you want to associate with the source button Press ADD PATCH to confirm your changes Repeat the procedure from step 3 to patch additional Controller buttons Optional If required press DELETE PATCH to clear all registers for a selected Controller input This enables you to start again with an undefined patch Press BACK to return to the System Menu Press HOME to return to the Home Menu Press SAVE to save the new system configuration in memory Important If you elect to use tallies the optional
58. Tally board must be installed and relay connections must be run to the devices that you wish to tally In Appendix A refer to the Tally Connector section on page 262 for connector pinouts Output Format Setup ScreenPRO II Controller system setup Step 11 A Prerequisites Ensure that you are familiar with the Output Menu In Chapter 4 refer to the Output Menu Functions section on page 102 In this procedure you will configure the output format for each ScreenPRO II that is used in your ScreenPRO II Controller system Important Be sure to select your projector s native resolution and a frame rate that is consistent with your inputs for example if you are using 59 94 NTSC video inputs run the output at the same rate in order to be synchronous E Use the following steps to set up the ScreenPRO Il output format 1 2 NOMA From the Home Menu press OUTPUT to display the Output Menu On the Destination Bus select the destination that you want to configure On the Format line select the resolution and frame rate at which you want to drive the destination s projector s To minimize synchronization problems select a frame rate that is consistent with your input sources Press APPLY FORMAT to accept the selection Repeat from step 2 to set additional destination output formats Press HOME to return to the Home Menu Press SAVE to save the new system configuration in memo
59. UDS200 User s Guide for instructions Using an Ethernet cable connect the UDS200 to the same LAN that includes the ScreenPRO II Controller The ScreenPRO II Controller supports Lantronix models UDS100 and UDS200 In Chapter 4 refer to the Lantronix Setup Menu section on page 131 for addition information about Lantronix setup 8 Source Connections a b 74 If you are using external routing Ensure that all sources are properly connected to your analog and digital routers Connect analog router outputs to analog inputs 1 and 2 on each ScreenPRO lI These are the default analog router inputs e Connect digital router outputs to SDI inputs 1 and 2 on each ScreenPRO ll If you are using internal routing e As required connect discreet analog source outputs to the desired analog inputs on each ScreenPRO lII e As required connect discreet digital source outputs to the desired digital inputs on each ScreenPRO Il f analog DAs are utilized recommended connect analog source outputs to DA inputs and DA outputs to the desired analog inputs on each ScreenPRO Il ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 3 Hardware Installation System Installation If digital DAs are utilized recommended connect digital source outputs to DA inputs and DA outputs to the desired digital inputs on each ScreenPRO Il c For widescreen backgrounds and DSK sources connect your computers DVI outpu
60. User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation Clone Setup Menu Mirror both images move together as if a mirror is positioned in the middle of the widescreen overlap region For example if you adjust H Position both images move towards and away from the center of the widescreen Figure 4 61 Clone Mirror Mode e Offset if Offset is selected on the Clone Type line this field enables you to set the offset in pixels If Mirror is selected the field is hidden ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 163 4 Menu Orientation Crop Menu Crop Menu With a PIP or Key selected press Crop in the Joystick Section to display the Crop Menu as shown in the sample below CROP ADJUSTMENT ALL SIDES H Size lt 53 3 gt V Size lt 50 0 gt Aspect Ratio Mode Ratio OPERATION JOY Z TO CROP SIZE TRACK SIZE Figure 4 62 Crop Menu sample The Crop Menu enables you crop the sides of a PIP or a Key without affecting the size of the source image The menu works with the Top Left and Bottom Right buttons e When Top Left is enabled the menu adjustments only affect the top and left sides of the PIP or Key The legend on the menu s top line reads TOP LEFT e When Bottom Right is enabled menu adjustments only affect the bottom and right sides of the PIP or Key The legend on the top line reads BOTTOM RIGHT e When the Top Left and Bottom Right buttons are off menu adjustments affect all sid
61. User s Guide 269 C Upgrading Software Software Upgrade Overview Software Upgrade Overview Firmware files for the ScreenPRO II Controller system are loaded into the hardware at power up These files are stored in the unit s onboard flash memory which can be upgraded using a serial or Ethernet connection to a PC or laptop The desired connection is made through the Console or Ethernet port on the ScreenPRO I Controller s rear panel in conjunction with the Flash Loader utility supplied with each upgrade The Flash Loader enables you to update the Flash memory with the latest software revision The utility should be run from a PC s hard drive recommended Hardware Requirements The following hardware items are required to upgrade the ScreenPRO II Controller e BM compatible computer with an available COM port or Ethernet port If you elect to connect serially a serial cable conforming to EIA RS 232 specifications e g standard modem cable is required The cable should have a DB 9 male connector on one end for connection to the ScreenPRO Il Controllers Console port and the appropriate connector on the other end for connection to your PC typically a DB 9 Software Requirements 270 The following list outlines software requirements for upgrading the ScreenPRO II Controller Ensure that your PC or laptop uses the Windows 2000 or XP operating systems e Software files Flash File Loader This s
62. absence of properties guaranteed in writing or due to the intent or gross negligence or part of Barco If the purchaser or a third party carries out modifications or repairs on goods delivered by Barco or if the goods are handled incorrectly in particular if the systems are commissioned operated incorrectly or if after the transfer of risks the goods are subject to influences not 2 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide agreed upon in the contract all guarantee claims of the purchaser will be rendered invalid Not included in the guarantee coverage are system failures which are attributed to programs or special electronic circuitry provided by the purchaser e g interfaces Normal wear as well as normal maintenance are not subject to the guarantee provided by Barco either The environmental conditions as well as the servicing and maintenance regulations specified in this manual must be complied with by the customer Trademarks Brand and product names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective holders All brand and product names mentioned in this manual serve as comments or examples and are not to be understood as advertising for the products or their manufactures Company Address Barco Media and Entertainment BARCO 11101 Trade Center Drive Rancho Cordova California 95670 USA Phone 916 859 2500 e Fax 916 859 2515 e Websites Visibly yours www f
63. also be transferred to all active destinations Note Every sub menu under the Input Menu includes a SAVE button This enables you to save the input at any point in the adjustment process regardless of your location within the menu tree Press APPLY FORMAT to apply a manually selected input format In Appendix A refer to the ScreenPRO Il Input and Output Resolutions section on page 263 for details on all available resolutions Press SIZING to display the Sizing Menu Refer to the Sizing Menu section on page 95 for details Press COLOR BALANCE to display the Color Balance Menu Refer to the Color Balance Menu section on page 98 for details Press FORCE ACQUIRE to force the system to perform the optimum image setup Use this feature as a good starting point for setup Note FORCE ACQUIRE only works on the selected input connector Be sure to select the correct connector type before issuing the FORCE ACQUIRE command Input Sub Menus The following sub menus can be accessed from the Input Menu Input Configuration Menu Aspect Ratio Menu Sizing Menu Color Balance Menu 92 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation Input Menu Input Configuration Menu From the Input Menu press CFG to display the Input Configuration Menu INPUT CONFIGURATION File Number 1 File Name IFILE_001 Delete Applies To Dest 1 SAVE DELETE Figure 4 4 Input Configu
64. and Position Use the Size and Position controls in the PIP Adjustment Menu to manipulate the PIP on Preview In Chapter 4 refer to the PIP Adjustment Menu Description section on page 149 for details Source Size Press Source in the Joystick Section to display the Input Source Adjustment Menu Use the Size and Position controls to manipulate the source image within the PIP In Chapter 4 refer to the Source Adjustment Menu Description section on page 167 for details Crop Press Crop in the Joystick Section to display the Crop Adjustment Menu Select the type of crop the aspect ratio and the image s H and V size In Chapter 4 refer to the Crop Menu section on page 164 for details Border From the PIP Shadow or Effects menus press BORDR to display the Border Menu Select the border s style color and size In Chapter 4 refer to the Border Menu section on page 151 for menu details Shadow From the PIP Border or Effects menus press SHDOW to display the Shadow Menu Choose the shadow s size position and transparency In Chapter 4 refer to the Shadow Menu section on page 152 for details Special Effects From the PIP Shadow or Border menus press EFX to display the Image Effects Menu Select the desired effect such as monochrome invert hue and strobe In Chapter 4 refer to the Image Effects Menu section on page 153 for details Global Functions Remember that the following
65. are thin vertical green lines at the edges of the screens that are used to denote the actual projected image area Using edge feathering and data doubling the BlendPRO II provides perfect and seamless wide screen images Because of the required overlap a portion of the original image is unused and does not get projected The location of the unused portion depends on your selected justification left or center With each type of justification the Wide Screen Markers accurately denote the unused portion thus enabling you to properly compose your screens e Left Justified Markers The figure below illustrates the Wide Screen Marker in a left justified configuration Images to the left of the green vertical line are projected Images to the right are not Preview 1 Preview 2 Wide Screen Marker Figure 6 2 Wide Screen Marker Left Justification e Center Justified Markers The figure below illustrates the two Wide Screen Markers in a center justified configuration Images between the two vertical green lines are projected Images outside of the lines are not Preview 1 Preview 2 Wide Wide Screen Screen Marker Marker Figure 6 3 Wide Screen Marker Center Justification ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 6 Operations Operational Configuration Lookahead Preview The ScreenPRO Il Controller uses a lookahead preview system that ensures the accuracy of all your transitions The look or appearan
66. are used each with an output resolution of 1024 x 768 and an overlap of 200 pixels the Total H Res is 2 1024 200 1 1848 As you adjust the Total H Res the Overlap Width value tracks and the wide Screen markers adjust accordingly e Total V Res displays the vertical resolution of the wide screen configuration This field is fixed e Background Format selects the method by which your background graphics were originally produced Edge butted choose this option if your background graphics were produced with no pre data doubling e g typically from a multi head graphics card Overlapped choose this option if your backgrounds were produced using pre data doubling e g such as from a Dataton system e Marker Mode enables and disables the system s wide screen markers to show the boundaries of active data In Chapter 6 refer to the Wide Screen Markers section on page 218 for details e Overlap Width sets the overlap in pixels between projectors As you adjust the width the Total H Res value tracks and the wide screen markers adjust accordingly e Alignment Test Pattern enables or disables the test pattern used for performing projector lens shift and registration adjustments e Data Doubling enables or disables data doubling Typically the function is only disabled when unscaled background sources are pre data doubled In Chapter 3 refer to the Overview of Edge Blending Tech
67. backup and restore 253 dual destination 23 dual destination plus widescreen 25 dual destination dual Aux 26 pa 76 installation ooo ooo oooooo 73 menu description 109 menu tree s eller 108 OVEIVIEW cialis Eu eee E RW UAE 20 DOWer Up ce eR ERRARE DS 187 quadruple destination 24 restore from flash memory 254 SetuP iii RI sare hose way ees 183 setup prerequisites 184 setup sequence 185 T Table default router input patch 198 default router output patch 194 Tally connections lessen 76 connector pinouts 262 connector controller 32 diagnostic menu 2 005 113 modes ira Ei AE eli 109 number 22 eb ee etree ae hes 126 Option 3x uses eate e em ele toes es 20 optional board oo ooooo o 32 working With 0 0 eee ee eee 253 Fe 1 aaa a oe 35 51 amp Joystick menu description 115 Technical support information 268 Temporary memory esses 143 Termination A 76 103 status check o ooooooooooooooo o 118 SWIC oo kee ea ew ae eri 78 TES occas a a 18 19 equipment marking o o 5 Test pattern alignment 00 4 106 107 menu description 105 Toggle ii sarees Res 228 A er atte eae ee at
68. can be accessed from the Miscellaneous Menu Console Port Setup Menu Lockout Code Menu EDID DVI Input Format Menu Keypad Backlight Menu LCD Settings Menu User Preference Menu Backup Restore Menu Console Port Setup Menu From the Miscellaneous Menu press CONSL to display the Console Port Setup Menu CONSOLE PORT SETUP Baud Rate 115200 Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Figure 4 37 Console Port Setup Menu sample This menu enables you to verify or change ScreenPRO II Controller s serial port communication settings for the Ext Comm port The following functions are provided Baud Rate sets the port s baud rate Range 2400 to 115200 Data Bits sets the port s data bits Range 5 to 8 Parity sets the port s parity Even Odd or None Stop Bits sets the port s stop bits 1 1 5 or 2 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 135 4 Menu Orientation Miscellaneous Menu Lockout Code Menu From the Miscellaneous Menu press LOCK to display the Lockout Code Menu LOCKOUT CODE Lockout Code Default CHANGE CODE Figure 4 38 Lockout Code Menu sample The Lockout Code Menu enables you to define a programmable lockout code so that the Controller can be locked out from unauthorized users The following functions are provided e The Lockout Code field defines which code is currently enabled Select Default to enable the system s default lockout code
69. cccocccccccoc aa 152 Image Effects Menu 0 eee eee 153 Key Mena ii 155 Key Menu Tree eiii cia el ee ea ees Aria 155 Key Menu Description llle 156 Key Menu Functions oooocooocrorrr eee 156 Luma Key Functions 0 0 cee eee eee eee 157 Color Key Functions 00 cee eee eee 157 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 9 Table of Contents Chapter 5 Cut Fill Key Functions 0 00000 e eee eee 158 Key Sub Menus yeso a Mg Ane ee AR Gee eae 158 Matte MenU ocooccooocr nes 159 Key Adjustment Menu 0 0 eee eee eee 160 Clone Setup Menu ooccccccoco tees 162 GropiMen Ul cio mta RE GRATI REI ORE E DAMES Re 164 Source Adjustment Menus 00 000 e eee eee eee 165 Source Adjustment Menu Trees 0 00 cece eee eee 166 Source Adjustment Menu Descripti0N ooooooooooo 167 Source Adjustment Menu Functions 000 0 sees 168 Background Input Setup Menu 0 6 0 eee 170 Background Input Setup Menu Tree 20000000ee 171 Shared Background Menu Functions 2 0005 172 Background Menu Functions Matte Type 173 BG Matte Menu a na nananana aaa 174 Background Menu Functions DVI Type 175 Background Menu Functions FG Type 2 008 176 DSK MENUS 3 actus etn E a ear ame mro inking et eA 177 DSK Menu Tree 5 oie es a ee eed
70. configuration per card The minimum size card that the system accepts is 512 MB The card also enables users to transfer configurations between Controllers as required In Chapter 6 refer to the Using Backup and Restore section on page 253 for instructions ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 2 Hardware Orientation 4 5 6 7 ScreenPRO II Controller Rear Panel Ext Comm Port One 9 pin D Ext Comm connector is provided for RS 232 communications with a serial device such as a router The port is configured as follows DCE 115K baud 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity bits In Appendix A refer to the Serial Connector section on page 261 for pinouts Console Port One 9 pin D connector is provided for RS 232 command line communications with the ScreenPRO II Controller and for downloading code in the field The port is configured as follows DCE 115K baud 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity bits The serial port can be connected to a standard PC serial port with a straight through DB 9 to DB 9 cable In Appendix A refer to the Serial Connector section on page 261 for pinout details Ethernet Port One RJ 45 connector is provided for 10 100BaseT Ethernet communications with the ScreenPRO II Controller When optionally connecting the Controller to peripheral devices such as BlendPRO II a standard Ethernet hub or switch on an isolated network is recommended The Etherne
71. designated as an Aux output c Onthe ImagePRO Input or PrePRO II Input line select the ImagePRO or PrePRO II input to which the SDI router output is connected 11 In the DVI section applies to ImagePRO Aux destinations only a Onthe DVI Router Name line select the router from which DVI sources will be routed to the ImagePRO b Onthe DVI Router Output line select the specific router output that you designated as an Aux output c Onthe ImagePRO Input line select the ImagePRO input to which the DVI router output is connected 12 Press BACK to return to the Destination Setup Menu 13 Repeat from step 4 to configure another ImagePRO or PrePRO II Aux destination 14 Press BACK to return to the System Menu 15 Press HOME to return to the Home Menu 16 Press SAVE to save the new system configuration in memory This completes the procedure for defining ImagePRO or PrePRO II Aux destinations The selected button s on the Destination Bus are now active Please note e For proper operation ImagePRO and PrePRO II devices must be connected to the ScreenPRO Il Controller via Ethernet e magePRO and PrePRO II output setups must be performed locally on the units themselves e Only one router of each type Analog DVI and SDI can be connected to an ImagePRO unit ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 197 5 System Setup Input Patching Input Patching ScreenPRO II Controller system setup Step 10
72. destination setup instructions refer to the following sections in Chapter 5 e Standard Destination Setup page 192 e Router Setup page 193 e AUX Destination Setup page 195 The following topics are discussed in this section e Activating Destinations e Clearing Destinations Routing Sources to Destinations Activating Destinations B Use the following steps to activate and deactivate destinations 1 To activate a single Standard Destination turn DEST AUX off then press the desired button on the Destination Bus All other destinations will turn off 2 To activate multiple Standard Destinations turn DEST AUX off then simultaneously press the desired buttons on the Destination Bus Any other active destinations will turn off 3 To activate a single Aux Destination turn DEST AUX on then press the desired button on the Destination Bus All other Aux destinations will turn off 4 To activate multiple Aux Destinations turn DEST AUX off then simultaneously press the desired buttons on the Destination Bus Any other active Aux e Remember that destination buttons are not toggles e The selected buttons light when activated Any combination of active destination e When you press a single button or a group of buttons your selection is mutually NA destinations will turn off In each case please note buttons can be selected exclusive with all other active destinations e Press the All
73. destination type Forstandard destinations e Displays Single Screen SP if one ScreenPRO ll has been added to the destination s configuration e Displays Widescreen SP if two three or four ScreenPRO lls have been added to the destination s configuration For Aux destinations enables you to select between Aux ImagePRO Aux or PrePRO II Aux destinations Note When Aux 1 2 3 or 4 is selected the AUX SETUP button appears which enables you to set Aux destination parameters Refer to the Aux Destination Setup section on page 120 for details ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 117 4 Menu Orientation System Menu SP to Add as you rotate the ADJ knob lists all available ScreenPRO Il units that can be assigned to the selected destination Units are identified by their ID number If a ScreenPRO II is currently assigned to another destination it will not appear in the list SP to Remove lists all assigned ScreenPRO II units that can be removed from the selected destination Units are identified by their ID number Routing Mode enables you to set the ScreenPRO Il s routing mode either Internal or External This function instructs the system how sources are used on the assigned ScreenPRO II unit s At the bottom of the menu the Status section dynamically lists the ScreenPRO I IDs assigned to the current destination Press ADD to add the selected ScreenPRO II on the SP to Add line
74. eee 107 K Key ies ec Tux DERE Y 19 adjustment menu description 160 DUO ir vemm nee 46 Clip mess see caet fut eer 157 color functions o oooo 157 cut fill functions 158 detect menu description 116 fill SOUlCE ceo eee ee eet 157 FINE ADJUST 161 frame effect 150 160 168 functions luma lssun 157 galli usse RET m ae xU Ded i 157 H Position o ooooooooo oo 160 H Size o eae eR 160 invert mode 0 000 157 menu description 156 menu tree o oooo oo oooooo 155 166 modifying eee eee ee eee 233 move rate co 160 Opacity sz pr ted 157 158 priority caa e O 22 TOSCLS nar e ot la r e LE 161 284 source adjustment menu description 167 sub menu description 158 switch sources 0 0 eee eee 226 lyDe iue i eR Rb REMR ERU 156 using with mix mode 232 using with split mode 231 V Position oo ooooooooooo 160 V SIZE ici sm re bee VAY ae ee 160 Key Frame Effect 00 0 00 146 Keyboard port controller 32 Keypad backlight o o o o 138 menu description 138 L Lantronix inops O x nues 131 CHANNEL iade ER ELE P emis 131 model EDS200 Device Server 74 setup menu ooo 131 Layer aeiee aiian aae den duet 19 90 DUTLONS di dp
75. for the selected input To access the menu e Press a blue layer button in the Layer Control Section the button blinks e Select an input on the Source Selection Bus the button blinks Press INPUT on the Home Menu Note The menu cannot be accessed without a selected layer An error message will be shown The currently selected input appears in the menu s upper right corner The menu tracks the selected input thus if you switch inputs on the Source Selection Bus the menu is immediately re assigned to the new input Important From a conceptual standpoint there are no direct connections to a ScreenPRO II scaler All connections whether they are from a single source or an external router connect to the internal router matrix of each ScreenPRO Il ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 89 4 Menu Orientation Input Menu Input Menu Functions The following Input Menu functions are provided e Destination indicates the destination on which you are currently working as selected on the Destination Bus e 1D indicates the ID of the associated ScreenPRO II Note The ID line only appears when a widescreen destination is selected If All is shown in a widescreen configuration menu values represent those of the lowest numbered ID in the destination When a parameter is adjusted all values for all ScreenPRO II s in the destination will snap to the new value If an
76. from Flash Memory Card Restore from Flash Memory Card ScreenPRO II Controller system setup Step 6 optional In this procedure you will restore your system configuration from flash memory provided that you previously backed up your system to the flash memory card A Prerequisite Ensure that you are familiar with the Backup Restore Menu In Chapter 4 refer to the Backup Restore Menu section on page 141 E Use the following steps to restore your system from the flash memory card 1 NOONAN 8 Ensure that your flash memory card is properly inserted in the Controller s MEMORY CARD slot on the rear panel On the Home Menu press MISC to access the Miscellaneous Menu Press BACKUP RESTORE to display the Backup Restore Menu Press CHECK CARD to ensure that the Controller recognizes the card On the Device line select Ctrlr SP to perform a complete restore On the Controller Options line select All On the SP to Restore line select All Press RESTORE to restore the selected system configuration At the conclusion of this procedure your system is completely set up exactly the way that you left it when you performed a complete system backup No further setup operations are required Please continue with system operations Refer to Chapter 6 Operations on page 215 for details ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 191 5 System Setup Standard Destination Setup Stand
77. front panel controls In Chapter 2 refer to the ScreenPRO II Controller Front Panel section on page 34 for details e Ensure that you are familiar with all system menus and in particular the operational menus In Chapter 4 refer to the following sections for details Refer to the PIP Adjustment Menu section on page 148 for details on all PIP adjustment menu items Refer to the Key Menu section on page 155 for details on all Key adjustment menu items Refer to the Source Adjustment Menus section on page 165 for details on all input source adjustment parameters Tip As you review each function it is recommended that you try out and practice each feature at the ScreenPRO II Controller itself using a fully configured system consisting of Program and Preview monitors projectors and all the necessary sources and backgrounds Note In this chapter when a sequence of menu selections is required to complete a given procedure the gt symbol is used to divide each successive menu pick A Example To access the Genlock Menu press HOME gt OUTPUT gt GLCK 216 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 6 Operations Operational Configuration Operational Configuration The following topics are discussed in this section Monitor Layout Touch Screen Calibration Lookahead Preview Understanding Raster Boxes A Word About LOS Setting User Preferences Underst
78. global functions are always available Press Reset in the Joystick Section to reset the current effect e g PIP Key crop etc to a nominal default value ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 6 Operations Working with Layers Press Full Screen to bring the PIP to full screen using the source s height as the defining factor Press Freeze to freeze the PIP on both Program and Preview Press again to unfreeze 10 Transition Transition the new look to program with a CUT or AUTO TRANS Refer to the Working with Transitions section on page 241 for details Working with Keys in Split Mode In Split Mode the mixer s two layers operate independently Note Even though this mode allows you to display two PIPs or Keys on air it is more restrictive Once both layers are on Program you must transition them off Program make changes and then transition them back on W Use the following steps to work with Keys in Split Mode 1 2 In the Layer Control Section ensure that the Split button is On Press the desired layer button A or B Please note The layer button blinks to indicate that it is active for modification Inthe Source Selection Bus the source assigned to the layer blinks On Preview the raster box for the selected layer blinks even if it is hidden under another layer In the Layer Functions Section ensure that the KEY button is lit and the Key Menu is
79. i pee a 272 memory backup setup procedure 213 memory card 0 32 141 memory restore from 191 Force acquire 0 0c eee e eens 90 Format 0 0 ccc eee eA 90 background 0000e eae 175 281 Index EDID tata ee CEs DR rro 137 QU PUES aaa a 102 setup output 0000 199 Formula total H res 107 FRAME GRAB 000 cee ee 87 Frame grab background 0e eee eee 172 background menu functions 176 capture format 5 144 current name 145 erase selected uuu 144 frame number 00005 144 menu description 143 menu functions 144 menu tree ors trot ays tad tr da de hate 142 NAM Lata rd Ou Rene 145 name menu description 145 NEW NAME sre nuen a e ic 145 Save frame coa a es 144 saved location 145 single screen destinations 143 widescreen destinations 143 Freeze DUTTON xr gatita A 47 USING AA 236 Front panel 000 c eee eee eee ees 34 Sections 2 2 oe dad hes Chon 37 ETS tia 271 Full Screen DUELO daa rr tna 46 USING e in ai ede 235 Fuse uim eel ie ee uS 33 G Gain DSK nen rara areca IE 178 Key data 157 Gamma m civ eae ei edie 91 104 feathering 0 ee eee eee ee 107 General operations Lun
80. individual ID is shown e g 2 it represents that ScreenPRO II alone and adjustments will only affect that unit e Layer for widescreen destinations indicates the layer on which you are adjusting the selected input Important In a widescreen configuration because the electronics on individual ScreenPRO II scalers may not match from unit to unit you may be required to adjust ScreenPRO II scalers and layers individually by first selecting a specific destination ID followed by a specific layer e input Connector selects the physical connector to which the input is connected on the ScreenPRO Il either HD 15 or BNC Note The choice of available formats varies depending on the selected connector For example when BNC is selected only Standard Definition and High Definition resolutions can be selected e Format this line performs two functions Displays the resolution that is automatically determined by the FORCE ACQUIRE function Enables you to set the resolution of the incoming source if desired Once the format is selected manually press APPLY FORMAT to accept the selection In Appendix A refer to the ScreenPRO Il Input and Output Resolutions section on page 263 for details on all available resolutions Note Selecting a format manually automatically defaults the Input Type and Color Space In some cases the Input Type and Color Space cannot be changed due to
81. multiple standard destinations Route Source 2 to Destination 1 and Source 3 to Destination 2 a mos mop m se Turn DEST AUX off Press Destination 1 Press LAYER A Select Source 2 Press Destination 2 Press LAYER A Select Source 3 Press Destinations 1 and 2 simultaneously Press AUTO TRANS A Single source to multiple Aux and standard destinations Route Source 3 to Destinations 1 and 2 and Aux Destinations 1 and 2 a pep y Turn DEST AUX off Press Destinations 1 and 2 simultaneously Press LAYER A Turn DEST AUX on Press Destinations 1 and 2 simultaneously ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 6 Operations f g Working with Destinations Select Source 3 Press AUTO TRANS A Multiple sources to multiple Aux and standard destinations Route Source 5 to Destinations 1 and 2 and Source 7 to Aux Destinations 3 and 4 a 92075 se Turn DEST AUX off Press Destinations 1 and 2 simultaneously Press LAYER A Select Source 5 Double punch the ALL button to clear all destinations Turn DEST AUX on Press Destinations 3 and 4 simultaneously Select Source 7 Turn DEST AUX off Press Destinations 1 and 2 simultaneously Press AUTO TRANS ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 225 6 Operations Working with Layers Working with Layers The following topics are discussed in this section Switching Sources Background Transitions Under
82. must be set according to the procedures outlined in Chapter 3 in the BlendPRO Il Widescreen Lock Connections section on page 77 B Use the following steps to set up Genlock 1 2 3 4 a o po np From the Home Menu press OUTPUT to display the Output Menu On the Destination Bus select the destination that you want to configure Press GLCK to display the Genlock Menu For all types of destinations on the Source line set the genlock source either Black Burst CSync or None For single screen destinations only on the Termination line verify the setting of the ScreenPRO Il s Termination Switch Press BACK to return to the Output Menu Repeat from step 2 to set additional destination genlock types Press HOME to return to the Home Menu Press SAVE to save the new system configuration in memory ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 201 5 System Setup Projector Setup Projector Setup ScreenPRO II Controller system setup Step 14 A Prerequisites Ensure that you are familiar with the following menus and applications Test Pattern Menu In Chapter 4 refer to the Test Pattern Menu section on page 105 Wide Screen Menu In Chapter 4 refer to the Wide Screen Settings Menu section on page 106 Configurator Application You can use the Configurator application to assist with wide screen setup The software is available via download from the website or conta
83. name with the PS 2 keyboard Once entered the name is attached to the file that already resides in permanent flash memory The name will now be shown on all menus in which a still frame can be selected e g LOGO Menu DSK Input Setup Menu Background Input Setup Menu etc ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 145 4 Menu Orientation Effects Menu Effects Menu The figure below illustrates a sample Effects Menu EFFECTS MENU Destination 1 Key Frame Effect LINEAR Transition Rate 1 0 Transition Wipe Wipe Right Transition Edge Width 16 Wide Screen destinations only support Mix Transition Keyframe Effects are ignored by ScreenPROIl destinations Figure 4 48 Effects Menu sample To access the menu e Press EFFECTS on the Home Menu The Effects Menu allows you to modify and manage effects on a destination by destination basis including the ability to define key frames paths and effect properties The following functions are provided e Destination displays the currently selected destination e Key Frame Effect enables you to select the type of motion for a move Note Only the Linear motion type is supported All other key frame effects are ignored by ScreenPRO Il destinations e Transition Rate sets the auto transition rate that is used when the Auto Trans button is pressed The transition value is in 0 1 second increments e Transition Wipe sets the transit
84. not delete any user defined configurations while FACTORY deletes all user configurations e Press RESET to perform the selected reset operation When the confirmation Screen appears Press YES to start the reset procedure An In Progress message will be displayed Press NO to cancel the procedure ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 111 4 Menu Orientation System Menu Software Version Menu From the System Menu press SW VER to display the Software Version Menu SOFTWARE VERSION Controller 1 00 BlendPRO II 1 00 SP 1 1 00 SP 2 1 00 SP 3 1 00 SP 4 1 00 All software versions match DOWNLOAD FORCE CODE DOWNLOAD Figure 4 19 Software Version Menu sample The Software Version Menu displays the software versions for the ScreenPRO II Controller all connected ScreenPRO lIs and BlendPRO II The following functions are provided 112 Controller displays the Controller s software version BlendPRO II displays BlendPRO Il s software version SP these lines display each ScreenPRO II s software version One line is shown for each active destination In the lower portion of the menu the system actively compares all software versions to that of the Controller Ifall software versions match the Controller s version the display indicates All Software version s match Ifa mismatch is present the display indicates Software version mismatch Press DOWNL
85. o o 252 Unpacking sese 54 Upgrade software via Ethernet 274 software via serial 272 Use ofcolor eue her TS RNAVERTWVXR a 36 User control specifications 257 preference menu description 140 preferences set 221 Using backup and restore 253 Cut fill accede Soe ee dale 232 DSK Saa capi keaton cee cee ee 250 LOGO ciar waren tin RYE AUG 251 291 Index Utility backup and restore 254 V active sut e eub leo UR TUPTENNLI 96 pos shadow lesus 152 POSITIONS zs xn ceu Ree B SEE 96 position key e cee eee 160 position PIP 04 149 position source adjustment 168 SIZE COP susce Roe REO ts eae 164 SIZO key ovnis tee y IIS 160 Size PIPS nearen tae eaten alee tad 149 size shadow 2 00005 152 size source adjustment 168 Iotalue 5t teo te POE 96 Version BlendPRO ll 0 0c eee eee 112 Controller 0 0000 e eee 112 Video invalid bocina tien 140 processing esseseeeeeese 81 processing edge feathering 82 processing image overlap 81 processing projector setup 82 W Warranty sea Poe tad tonc 267 Web Site comicios es 271 Wide Screen Destination 41 Widescreen color balance setup 209 destinations frame grab
86. of definition e Each type of Aux destination can be switched from the ScreenPRO II Controller by selecting it on the Destination Bus and then selecting the desired source on the Source Selection Bus An Aux destination is the output of a router which is typically connected directly to a monitor rather than to the ScreenPRO Il This type of destination is single format e g an analog monitor can only accept signals from an analog router e AnImagePRO Aux destination is an external ImagePRO a multi format processor with three inputs one analog one SDI and one DVI and the ability to scale these inputs to one common output format Typically the ImagePRO output is connected to another display device such as a monitor or projector e APrePRO I Aux destination is an external PresentationPRO Il a multi format processor with nine inputs eight analog and one SDI and the ability to scale these inputs to one common output format Similar to ImagePRO the PrePRO II output is connected to another display device such as a monitor or projector A For standard Aux destinations press AUX SETUP to display the Aux Setup Menu AUX SETUP AUX_1 Source Mapping Direct Map Router Name MATRIXPRO1 Router Output 7 Figure 4 26 Aux Setup Menu Aux Destination sample The following functions are provided e Top Line displays the selected Aux destination number 120 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Or
87. packaging and checked that all the listed components are present visually inspect the system to ensure there was no damage during shipping If there is damage notify the shipping carrier immediately for all claims adjustments Site Preparation The environment in which you install your ScreenPRO l Controller should be clean properly lit free from static and have adequate power ventilation and space for all components Controller Installation The ScreenPRO II Controller is designed to be used in a tabletop configuration without rack mounting Because the Controller is part of a larger system which can involve a variety of components including ScreenPRO II BlendPRO II MatrixPRO routers ImagePRO PresentationPRO ll and one or more projectors please refer to the System Installation section on page 73 for comprehensive installation instructions 54 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 3 Hardware Installation Cable Adapter and The table below Cable Adapter and Accessory Information Accessory Information provides information regarding cables and adapters Table 3 1 ScreenPRO Il Controller System Cables Adapters and Accessories Description Accessories Gooseneck Lamp Connects to the XLR connector on the Controller panel 1 Lamp Supplied Power Connections AC Power Cord Note ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide AC Power 7 foot 10A 1 Cord Supplied
88. parameter use the ADJ rotary knob 0 8 LINEAR Figure 5 1 Menu Navigation 184 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 5 System Setup System Setup Sequence System Setup Sequence This section provides a top level view of the entire ScreenPRO II Controller setup procedure plus links to each individual procedure Important For the optimum ScreenPRO II Controller system setup it is recommended that you follow all procedures in the order outlined below Ml Preliminary steps 1 ID Setup and Remote Enable page 186 2 System Power Up page 187 3 Return to Factory Default page 189 Ml Next set up all menus under the MISC heading 4 Touch Screen Calibration page 189 5 Programming EDID page 190 6 Restore from Flash Memory Card page 191 E Next set up all menus under the System heading 7 Standard Destination Setup page 192 8 Router Setup page 193 9 AUX Destination Setup page 195 10 Input Patching page 198 W Next set up all menus under the Output heading 11 Output Format Setup page 199 12 Sync Setup page 200 13 Genlock Setup page 201 14 Projector Setup page 202 E Set up all background inputs and primary sources 15 Background Setup page 205 16 Input Setup page 206 17 DSK Setup Procedure page 211 18 LOGO Setup P
89. pixels To adjust use the ADJ knob or the Joystick s Z Axis knob e V Size adjusts the PIP s vertical size in pixels The value is the PIP s size as a percentage of the screen s vertical resolution The numeric value is the PIP s height in pixels To adjust use the ADJ knob or the Joystick s Z Axis knob e H Position indicates the PIP s position relative to the horizontal center of the screen 00 as measured from the exact center of the PIP Thus the value 34 is 34 pixels to the left of center To adjust move the Joystick left and right or use the ADJ knob e V Position indicates the PIP s position relative to the vertical center of the screen 00 as measured from the exact center of the PIP Thus the value 70 is 70 pixels above center To adjust V Position move the Joystick up and down or use the ADJ knob e Move Rate adjusts the rate in 0 1 second increments for programmed PIP movement from key frame to key frame To adjust use the ADJ knob or twist the Joystick Z Axis knob ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 149 4 Menu Orientation PIP Adjustment Menu Key Frame Effect indicates the motion type that is used to move the PIP from point to point Note Only the Linear motion type is supported All other key frame effects are ignored by ScreenPRO Il destinations Press BORDR to display the Border Menu Refer to the Border Menu section on page 151
90. s or external equipment that you wish to use as background and DSK source s are capable of supporting the selected output resolution Ensure that all DVI inputs to each ScreenPRO II are disconnected On the Home Menu press MISC to access the Miscellaneous Menu Press EDID to display the EDID DVI Input Format Menu On the Destination line select the individual destination who s EDID you wish to program or select ALL if all destinations will be using the same resolution Note the Current line which displays the current EDID video format that resides in memory If this format is a ready set to the desired resolution no programming is required You can exit this procedure and continue with other setup steps If a new resolution is required scroll to the Format line and use the ADJ knob to select the preferred EDID format Press PROGRAM EDID A warning message will be shown Press CONTINUE to continue with the procedure Once EDID programming is complete reconnect each external computer and power it back on On each PC s desktop right click to display the Display Properties Window Select the Settings Tab and verify that the PC s resolution matches that which you just programmed into EDID If not set the resolution as required If you selected an individual destination in step 6 repeat steps 6 through 12 for each remaining destination 190 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 5 System Setup Restore
91. screen projectors destinations Within this system Ethernet is used for communications between components and all ScreenPRO II inputs are received via routers or direct connections Inputs from routers and direct sources ScreenPRO II ScreenPRO II Controller A EH BEEBE Ethernet Hub Switch Figure 1 3 ScreenPRO II Controller system with two destinations 23 1 Introduction System Overview Quadruple Destination System The figure below illustrates a quadruple destination system comprised of the ScreenPRO II Controller four individual ScreenPRO II units and four single screen projectors NT Inputs from routers and direct sources ScreenPRO Il Controller ScreenPRO II Jn a a CICICIOCOIOEDCO Hub Switch Figure 1 4 ScreenPRO II Controller system with four destinations 24 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 1 Introduction System Overview Dual Destination plus Widescreen Destination System The figure below illustrates a system that includes two single screen destinations and one widescreen destination Note the use of BlendPRO
92. section on page 268 for details 276 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide BARCO Visibly yours LCD SETTINGS 134 139 Menu Buttons LIGHT ADJUST ooo coco 134 138 LOCK oaan 134 136 CTS 12 po DH um pes MATTE Lie npe nenas 159 161 169 173 A A NEM AL E ae APPLY FORMAT 90 92 102 175 UE MM I ME 193 A A A PEO ideni 4 NETWORK SETUP 109 124 eH ne ee a INEXTIPQUAD siccae etke etie ce 129 Hr ML MH MEM ARO d dODTPUT PATOM cen cncrcrsann 128 132 BACKUP RESTORE 134 141 Pr wu ME 198 n BACKUP Lii ooa eed pde du jd a tede papas BLACIO ae PROGRAM EDID isses 137 ON MN MON PD 2E o to MH HC NONE 144 Eun up naue Mee REMOVE cerrada bev 118 cic EO NRI EE 2 Dn 99 atl A UAL eee E Uc ROOM 154 HNC eee des Eo ES usen inde 109 111 123 Siete ere mien RESTORE ciccesnecendsavucaeonee st4d CHECK TERM X E E oe u ROTARY ENCODER 113 114 COLOR BALANCE 92 98 AOE EP SEVER decenti Ts COMM SETUP 127 128 129 130 CENE sapien a n Lp sl CONS NODUM MARRE 134 135 pn BON Svea iege ance ies DELETE PATCH 126 132 Subo le eae 150 152 DELETE 2 E m p SIZE 8 POS 157 158 159 160 DEST SETUP o ee HR ee DIAG AA 109 113 Premise sees DISCOVER LTRX ooo cece cease 134 TS IAS RAV me edd Io DOWNLOAD CODE 112 188 oe add ia as E Sk E a
93. setup and adjustment procedures Once the projector is properly set turn Off both the Raster Box and the Mode Press BACK to return to the Output Menu 202 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 5 System Setup Projector Setup 13 Repeat from step 2 for additional single screen destination projector setups 14 Press HOME to return to the Home Menu 15 Press SAVE to save the new system configuration in memory Wide Screen Projector Setup E Use the following steps to set up projectors for a wide screen application 1 m PF Ye DN S amp PN o 11 12 13 Note This procedure affects all projectors assigned to the selected wide screen configuration If you elected to use the Configurator application to assist with your widescreen setup parameters ensure that you have completed the following steps a On the Configurator s Show Layout Tab click the radio buttons for the ScreenPRO II Controller and your desired show layout b On the Configurator s Screen Details Tab click the large W to display the Wide Screen Parameters Window c Inthe Wide Screen Parameters Window enter your screen s H and V dimensions and the number of projectors Click Calculate to determine the required overlap Make a note of these values You will transfer them to the Controller s Wide Screen Settings Menu in the following steps From the Home Menu press OUTPUT to display the Out
94. source adjustment description 167 tally diagnostic o o o 113 ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide Index Menu description aspect ratio oooooooooooooo 94 backup restore o oooo ooooo o 141 AAA A aae Des 151 color balance esses 98 console port setup 135 destination oo oooooooo o 117 diagnostics setup 2000 113 DSK adjustment color 179 DSK adjustment luma 178 DSK input setup ooococcococcoo o 180 EDID DVI input format menu 137 MS x ni dua AERA 146 Ethernet Setup 005 129 frame grab seseuess 143 frame grab name 145 genlock cece eee eee 103 A ee ae I PU eh 87 image effects 00 eee 153 sje eC 89 input configuration less 93 input source adjustment 167 input source patch 125 key 4 sa E S T E EE E AEE 156 key adjustment 00 5 160 key detect 000 e eee 116 key source adjustment 167 keypad backlight 138 Lantronix setup 0 0000 5 131 LCD settings 0000 139 lockout code 0 0 eee eee 136 LOGO idee eae daa a eee al 182 Matte ui se etd eee ees 159 miscellaneous lesse 134 network setup ssessessse 124 OUIDUT iaa 101 output patch
95. source buttons are active for modification e When the Red LED above a source button is blinking the mixer is set to Mix Mode the Split button is off The blinking Red LED indicates the layer that is on Program and the alternate layer is enabled for modification Multiple sources can appear on Program and Preview simultaneously but only one button can be blinking and active for modification on Preview 226 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 6 Operations Working with Layers e If you select a layer in the Layer Control Section that is lit but not blinking it blinks and the corresponding assigned source on the Source Selection Bus blinks This method also allows you to quickly verify layer source selections Background Transitions E Use the following steps to perform a transition from one background to another 1 Press and light the background button to which you want to transition The button blinks to indicate it is active for modification on Preview Please note Ifthe background is already on Program the Background Input Setup Menu appears but changes cannot be made Ifthe background is not on Program the Background Input Setup Menu appears and the background type can be changed Note If you select Background B and a pop up window alerts you to a resource conflict the DSK is in use on Program The DSK must be cleared from Program before Background B can be used 2 With the ba
96. system 005 22 Comm setup menus 129 Communication Type 0 00 128 Communications specifications 259 Company address 200005 3 Composite sources color balance 99 Configuration center justified 83 dual destination plus widescreen 25 dual destination system 23 dual destination dual Aux 26 left justified o oooooooo 83 monitor layout 000 0 eee 217 operation lessen 217 quadruple destination system 24 save system 2 0 eee eee eee 213 Configurator application 106 Configure ScreenPRO ll outputs 101 Connection BlendPRO I oooococcco eee 75 Ethernet i sas Seat eo wind ahead 74 Genlock 2s ahs Stake id 75 OUIPUL omen a ad 75 POW CMe sine tuto ee big betula 76 serial uui a ES 74 SOUICOS aa ee aE 74 la a a meet 76 PO EP 125 widescreen lock 20 005 77 Connection charts oo ooooooooo 56 blank i5 nce ee n 66 inStr cliOns se rrr ex eara 56 OVeIVIeW solle y VPE 56 sample external routing 58 sample internal routing 62 Connector AG isis Qr EUN ned s 33 controller keyboard port 32 controller tally o o o o o o 32 Ethernet pinouts 260 serial pinouts 25 261 tall ker eR SERE 262 Cons
97. the DSK Adjustment Menu Press INPUT SETUP to display the DSK Input Setup Menu On the ID line select the ID of the ScreenPRO II with which you want to perform the DSK 6 Onthe Type line selects the desired DSK source None DVI or a captured still frame FG_1 FG_2 or FG_3 Press KEY to return to the DSK Adjustment Menu Adjust DSK parameters as desired including key type invert clip gain opacity and fill source Refer to the Modifying Keys section on page 233 for details Note Not all parameters listed in the Modifying Keys section apply to a DSK 9 Perform a CUT or AUTO TRANS 10 Clear the DSK from Program in the normal manner by clearing its layer from Preview and then transitioning 250 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 6 Operations Using the LOGO Using the LOGO B Use the following steps to transition the LOGO to Program 1 Ensure that the LOGO is properly set up In Chapter 5 refer to the LOGO Setup Procedure section on page 212 for instructions In the Layer Control Section press LOGO to display the LOGO Menu On the Type line selects the desired LOGO source Black or a captured still frame FG_1 FG_2 or FG_3 Perform a CUT or AUTO TRANS Clear the LOGO from Program in the normal manner by clearing its layer from Preview and then transitioning Please note In addition to its use as a full screen downstream graphic with the highest visual layer
98. the IP Address field matches the router s IP address If not use the ADJ knob in conjunction with the NEXT IP QUAD button to change the address as required Test communications For serial and Ethernet controlled routers press TEST COMM For Lantronix devices press DISCOVER LTRX If the message Communication Failed appears take the necessary actions to rectify the error and repeat this step as required ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 193 5 System Setup Router Setup 15 Press BACK to return to the Router Specification Menu 16 Press OUTPUT PATCH to display the Output Patch Menu for the selected router On the top line note the router name and confirm that this is the router that you wish to patch The table below illustrates the default output patch table as configured after a factory reset The table is valid for both analog and digital routers Table 5 1 Default Output Patch Table ScreenPRO II Input Router Output ScreenPRO II ID Analog or SDI If you have a Folsom MatrixPRO Router and you have connected the router outputs per the table above no setup is necessary on the Output Patch Menu unless you specifically want to patch the outputs in a different manner This default configuration is ideal for most single and widescreen applications 17 To custom patch router outputs use the following steps a b f On the Router Output line se
99. the sensitivity of the keyer enabling you to change the sharpness of the keyed image Gain only affects the key hole as set by the clip Adjustment range is 0 to 1023 99 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 178 4 Menu Orientation DSK Menus Opacity enables you to adjust the opacity of the keyed image from fully opaque to fully transparent Adjustment range is 0 to 1024 Fill Source determines the video that fills the DSK hole Self fills the hole with the DSK source video itself such as the video from a character generator Matte fills the hole with a matte color which can be adjusted with the DSK Matte Adjustment Menu Refer to the Matte Menu section on page 159 for details Press STATS to display the Status Menu Refer to the Status Menu section on page 147 for details Press INPUT SETUP to display the DSK Input Setup Menu Refer to the DSK Input Setup Menu section on page 180 for details DSK Color Key Functions A Color key is one in which the hole cutting information is derived from a specific RGB value including luminance The figure below illustrates a sample DSK Adjustment Menu when Color key is selected DSK ADJUSTMENT Key Type Color Destination ID Red Color Green Color Blue Color Red Threshold Green Threshold Blue Threshold Figure 4 74 DSK Adjustment Menu Color sample The following DSK Adjustment Menu functions are provided whe
100. to BG B on the next transition e Toggle mode affects background transitions In Chapter 6 refer to the Background Transitions section on page 227 for complete instructions e Layer Buttons press to select a layer on Preview for transition to or from Program e When lit and blinking The layer is active for manipulation Asource can be assigned to the layer from the Source Selection Bus The layer can be assigned as a PIP or Key using the buttons in the Layer Functions Section e When lit solid the layer is on Preview but it is not active for manipulation It is however ready to be transitioned to or from Program e When the Red LED above the button is lit the layer is on Program e To clear a layer from Preview so that it will transition off Program press Clear Layer This turns off the layer button If the Red LED above the layer button is lit on the next transition the layer will transition off Program o DSK press to select the unscaled DSK on Preview for transition to or from Program The button lights when selected Please note e When the Red LED above the button is lit the DSK is on Program e The DSK and BG B are mutually exclusive e LOGO press to select the unscaled full screen LOGO on Preview for transition to or from Program The button lights when selected Please note e When the Red LED above the button is lit the LOGO is on Program e The LOGO is the system s highest prior
101. to adjust H Size or V Size individually without affecting the other parameter In this way you can stretch the Key horizontally or vertically Please note the following related functions e To return the Key to its default size and aspect ratio press the RESET button in the Joystick Section e To adjust the Key with fine resolution press the FINE ADJUST button in the Joystick Section ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 161 4 Menu Orientation Clone Setup Menu Clone Setup Menu Press CLONE to display the Clone Setup Menu CLONE SETUP Destination 1 Clone Type Offset Offset 704 Figure 4 59 Clone Setup Menu sample The Clone Menu enables you to set up parameters for a cloned layer Please note e The mode can only be enabled when a widescreen destination is selected e The mode cannot be enabled if the PIP or Key straddles any part of the center of the overall widescreen e Both PIPs and Keys can be cloned e You can perform a Move in conjunction with a cloned layer The following functions are provided Destination displays the currently selected destination e Clone Type sets the type of clone motion Offset both images move together with a fixed pixel offset between the two For example if you adjust H Position both images move left and right If you adjust V Position both images move up and down Figure 4 60 Clone Offset Mode 162 ScreenPRO Il Controller
102. to back up and restore system configurations using the console s Flash Memory Card capability You can also use this function to transfer configurations between Controllers as required Note You can only store one system configuration on a Flash Memory Card The following functions are provided e Device Selects the device s that you want to backup or restore Choose between the Ctrlr SP or Ctrlr SP e Controller Options Selects which portion of the selected devices you want to backup or restore Choose between All System or Presets e SP to Restore Selects the device s that you wish to restore Choose between All devices or the ID of a specific ScreenPRO II e g 1 2 3 e Press BACKUP to perform a backup operation to the Flash Memory Card using the selected device s and options e Press CHECK CARD to check the system for the presence of a Flash Memory Card If a memory card is present the system then checks for the presence of a system configuration on the card e Press RESTORE to restore a system configuration from the Flash Memory Card to the selected device s In Chapter 6 refer to the Using Backup and Restore section on page 253 for instructions ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 141 4 Menu Orientation Frame Grab Menu Frame Grab Menu 142 The following topics are discussed in this section Frame Grab Menu Tree e Frame Grab Menu Description Frame Gr
103. to perform comprehensive searches as required Table of Contents and Index Use the Table of Contents bookmarks to navigate a desired topic Click any item to instantly jump to that section of the guide You can also use the Index to jump to specific topics within a chapter Each page number in the Index is a hyperlink General Operations To ensure trouble free operation please follow all procedures as listed below e For detailed installation instructions refer to Chapter 3 Hardware Installation on page 53 Forsystem setup instructions refer to Chapter 5 System Setup on page 183 e For operating instructions refer to Chapter 6 Operations on page 215 Should you have any questions regarding the installation or operation of the MatrixPRO ScreenPRO II Controller please consult with the factory Refer to Appendix C Upgrading Software on page 269 for contact information ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 17 1 Introduction Conventions Conventions The following conventions are used throughout this guide The symbol M denotes an operations procedure The symbol A denotes an example Entries written in bold face letters denote physical buttons or rear chassis connectors A Press Split to When two buttons together are required for an operation or function the plus sign is used between the buttons This procedure requires that you hold down the first button then press the second A
104. to the current destination configuration Press REMOVE to remove the selected ScreenPRO II on the SP to Remove line from the current destination configuration Press BACK to return to the System Menu Important If you have configured a widescreen destination the moment you press BACK the system automatically checks the termination status of each ScreenPRO lII e Ifthe termination switch is properly set on each ScreenPRO Il no action is required e f any termination switch is improperly set the ScreenPRO Il Genlock Termination Menu appears with instructions on how to correct the problem Refer to the ScreenPRO II Genlock Termination Menu section on page 119 for details 118 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation System Menu ScreenPRO ll Genlock Termination Menu After having configured a wide screen destination the ScreenPRO Il Genlock Termination Menu will automatically appear if the system senses that any of the termination switches in the Widescreen Lock signal chain are improperly set Note In Chapter 3 refer to the BlendPRO II Widescreen Lock Connections section on page 77 for instructions on proper Widescreen Lock connection A sample ScreenPRO II Genlock Termination Menu is shown below SP II GENLOCK TERMINATION SP 1 HI Z SP 3 75 Ohm Current Termination Status SP 2 HI Z SP 4 75 Ohm Set SP Il termination as foll
105. using move ssssses esee 238 using next and previous 244 using presets 000000 243 using reset 00 ee eee ee eee 237 using swap z order sss 236 working with layers 226 working with transitions 241 Operator nai aa 19 safety summary o cococccco 4 Option tally 00 eee eee eee 20 Orientation hardware 0 31 OUTPUT icx4Wx we hed a ees 87 Output connections esee 75 default router patch table 194 format setup 0 eee eee eee 199 menu description 101 Menu tree ooooccconc enuo 100 monitor ooo 104 monitor all o o ooo ooo 104 monitor BPII Program 104 monitor preview o ooo ooo 104 monitor SPII Program 104 monitor test pattern 105 patch menu description 132 resolution specifications 263 FOUTEN esti ar RATE 132 specifications ooooo ooo 257 sub MENUS tii tera 102 Overlap images ors e tas 81 o ht Path alt See alata 107 Overlapped background format 107 Oversample leses esee 95 sizing menu description 97 Overview edge blending technology 79 layers aco orca eta ae te ad att eet Ce d aei ens 21 ScreenPRO II Controller 20 software upgrade 270 still frame capture
106. 0 Change the value only if you need to compensate for a gamma problem in your projector or monitor On the Raster Box Size line set the size of the raster box that appears around PIPs and Keys Note As required you can change the Raster Box value during operations without affecting sync settings Press BACK to return to the Output Menu Repeat from step 2 to set sync parameters for additional destinations Press HOME to return to the Home Menu Press SAVE to save the new system configuration in memory 200 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide Genlock Setup 5 System Setup Genlock Setup ScreenPRO II Controller system setup Step 13 A Prerequisites Ensure that you are familiar with the Genlock Menu In Chapter 4 refer to the Genlock Menu section on page 103 In this procedure you will set up Genlock for each destination selected on the Output Menu Please note For Single Screen Destinations if you elect to connect an external genlock signal to ScreenPRO II and loop that signal from chassis to chassis use this procedure to select the genlock type and verify the current setting of each ScreenPRO II s Termination Switch For Widescreen Destinations if you elect to connect an external genlock signal to BlendPRO ll use this procedure to select the genlock type Important For Widescreen destinations the Widescreen Lock and External Genlock signals
107. 0sF 023 98 e 1920x1080sF 224 e 1920x1080i 850 Input Only e 1920x1080i 059 94 Input Only e 1920x1080i 260 Input Only e 2048x1080p 950 e 2048x1080p 959 94 e 2048x1080p 960 e 1920x1200p 960 e Apple 1200p 260 e 875p ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 265 A Specifications ScreenPRO II Input and Output Resolutions 266 ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide BARCO Visibly yours B Contact Information In This Appendix Warranty The following topics are discussed in this Appendix Warranty Return Material Authorization RMA e Contact Information All video products are designed and tested to the highest quality standards and are backed by a full 3 year parts and labor warranty Warranties are effective upon delivery date to customer and are non transferable Barco warranties are only valid to the original purchaser owner Warranty related repairs include parts and labor but do not include faults resulting from user negligence special modifications lightning strikes abuse drop crush and or other unusual damages The customer shall pay shipping charges when unit is returned for repair Barco will cover shipping charges for return shipments to customers Return Material Authorization RMA In the unlikely event that a product is required to return for repair please call the Technical Support Customer Service direct line and ask to receive a Return Merchandise Auth
108. 1111 Select Custom to enable a custom lockout code as entered on the Change Lockout Code Menu e Press CHANGE CODE to display the Change Lockout Code Menu CHANGE LOCKOUT CODE Enter new code Confirm new code Enter and confirm new code using source keys 1 8 CANCEL Figure 4 39 Change Lockout Code Menu sample 136 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation Miscellaneous Menu To enter a new lockout code use the eight numbered buttons on the Source Selection Bus and then confirm the new code In Chapter 6 refer to the Locking and Unlocking the Controller section on page 252 for instructions on using the Controller Panel Lockout mode EDID DVI Input Format Menu From the Miscellaneous Menu press EDID to display the EDID DVI Input Format Menu EDID DVI INPUT FORMAT Destination ALL FORMAT 1280 x 1024 60 Current EDID format 1280 x 1024 60 To change EDID for DVI inputs select the desired format and select Program EDID PROGRAM EDID Figure 4 40 EDID DVI Input Format Menu sample The EDID DVI Input Format Menu enables you to update the system s preferred EDID resolution for each ScreenPRO II s two DVI inputs Background and DSK for the selected destination bus Note This menu is designed for advanced users only Do not program the EDID unless it is necessary Extended Display Identification Data EDID is a VESA standard data f
109. 17 Genlock connections esses 75 A ERE an de Ne oe 75 lOOD ui o A aa 75 menu description 103 A a aE a RT Ey 201 single screen destinations 103 SQUICO eiar alada 103 Termination oe a 76 termination menu 118 119 Ype ES Pte obser 103 widescreen destinations 103 widescreen lock 75 282 Global rules cion a is Gedo i OS 86 Gray Steps 0 0 a eee 105 Green COOK on Sottero Rast ot oe toed Ae 157 179 contrast and brightness 99 Mask da a sce 158 180 Mates xu help a ees ee 159 174 threshold sac eats td 158 179 GHG t a tins det E E NE Me ale bee nd 105 Guarantee and compensation 2 H H ACTIVE caricia eee DPI UY USODE 96 pos shadow lesus 152 POSITION eii e ey GAIN 96 position key 2 e eee eee 160 position PIP 149 position source adjustment 168 ante ge eae endet bus 105 LI cS Seeded Lee ea a 164 SiZe KEY oy boom et mo eee 160 size PIP ose RAV 149 size shadow usuun 152 size source adjustment 168 LOLA sortie ct oh cp cioe eee RE 96 Hardware oiscuues e e ce ees 31 installation llle 53 requirements upgrading software 270 High definition image 79 History change lesesesesess 6 Home menu 200 ee eee eee 87 Ho
110. 54 Return material authorization 267 to factory default 189 RGB color Space 0 eee eee eee 91 sources color balance 99 Right Edge 0c eee eee eee 97 RMA ce deus udi me LET hh Ime 267 Rotary encoder menu description 114 knobs iare pee EE WS 39 Router default input patch table 198 default output patch table 194 input fot tars ace Pega belle tud 126 interface notes llus 128 IPaddress suusus 128 manufacturer s naaar rnnr 127 NAME gt sis he he hae Ps aod ered da 121 127 MUMDSM xt os odori eon And 127 number of inputs 00 127 number of outputs 127 Output usns loue RR RE 121 132 A biet ps 193 specification menu description 127 POS iaa ert en epe ene 127 Routing external oe EE RAE pag 44 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide internal ede nea ie eae Sia 44 mode internal or external 118 RS 232 setup menu 005 130 Rules global ooocoocooooo oo 86 S Safety precautions 00 2 e eee ee eee 54 summary e Abd tina dug tat ote 4 Sales contact information 268 Sample chart external routing analog router I O 59 external routing digital router I O 59 internal routing analog inputs 63 internal routing digital inputs 63 single screen Aux
111. 8 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 1 Introduction System Overview Mixer Effect 6 This transition is similar to effect 5 but because the DSK is not in use the background can transition You can also independently fade the two PIPs Background A lt gt B PIP PIP A B Figure 1 12 Effect 6 Diagram ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 29 1 Introduction Application Questions Application Questions 30 At Barco we take pride in offering unique solutions to demanding technical problems If you have application questions require further information or would like to discuss your application requirements in more detail please call 916 859 2500 Our Customer Support Engineers will be happy to provide you with the support you need Refer to Appendix B Contact Information on page 267 for contact details ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide BARCO Visibly yours 2 Hardware Orientation In This Chapter This chapter provides detailed information about the ScreenPRO II Controller s hardware The following topics are discussed ScreenPRO II Controller Rear Panel e ScreenPRO Il Controller Front Panel e Use of Color e Front Panel Sections Note For complete details on BlendPRO II s hardware refer to the BlendPRO II User s Guide Note Once you have reviewed all of the sections in this chapter please continue with Chapter 3 Hardware Installatio
112. A Prerequisites Ensure that you are familiar with the Input Source Patch Menu In Chapter 4 refer to the Input Source Patch Menu section on page 125 In this procedure you will associate patch specific router inputs to specific source buttons on the ScreenPRO Il Controller and assign tally connections as desired Important You may not need to change the input patches if you want to use those already contained in the default Input Patch Table The ScreenPRO II Controller creates a unique Input Patch Table for each default router After a factory reset the table defaults to the following settings Table 5 2 Default input patch table after factory reset Router Number Router Name Router Input Sources Map to Controller Sources Tally 1 MatrixPRO1 1 16 1 16 1 8 defined only 2 MatrixPRO2 Undefined Undefined Undefined You may elect to use the automatic patches as shown above or you can create custom patches as required for specific input configurations Tip The same router input can be patched to one or more source numbers For example if you want to use a DVD player in both 16 9 and 4 3 formats patch it to inputs 8 and 16 the shifted source 8 Using the input setup procedure set up each input for the desired aspect ratio E Use the following steps to patch router inputs 1 From the Home Menu press SYSTEM to display the
113. C click Start gt Programs gt Barco Folsom gt ScreenPRO Il Controller Software gt Flash Loader to launch the Flash Loader utility Barco Folsom LLC Flash Loader E ri x Exit Communication Terminal FLASH LOADER Version 2 00 p TTE TEST J pen script Ne to read a duplo 10 pS COM None NI ND Woco ICTS Baud 115200 Etheme Figure C 1 Flash Loader Utility Note If you have not used the COM 1 port on your PC an error message will be shown at the bottom of the Flash Loader Click Communication RS232 Config Baud and select 115200 Click Communication RS232 Config COM Port and select the COM port on your PC to which ScreenPRO II Controller is connected If no other programs are using the port the Established communications message appears at the bottom of the Flash Loader 8 To verify communications between the PC and ScreenPRO Il Controller a Inthe Flash Loader click in the black terminal window area b Note the condition of the status lights DCD and CTS should be red e TXD and RXD should be green They will flash if Enter is pressed C Press Enter a few times to display the system prompt on screen d Ifthe prompt does not appear continue with step 9 troubleshooting e If the prompt appears continue with step 10 uploading files 272 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 C Uporading
114. CE SRC_1 ID ALL Layer Saturation gt Hue Figure 4 8 Color Balance Menu sample for Composite S Video or YPbPr sources RGB COLOR BALANCE SRC_1 ID ALL Layer Red Contrast lt gt Red Brightness lt gt Grn Contrast lt gt Grn Brightness lt gt Blue Contrast lt gt Blue Brightness lt gt Figure 4 9 Color Balance Menu sample for RGB sources 98 ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation Input Menu The Color Balance Menu changes depending on the selected Input Type e ID indicates the ID of the associated ScreenPRO Il Note The ID line only appears when a widescreen destination is selected f AIl is shown in a widescreen configuration menu values represent those of the lowest numbered ID in the destination When a parameter is adjusted all values for all ScreenPRO II s in the destination will snap to the new value Ifan individual ID is shown e g 2 it represents that ScreenPRO II alone and adjustments will only affect that unit e Layer for widescreen destinations indicates the layer on which you are adjusting the selected input Important In a widescreen configuration because the electronics on individual ScreenPRO II scalers may not match from unit to unit you may be required to adjust ScreenPRO II scalers and layers individually by first selecting a specific destination ID followed by
115. DSK Input B is used primarily as the DSK source and secondarily as a background frame grab source On the Destination Bus select the destination whose background sources you want to configure On the ScreenPRO II Controller console press BG A to display the Background Input Setup Menu To configure a matte background a Scroll to the Type line and select Matte b Press MATTE to display the BG Matte Menu c Adjust the matte color as desired d Press BACK to return to the Background Input Setup Menu e Press SAVE To configure a live DVI background a Ensure that your DVI source PC is properly connected to the ScreenPRO II chassis and that the PC is turned on b Ensure that EDID is properly set If not refer to the Programming EDID section on page 190 for details Scroll to the Type line and select DVI Press FORCE ACQUIRE e Press SAVE ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 205 5 System Setup Input Setup 6 To configure a frame grab background a Ensure that you have captured a still frame either from a live DVI background or from one of the two layers LAYER A or LAYER B In Chapter 6 refer to the Working with Still Frames section on page 246 for instructions b Scroll to the Type line and select FG_1 FG_2 or FG_3 c Press SAVE Repeat from step 3 for BG B Repeat from step 2 for the next destination s background sources that you want to configure 9 When all back
116. Eee te 177 DSK Adjustment Menu 0 0 0 cece ete 178 DSK Luma Key Functions n sasaaa esses eee eae 178 DSK Color Key Functions 00 cee eee 179 DSK Input Setup Menu 0 cette 180 LOGO Men 35 5 Feiss dae cates exu Os aetna eh SIS 182 SUSE MSN ahead une La Saag 183 In This Chapter 3 eian tes oe n ot pl ate eo ar at delete ah 183 Setup Prerequisites 2 0 cece cette eee 184 System Setup Sequence 0 0 cece eee ee 185 ID Setup and Remote Enable 000 0c cece eee ees 186 System Power Ups tios Sie Bede Rud pulse dud 187 Downloading Code o cocccccccccc tees 188 Return to Factory Default llle 189 Touch Screen Calibration 2 0 0 0 0c cette 189 Programming EDID cita ka viet Saeed p E RR ens 190 Restore from Flash Memory Card 0 000 e eee eee eee 191 Standard Destination Setup 0 0 0 eese eese 192 Router Setup eue cae cad Sagi Seiwa a ee chet 193 AUX Destination Setup 0 0 0 0 ects 195 Aux Destination Overview 0000 eects 195 Aux Destination Setup 6 eee ee 196 ImagePRO or PrePRO II Aux Destination Setup 196 Ihp t Patching see Deni e x ee ER EIS E EE 198 Output Format Setup 0 eects 199 SYNC Set p oin arcte Dr ar e ioc Aad the Vote de Rut Spese dots 200 Genlock Setup 0 0 e eee nns 201 Projector Setup uta ck oce Ye end ae eth ead EE ache ere 202 Single Screen Projector Setup
117. Figure 1 1 ScreenPRO II Controller Layers Note Regardless of the number of individual ScreenPRO Il destinations under control you are still working with individual five layer systems whether or not the destinations are individual screens or blended widescreens A layer is defined as an image display element such as a background PIP or Key with an associated visual priority The ScreenPRO II mixer itself has two layers A and B For complete flexibility each layer can be assigned to either PIP or Key functionality ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 21 1 Introduction System Overview A typical ScreenPRO II Controller application is illustrated below Background Figure 1 2 Layer Illustration Background Mixer and DSK Please note the following important points e The full screen LOGO is the highest priority layer The LOGO visually appears over all other images including backgrounds PIPs keys and the DSK e The Downstream Key DSK is the second highest priority layer It visually appears over all PIPs keys and backgrounds but it is under the LOGO e The high resolution Background layer has the lowest priority This layer visually appears behind all other PIPs keys and the DSK The controller can transition between two background sources both of which must be provided at native projector resolution e A PIP layer appears over backgrounds and under the DSK and LOG
118. In Chapter 3 Hardware Installation of the ScreenPRO ll User s Guide refer to the Cable and Adapter Information section for details on the components supplied with individual ScreenPRO II units 55 3 Hardware Installation Connection Charts Connection Charts The following topics are discussed in this section e Connection Chart Overview Sample Connection Charts External Routing Sample Connection Charts Internal Routing e Blank Connection Charts Connection Chart Overview A series of Connection Charts are provided on the following pages to assist with your ScreenPRO II input and output connections Please note the following points e Each ScreenPRO II provides 8x analog inputs scaled These can be used to connect RGB composite S Video Y C and component video 2x HD SDI SD SDI inputs scaled on the HD model 2x DVI inputs unscaled BG DSK e You can connect sources directly to inputs internal routing or you can connect router outputs to inputs external routing This assignment is performed on the Destination Setup Menu Note that the use of routers offers less restrictions with regard to assigning sources to layers Ifyou have configured a ScreenPRO II to use internal routing both the white buttons analog sources and the yellow buttons HD SDI SD SDI sources are active on the Source Selection Bus You can assign a maximum of 16 analog and 2 HD SDI SD
119. Menu Refer to the Frame Grab Menu section on page 142 for details Press EFFECTS to access the Effects Menu Refer to the Effects Menu section on page 146 for details Press STATUS to access the Status Menu Refer to the Status Menu section on page 147 for details Press SAVE to save the system configuration in non volatile memory ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 87 4 Menu Orientation Input Menu Input Menu The following topics are discussed in this section Input Menu Tree Input Menu Description Input Menu Functions Input Sub Menus Input Menu Tree The figure below illustrates the Input Menu Tree COLOR BALANCE SAVE FORCE ACQUIRE Figure 4 2 Input Menu Tree All functions and sub menus are discussed in the following sections 88 ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation Input Menu Input Menu Description The figure below illustrates the Input Menu INPUT MENU SRC_1 Destination ID Layer Input Connector Format 1024 x 768 60 Input Type Color Space Sampling Mode Contrast lt gt APPLY COLOR FORCE FORMAT BALANCE ACQUIRE Figure 4 3 Input Menu sample The Input Menu is used to adjust all parameters relating to dedicated and routed inputs including the physical sources connected to individual ScreenPRO II units The menu enables you to set all configuration options
120. O Effects include mixes wipes linear moves resizing adjustable aspect ratio borders drop shadows and soft edges e A Key layer also appears over backgrounds and under the DSK and LOGO Key effects include luminance keys split keys key alpha and fill reverse key key on background and color key graphics e Within the mixer layer B has priority over layer A but you can change that priority with the Swap Z Order button e Up to eight analog inputs and up to two SD HD SDI inputs can be scaled to produce PIPs or Keys System Combinations The ScreenPRO II Controller can be configured in a variety of different ways using both single screen and widescreen destinations You can use up to four ScreenPRO Il units and up to four Aux destinations The only limitation is one widescreen destination per ScreenPRO II Controller comprised of up to four ScreenPRO Il units and a BlendPRO II Several sample configurations are listed below in simplified block diagram format e Dual Destination System Quadruple Destination System Dual Destination plus Widescreen Destination System Dual Destination Dual Aux System 22 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 1 Introduction System Overview Dual Destination System The figure below illustrates a dual destination system comprised of the ScreenPRO II Controller two individual ScreenPRO II units and two single
121. O II 2 Pgm DVI VGA 2 Widescreen right ScreenPRO II 2 Pgm Analog 1 VGA 3 ScreenPRO II 2 Pgm Analog 2 ScreenPRO Ill 2 Pvw 60 VGA 4 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 3 Hardware Installation Connection Charts Widescreen Sample Auxiliary Destination Chart The ScreenPRO II Controller enables you to configure up to four auxiliary destinations Use the following chart to map the distribution of each auxiliary destination Table 3 6 Sample Aux Destination Connection Chart Aux Destinations Dest Device Inputs from Screen Device PresentationPRO ll Analog Router Out 5 Downstage monitor Digital Router Out 5 ImagePRO Analog Router Out 6 Record VTR Digital Betacam Digital Router Out 46 Important For all Widescreen configurations using BlendPRO II ensure that you review the BlendPRO II Widescreen Lock Connections section on page 77 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 61 3 Hardware Installation Connection Charts Sample Connection Charts Internal Routing Following are sample connection charts for a ScreenPRO II Controller system configured for internal routing The system is comprised of the following components e 2x ScreenPRO II e 2xsingle screen destinations e 2 x Aux destinations PresentationPRO Il ImagePRO The figure below provides a simplified diagram of the system Camera Analog DA Pre
122. O ll and other target analog destinations Be sure to check V whether or not the analog input is a direct connection or from a DA output Digital Input Chart Direct or DA Connections If you are using internal routing complete the digital input chart for direct or DA digital connections to each ScreenPRO II and other target analog destinations Be sure to check V whether or not the digital input is a direct connection or from a DA output e DVI Connection Chart For all system configurations complete the DVI Connection Chart to map your Background and DSK DVI connections Be sure to check V whether or not the DVI source originates from a multi head graphics card or a DA or splitter e Standard Destination Chart For all system configurations complete the Standard Destination Chart The ScreenPRO II Controller enables you to configure up to four standard destinations Note that the chart is also used to map the usage of BlendPRO Il in widescreen configurations Auxiliary Destination Chart For all system configurations complete the Auxiliary Destination Chart The ScreenPRO II Controller enables you to configure up to four auxiliary destinations Before you complete the actual charts please review the sample charts as provided in the following two sections e Sample Connection Charts External Routing page 58 Sample Connection Charts Internal Routing page 62 ScreenPRO Il Controlle
123. OAD CODE to begin the software download process downloading code from the Controller to only those mismatched units The entire process takes several minutes to complete Press FORCE DOWNLOAD to download code to all connected devices typically for troubleshooting purposes or to simply guarantee identical code in your entire system This process also takes several minutes to complete Note The two download softkeys are always present on this menu even when all code versions match ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation System Menu Diagnostics Setup Menu From the System Menu press DIAG to display the Diagnostics Setup Menu DIAGNOSTICS SETUP Reset Rotary Encoders START ROTARY TBAR amp KEY LED TEST ENCODER JOYSTICK DETECT Figure 4 20 Diagnostics Setup Menu sample The Diagnostics Setup Menu enables you to perform a variety of diagnostic tests on the ScreenPRO II Controller The following functions are provided Reset Rotary Encoders Yes No determines whether or not you wish to reset the rotary encoder values when you exit the Rotary Encoder Menu e Press TALLY to display the Tally Diagnostic Menu and immediately start a test of all eight tally relays This procedure takes several seconds to complete Press EXIT when complete e Press START LED TEST to begin testing all ScreenPRO II Controller LEDs This procedure takes several seconds to complete Pre
124. Options line select All Press CHECK CARD to check for the presence of a Flash Memory Card Press BACKUP to perform a backup operation to the Flash Memory Card using the selected device s and options ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 213 5 System Setup Backup to Flash Memory Card 214 ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide BARCO Visibly yours 6 Operations In This Chapter This chapter includes operational instructions for all ScreenPRO I Controller modes and functions The following topics are discussed Prerequisites Operational Configuration Working with Destinations Working with Layers Working with Layer Functions Using Move Working with Transitions Working with Presets e Working with Still Frames Using the DSK Using the LOGO Locking and Unlocking the Controller Working with Tallies e Using Backup and Restore ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 215 6 Operations Prerequisites Prerequisites Prior to using the ScreenPRO II Controller system please ensure the following e All system inputs backgrounds the DSK and the LOGO are properly configured In Chapter 5 refer to the following sections for details Input Setup on page 206 Background Setup on page 205 l DSK Setup Procedure on page 211 LOGO Setup Procedure on page 212 e Ensure that you are familiar with all
125. Orientation Source Adjustment Menus e Press EFX to display the Image Effects Menu Refer to the Image Effects Menu section on page 153 for details For Key Source Adjustments e Press STATS to display the Status Menu Refer to the Status Menu section on page 147 for details Press KEY to display the Key Menu Refer to the Key Menu Description section on page 156 for details e Press MATTE to display the Matte Menu Refer to the Matte Menu section on page 159 for details e Press EFX to display the Image Effects Menu Refer to the Image Effects Menu section on page 153 for details Please note the following related functions Toreturn the source to its default size and aspect ratio press the RESET button in the Joystick Section To adjust the source with fine resolution press the FINE ADJUST button in the Joystick Section ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 169 4 Menu Orientation Background Input Setup Menu Background Input Setup Menu 170 The BG Background Input Setup Menu enables you to set up and define background sources A and B For each background source you can choose between a solid matte color a DVI input or a captured frame grab FG The menus change depending on the selected background type To access the menu e Press BG A or BG B in the Controller s Layer Control Section Ifthe selected background is already on Program the BG Input Setu
126. PIP button is lit and the PIP Adjustment Menu is visible If the menu is not visible press PIP Note Even if the layer is on Program the PIP Adjustment Menu appears but parameters can not be adjusted 4 Onthe Source Selection Bus press the button for the desired new source The button blinks to indicate that it is selected and the source appears within the PIP on Preview 5 Adjust the PIP s size position border shadow source image cropping and special effects Refer to the Modifying PIPs section on page 230 for details 6 Prior to the transition you can set up an additional layer if desired in Split Mode To set up an additional Split Mode PIP in Preview repeat the procedure from step 2 To set up a Key in Preview refer to the Working with Keys in Split Mode section on page 231 7 Press CUT or AUTO TRANS to transition the look to program Refer to the Working with Transitions section on page 241 for details 8 Repeat the procedure from step 1 for the next transition Working with PIPs in Mix Mode In Mix Mode the mixer s layers are ganged together Both PIPs can be perfectly co located on screen Mix Source mode or both can operate independently Swap mode but only one PIP can be on Program at a time W Use the following steps to work with PIPs in Mix Mode 1 Inthe Layer Control Section ensure that the Split button is Off 2 Pressthe desired layer button A or B Please not
127. PRO II Controller Communications Specifications Parameter Specification Ethernet RJ 45 10 100 Mbps Autosense Console DB 9 Female DCE 115k Baud EXT Comm DB 9 Female DCE 115k Baud Flash Memory Card Type 1 compliant Tally Optional DB 25 male Dry contact relay closures 1 Amp at 30 VDC 0 5 Amps at 125 VDC ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 259 A Specifications Pinouts Pinouts The following topics are discussed in this section e Ethernet Connector e Serial Connector e Tally Connector Ethernet Connector The figure below illustrates the ScreenPRO II Controller Ethernet connector 1 8 Figure A 2 Ethernet Connector The table below lists Ethernet connector pinouts Table A 7 Ethernet Connector Pinouts Wire Color White Orange Orange White Green Blue White Blue Green White Brown Brown 260 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide A Specifications Pinouts Serial Connector The figure below illustrates the ScreenPRO II Controller serial connector which is used for both the Ext Comm and Console Port connections Figure A 3 Serial Connector The table below lists Serial connector pinouts Table A 8 Serial Connector Pinouts RS 232 Signal Description Carrier Detect Received Data Transmitted Data Data Terminal Ready Signal Ground Data Set Ready
128. RO and PrePRO II devices must be connected to the ScreenPRO II Controller via Ethernet e magePRO and PrePRO II output setups must be performed locally on the units themselves e Only one router of each type Analog DVI and SDI can be connected to an ImagePRO unit e Only one Analog and one SDI router can be connected to a PrePRO II unit e In order to properly create source files on ImagePRO Note On the ScreenPRO II Controller console select a ScreenPRO II Controller destination On the Input Menu acquire the selected source in the normal manner Press SAVE to save the source in the normal manner which in turn also creates a source file on the ImagePRO Repeat for all desired sources The copy down of source file information is possible because the system knows that ImagePRO is connected to the same router from which the newly acquired input originates all based on the patching configuration ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 123 4 Menu Orientation System Menu Network Setup Menu From the System Menu press NETWORK SETUP to display the Network Setup Menu NETWORK SETUP Network DHCP Server Ctrir IP 192 168 0 10 Port 3000 IP Range from 192 168 0 11 to 192 168 0 191 Figure 4 28 Network Setup Menu sample For reference only the Network Setup Menu displays the available IP range for the ScreenPRO II Controller system The fol
129. Request To Send Clear To Send Unused Please note e The port is configured as a DCE 115K Baud 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity bits e The serial port can be connected to a standard PC serial port with a straight through DB 9 to DB 9 cable ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 261 A Specifications Pinouts Tally Connector One 25 pin D connector is provided for issuing tally relay closure commands to external devices Eight tally circuits are provided Please note e Tally outputs provide dry contact relay closures between signal pairs or contact closures to ground whenever the corresponding input source is selected for display on a Program output e Tally outputs may be used to signal when input devices cameras are live e Each contact has a rating of 1 Amp at 30 VDC and 0 5 Amps at 125 VDC e A mating connector is required see the diagrams below O 000000000000O0 000000000000 14 25 Figure A 4 Tally Connector and Circuit The table below lists Tally Connector pinouts Table A 9 Tally Connector Pinouts Signal Signal Tally 1 contact closure Tally 8 contact closure Tally 1 contact closure Tally 2 contact closure Tally 2 grounding closure Tally 2 contact closure Tally 3 contact closure Tally 3 grounding closure Tally 3 contact clos
130. SDI sources Ifyou have configured a ScreenPRO II to use external routing only the white source buttons on the Source Selection Bus are active You can assign a maximum of 16 sources using any mix of analog and digital Important In this mode with external routing enabled the two yellow SDI buttons are disabled e Oneach ScreenPRO ll two DVI connectors are provided for Background and DSK Inputs Both connectors are digital only and do not include analog pins Please note To use two background sources connect one source to connector A and one to connector B To use one background and one DSK source connect the background to connector A and the DSK source to connector B Chart instructions e Analog Router I O Chart If you are using external routing complete the Analog l O router chart for your analog input and output connections The chart can also be used to specify router outputs that connect to Aux destinations 56 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 3 Hardware Installation Connection Charts Digital Router I O Chart If you are using external routing complete the digital I O router chart for your digital input and output connections The chart can also be used to specify router outputs that connect to Aux destinations e Analog Input Chart Direct or DA Connections If you are using internal routing complete the analog input chart for direct or DA analog connections to each ScreenPR
131. ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 167 4 Menu Orientation Source Adjustment Menus 168 As shown in the samples above the two menus are virtually identical and also virtually identical to the PIP and Key Adjustment menus The exception is that the two Source adjustment menus pertain to the source inside the PIP or Key rather than the boundaries of the PIP or Key itself In this way for example a PIP can remain in its exact location on screen but you can scale or re position the image inside the PIP Source Adjustment Menu Functions The following Source Adjustment Menu functions are provided H Size adjusts the source s horizontal size in pixels The value indicates the source s size as a percentage of the original PIP or Key s horizontal resolution The numeric value is the source s width in pixels To adjust use the ADJ knob or the Joystick s Z Axis knob V Size adjusts the source s vertical size in pixels The value indicates the size as a percentage of the original PIP or Key s vertical resolution The numeric value is the source s height in pixels To adjust use the ADJ knob or the Joystick s Z Axis knob H Position indicates the source s horizontal position relative to its default horizontal position 00 with no offset Thus the value 50 is 50 pixels to the right of its default position To adjust use the ADJ knob or move the Joystick left and right V Position i
132. ScreenPRO Il units and peripheral equipment such as BlendPRO II Matrix RO routers and ImagePRO The ScreenPRO II Controller offers the complete functionality of the ScreenPRO II front panel plus many features that are not available on the local panel Features include e Enhanced hardware and software features Control of multiple ScreenPRO Il units as destinations including both single and widescreen configurations Refer to the System Combinations section on page 22 for sample configurations Support for widescreen applications using two or more ScreenPRO II units in conjunction with BlendPRO II n internal routing mode support for 16 analog inputs and 2 HD SDI SD SDI inputs In external routing mode support for 16 inputs in any combination of analog and digital Optional Tally board provides eight programmable tallies which can be assigned to any input source The board also provides a PS 2 connector and when a customer supplied keyboard is connected users can enter system values and names 3 8 LCD Touch Screen with eight soft menu buttons and two rotary encoders for menu navigation 3 Axis Joystick for quick sizing and positioning of PIPs and Keys Color coded buttons and layouts match color scheme of Encore and ScreenPRO Ill product family Dimmable flexible light stick script light with XLR connector Internal convection cooled power supply no fan needed The programmab
133. ScreenPRO lls as required up to the maximum of 4 6 If required scroll to the SP to Remove line and select the ID of a ScreenPRO II that you want to remove from the current configuration Press REMOVE to clear the ScreenPRO II from the destination 7 Press BACK to return to the System Menu Important If the ScreenPRO Il Genlock Termination Menu appears after you press BACK there is a termination switch problem In Chapter 4 refer to the ScreenPRO Il Genlock Termination Menu section on page 119 for details 8 Press HOME to return to the Home Menu 9 Press SAVE to save the new system configuration in memory This completes the procedure for defining single and widescreen destinations The selected buttons on the Destination Bus are now active ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide Router Setup 5 System Setup Router Setup ScreenPRO II Controller system setup Step 8 In this procedure you will set up the system s routing switchers A Prerequisites Ensure that you are familiar with the following menus Router Specification Menu In Chapter 4 refer to the Router Specification Menu section on page 127 Comm Setup Menu In Chapter 4 refer to the Comm Setup Menus section on page 129 Output Patch Menu In Chapter 4 refer to the Output Patch Menu section on page 132 W Use the following steps to set up your system s routers 1 2099s
134. Setup Procedure page 211 LOGO Setup Procedure page 212 Captured stills reside in temporary memory If the system is powered down or reset the stills will be lost To save stills in permanent memory refer to the Saving Still Frames in Permanent Memory section on page 248 Note Only saved still frames can be named Saving Still Frames in Permanent Memory Use the following steps to save a captured still into permanent memory 1 Capture a still as outlined in the previous two sections Capturing Still Frames from a Background Input on page 247 Capturing Still Frames from a Layer on page 247 Warning Do not execute the next step during live production All controls will be locked during the save process It is recommended that you save your stills during pre production as a setup procedure 2 Onthe Frame Grab Menu use the Frame Number line to select the frame that you wish to save 3 Press SAVE to save the captured frame into the selected storage register FG_1 FG_2 or FG_3 Once pressed the screen displays an important warning Press YES to save the frame All front panel controls will be locked for up to three minutes Press NO to cancel the procedure 4 If required press DELETE to delete the selected frame from permanent storage This button only appears when frames are stored in permanent memory 248 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide
135. Software Serial Upgrade Method To troubleshoot the serial connection a Ifthe DCD and CTS status lights are green re check the communication settings in the loader and verify that the COM port and Baud Rate settings are correct b To verify ScreenPRO II Controller communication settings press HOME gt MISC gt CONSL to display the Console Port Setup Menu c Verify the following settings Baud rate 115200 Data Bits 8 e Parity None Stop Bits 1 d Repeat steps 7 and 8 above then re check the status lights e With communication status OK continue with step 10 To upload files to ScreenPRO l Controller click Open script file to read and upload In the dialog select Complete_Load sld and click Open The ScreenPRO II Controller menu should immediately display the System in LOADER MODE message It takes several minutes to load the flash memory When complete the Flash Loader utility displays the Upload Complete message Click OK to continue Cycle power on the ScreenPRO II Controller and exit the Flash Loader utility On ScreenPRO II Controller perform a factory reset In Chapter 5 refer to the Return to Factory Default section on page 189 for instructions On the ScreenPRO II Controller verify that the new software has been loaded correctly Press HOME gt SYSTEM gt SW VER to display the Software Version Menu This completes the software upgrade procedure via serial communi
136. TEM on the Home Menu The System Menu provides the following functions Modify Layers On Program when enabled you can change PIPs and Keys directly on Program without first setting up your look on Preview When disabled Preview must be used to set up the next look In Chapter 6 refer to the Working with Still Frames section on page 246 for details e Tally Mode enables or disables the tally function When enabled all eight tallies are activated and can be triggered by pressing a source button When disabled all tallies are deactivated but tally setups remain as configured Referto the Input Source Patch Menu section on page 125 for details on assigning tallies to sources n Chapter 6 refer to the Working with Tallies section on page 253 for tally operating instructions Press RESET to display the System Reset Menu Refer to the System Reset Menu section on page 111 for details e Press SW VER to display the Software Version Menu Refer to the Software Version Menu section on page 112 for details e Press DIAG to display the Diagnostics Setup Menu Refer to the Diagnostics Setup Menu section on page 113 for details e Press DEST SETUP to display the Destination Setup Menu Refer to the Destination Setup Menu section on page 117 for details e Press NETWORK SETUP to display the Network Setup Menu Refer to the Network Setup Menu section on page 124 for details
137. Via Web Site Barco Folsom s web site address is http www folsom com BW To download from the web site 1 Create a target folder on your PC e g ScreenPRO II Controller On the web navigate to http video folsom com 2 3 Click Downloads to access the Downloads Page 4 Using the Select Video Product pull down menu click ScreenPRO II Controller 5 Inthe Software section click the Download button for the latest version of system software 6 When the File Download Dialog appears click Save to save the file to your computer When the Save As Dialog appears navigate to the target folder and click Save As required please continue with the Serial Upgrade Method section on page 272 or the Ethernet Upgrade Method section on page 274 ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 271 C Upgrading Software Serial Upgrade Method Serial Upgrade Method W Use the following steps to upgrade ScreenPRO II Controller software using a serial connection to your PC 1 With the download complete navigate to the target folder and double click the EXE to launch the installation shield 2 Follow the prompts to install the upgrade package At the conclusion of the procedure a new path will be created under Start gt Programs gt Barco Folsom 3 Connect the Console port on the back of the ScreenPRO II Controller to the COM 1 port on your PC Power up the ScreenPRO II Controller On the P
138. a specific layer e When RGB sources are selected the Color Balance Menu provides individual RGB contrast and brightness adjustments Adjustment range 25 to 25 Adjust Red Contrast and Brightness as required Adjust Green Contrast and Brightness as required Adjust Blue Contrast and Brightness as required e When Composite S Video or YPP is selected adjust Saturation and Hue Adjust Saturation as required Adjustment range 75 to 125 Adjust Hue as required Adjustment range in degrees 90 0 to 90 0 Note When the Input Type is YPpP the Hue field reads N A because Hue does not apply to this type of source e Press SAVE to save the selected input in the designated input file e Press RESET ALL to return all parameters to 0 zero ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 99 4 Menu Orientation Output Menu Output Menu The following topics are discussed in this section e Output Menu Tree Output Menu Description e Output Menu Functions e Output Sub Menus Output Menu Tree The figure below illustrates the Output Menu Tree OUTPUT Figure 4 10 Output Menu Tree All functions and sub menus are discussed in the following sections 100 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation Output Menu Output Menu Description The figure below illustrates the Output Menu OUTPUT MENU Destination 1 Format 1024x768 59 94 Color Spa
139. a starting location and an ending destination location There are two ways to program a move on Preview or on Program Program a Move on Preview e Program a Move on Program Program a Move on Preview This mode enables you to program a move with the layer on Preview only before it has transitioned to Program E Use the following steps to program a move on Preview 1 Inthe Layer Control Section select the layer that you want to move LAYER A or LAYER B The button blinks to indicate that it is active for modification In the Layer Functions Section select Key or PIP as desired Size and position the PIP or Key in its starting location on Preview Adjust all border shadow and source parameters in the normal way 4 Inthe Layer Functions Section press Move Setup The button blinks to indicate that you are now actively defining the properties of the move Move the PIP or Key to its ending size and location on or off screen To define the rate at which the PIP or Key moves adjust the Move Rate parameter The rate can be adjusted in 0 1 second increments 7 Press Move Setup again to complete the programming The button remains lit and the PIP or Key returns to its starting location on Preview Note The lit Move Setup button indicates an association between the selected layer and a programmed move If you select a different layer that does not have an associated move the button turns off If y
140. ab Menu Tree The figure below illustrates the Frame Grab Menu Tree FRAME GRAB DELETE RECALL Figure 4 45 Frame Grab Menu Tree All functions and menus are discussed in the following sections ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation Frame Grab Menu Frame Grab Menu Description The figure below illustrates a sample Frame Grab Menu FRAME GRAB Destination ID Frame Number Capture Format 1280 x 1024 Name SAVED FG 1 Format 1280 x 1024 CAPTURE SAVE DELETE RECALL Figure 4 46 Frame Grab Menu sample To access the Frame Grab Menu On Preview select the layer Layer A or B or the background BG A or BG B from which you want to capture a full screen still frame e Press FRAME GRAB on the Home Menu The Frame Grab Menu enables you to capture still frames into each ScreenPRO II system s three internal frame stores The sources of the still frames are each ScreenPRO Il s BG A and BG B inputs or the scaled inputs Layer A or B Please note e For widescreen destinations even though you are using the frame stores of multiple ScreenPRO II units you are conceptually working with only three frame stores each of which captures s its slice of the complete widescreen image Forsingle screen destinations you are working with the individual destination s three frame stores in the normal manner Regarding captures e All captures of the background BG A o
141. ables you to configure up to four standard destinations Use the following chart to map the distribution of each destination the usage of BlendPRO II if required and the routing of your additional program and preview outputs Refer to the Widescreen Sample Standard Destination Chart section on page 60 for a sample chart Table 3 17 Standard Destination Connection Chart Standard Destinations Output Screen BlendPRO II Channel ScreenPRO II 1 Pgm DVI ScreenPRO II 1 Pgm Analog 1 ScreenPRO II 1 Pgm Analog 2 ScreenPRO II 1 Pvw ScreenPRO II 2 Pgm DVI ScreenPRO II 2 Pgm Analog 1 ScreenPRO II 2 Pgm DVI ScreenPRO II 2 Pgm Analog 1 ScreenPRO II 2 Pgm Analog 2 ScreenPRO Ill 2 Pvw ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 71 3 Hardware Installation Connection Charts Auxiliary Destination Chart The ScreenPRO II Controller enables you to configure up to four auxiliary destinations Use the following chart to map the distribution of each auxiliary destination Table 3 18 Aux Destination Connection Chart Aux Destinations Dest Device Inputs from Screen Device Notes 72 ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 3 Hardware Installation System Installation System Installation This section provides instructions for installing your ScreenPRO Il Controller system If required use the two previous sample system diagrams for reference
142. age 236 for instructions 46 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide N Hardware Orientation Front Panel Sections Move Setup two functions are provided e Press Move Setup to set up a move for a PIP or Key enabling you to choose the move s start and end points e Double punch the Move Setup button to un define or clear the move setup for the selected layer In Chapter 6 refer to the Using Move section on page 238 for complete instructions Move press to pend a move for a PIP or Key enabling you to fly the PIP or Key from one location to another on the next auto transition In Chapter 6 refer to the Using Move section on page 238 for complete instructions Mix Source in Mix Mode with the Split button off press Mix Source to co locate both PIPs in the mixer Layers A and B will be exactly the same size in exactly the same position Mix Source and Swap modes are mutually exclusive In Chapter 6 refer to the Understanding Split and Mix Modes section on page 228 for instructions Swap in Mix Mode with the Split button off press Swap to allow both PIPs in the mixer to be located independently Layers A and B can be positioned and sized anywhere as desired Mix Source and Swap modes are mutually exclusive In Chapter 6 refer to the Understanding Split and Mix Modes section on page 228 for instructions Toggle press to toggle sourc
143. al manual for information on all lens shift and registration procedures c When adjustments are complete turn off the Alignment Test Pattern 25 Press BACK to return to the Output Menu 26 Press HOME to return to the Home Menu 27 Press SAVE to save the new system configuration in memory 204 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 5 System Setup Background Setup Background Setup ScreenPRO II Controller system setup Step 15 A Prerequisites Ensure that you are familiar with the following menus Background Input Setup Menu In Chapter 4 refer to the Background Input Setup Menu section on page 170 BG Matte Menu In Chapter 4 refer to the BG Matte Menu section on page 174 In this procedure you will set up the Controller s two background sources for the BG A and BG B buttons Remember that each button can be configured as a live DVI input as a matte color or as a frame grab Note In both single and widescreen modes remember that BG B and the DSK are mutually exclusive This occurs because the BG DSK Input B is shared between the DSK and BG B on all individual ScreenPRO II units B Use the following steps to set up your background sources 1 Determine how you would like to configure your background and DSK sources As a recommendation the following configuration is typically used The BG A input is configured as a live DVI source The BG
144. als on the DVI and BNC input connectors This field is not adjustable for NTSC and PAL sources regardless of connection type H Active sets the width of the active area H Position sets the start of the active area s horizontal offset from H sync V Total fixed value which cannot be adjusted V Active sets the number of vertical lines in the image V Position sets the start of the active area s vertical offset from V sync Press SAVE to save the selected input in the designated input file Press FORCE ACQUIRE to force the ScreenPRO II Controller to perform the optimum image setup Note If you switch to another input and there is no valid input video the settings are not applicable and N A is displayed 96 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide Oversample Sizing Menu 4 Menu Orientation Input Menu The figure below illustrates the Oversample Sizing Menu All functions apply to the selected source OVERSAMPLE SIZING SRC_1 ID Layer Right Edge Left Edge Top Edge Bottom Edge ALL FORCE ACQUIRE Figure 4 7 Oversample Sizing Menu sample With Oversample enabled the following timing parameters allow you to adjust the image to properly fit the layer s blinking raster box e 1D indicates the ID of the associated ScreenPRO Il Note The ID line only appears when a widescreen destination is selected f AIl is shown in a widescreen co
145. and Triggering Moves For each layer on which you have programmed an associated move you can pend and trigger the move in one of two ways on Preview or on Program e Pend on Preview e Pend on Program Pend on Preview This pend method enables you to move the PIP or Key automatically on the next transition B Use the following steps to pend a move on Preview 1 With the move properly programmed ensure that the layer containing a move is selected and blinking 2 To pend the move press Move in the Layer Functions Section The button lights to indicate the pending move On Preview the raster box blinks at the destination location not the PIP or Key s current location 3 Perform a CUT or AUTO TRANS The transition takes the Preview image to air and the move begins immediately on both Program and Preview 4 To move the layer back to keyframe 1 press Move The button lights and on Preview the raster box blinks at the starting location 5 Perform a CUT or AUTO TRANS In this ping pong manner you can continue to transit back and forth between keyframes 1 and 2 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 239 6 Operations Using Move Pend on Program This pend method enables you to trigger the move manually once the layer is already on Program E Use the following steps to pend a move on Program 1 With the move properly programmed ensure that the layer containing a move is selected and blink
146. anding Input File Mapping Monitor Layout Use the following diagram as a recommended layout for your monitors A sample dual screen widescreen configuration is shown Figure 6 1 Recommended Monitor Layout For optimum viewing and utility place your Preview monitors on the left and your Program monitors on the right Touch Screen Calibration Touch Screen calibration is an excellent prerequisite to all operating procedures E Use the following steps to calibrate your Touch Screen display 1 aN If required press HOME to display the Home Menu Press MISC to show the Miscellaneous Menu Press LCD SETTINGS to display the first LCD Settings Menu Press LCD Cal to display the first Touch Screen Calibration Menu Follow directions on screen to complete the calibration procedure ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 217 6 Operations Operational Configuration 218 Wide Screen Markers E If you are using a wide screen configuration ensure that your Wide Screen Markers are enabled 1 From the Home Menu press OUTPUT to display the Output Menu 2 On the Destination Bus select your system s wide screen destination 3 Press WIDE SCREEN to display the Wide Screen Settings Menu 4 Scroll to the Marker Mode line and enable the system s wide screen markers to show the boundaries of active data In wide screen applications Wide Screen Markers
147. applies to single screen destinations only This field indicates the current setting of the selected ScreenPRO II s Termination Switch Please note e Ifyou elect to use external Genlock for single or widescreen configurations PAL or NTSC black burst or composite sync signals are recommended e n widescreen mode you can optionally connect external Genlock to BlendPRO II s Genlock In connector but not to the individual ScreenPRO Il units ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 103 4 Menu Orientation Output Menu e n widescreen configurations BlendPRO ll is the master whether or not you are using an external Genlock signal e QGenlock is recommended in configurations that utilize video camera sources Settings Menu From the Output Menu press SETTINGS to display the Settings Menu Output Monitor All Sync Out SOG Gamma Raster Box Size Figure 4 13 Settings Menu sample The Settings Menu enables you to set sync parameters for the monitors and projectors connected to the system for the destination selected on the Output Menu Output Monitor selects the device s that are affected by the sync settings Choose between All adjustments affect all program and preview monitors projectors Preview adjustments affect preview monitors only SPII Program adjustments affect only the monitors projectors connected to ScreenPRO Il program outputs BPII Program adjustm
148. ar Panel o o ooocooccoococooc o 32 ScreenPRO Ill Controller Front Panel 2 0 2 2 0 0 0 0 0c cece eee eee 34 Useot Colo i senate oe dees hee ei EA die a aa 36 Front Panel Sections 00 eee eee 37 Touch Screen Menu Section 00 000 cece eee 38 Presets Section zc e LS ea da cd 39 Destination Aux BUS o oooooocoooo ee eee eee 40 Joystick Sect ici eevee veces ede CR bed ees 42 Source Selection BUS e cR REG EXE ER s vee 44 Layer Functions Section 00 00 c eee eee eee 46 Layer Control Section 0 0 0 c cece eee eee 48 Transition Section s 0 0 0 eee eens 50 Hardware Installation 53 IncThis Chaptet ies ack at in 53 Safety Precautions 0 0 0 eect teens 54 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 7 Table of Contents Chapter 4 Unpacking and Inspection 0 0 cece tees 54 Site Preparate mt eee REPRE 54 Controller Installation lisse BI 54 Cable Adapter and Accessory Information 000 e eee eee 55 Connection Charts 0 0 0 e a a e e a i a 56 Connection Chart Overview 0 0c eee ee 56 Sample Connection Charts External Routing 58 External Routing Sample Analog Router I O Chart 59 External Routing Sample Digital Router I O Chart 59 Widescreen Sample DVI Connection Chart 60 Widescreen Sample Standard Destination Chart 60 Widesc
149. ard Destination Setup 192 ScreenPRO II Controller system setup Step 7 In this procedure you will set up the system s standard destinations single screen and widescreen on the Controller s Destination Bus A Prerequisites Ensure that you are familiar with the Destination Setup Menu In Chapter 4 refer to the Destination Setup Menu section on page 117 Note Up to 4 standard destinations can be assigned single screen and widescreen but only 1 widescreen destination is allowed E Use the following steps to set up a single screen or a widescreen destination 1 From the Home Menu press SYSTEM to access the System Menu 2 Press DEST SETUP to display the Destination Setup Menu 3 Scrollto the Destination line and select the destination that you want to define either 1 2 3 or 4 4 Scroll to the SP to Add line and select the ID of an available ScreenPRO ll If a ScreenPRO II is already assigned to a destination it will not appear in the list Note When there are no more ScreenPRO lIs available to assign the right hand column displays N A 5 Press ADD to add the highlighted ScreenPRO Il to the destination Once added the ID will appear in the bottom portion of the menu Please note Fora Single Screen configuration add only one ScreenPRO Il Repeat from step 3 to define all remaining single screen destinations Fora Wide Screen configuration add as many
150. as measured from the exact center of the Key Thus the value 64 is 64 pixels above center To adjust use the ADJ knob or move the Joystick up and down Move Rate adjusts the rate in 0 1 second increments for programmed Key movement from key frame to key frame To adjust use the ADJ knob or twist the Joystick Z Axis knob Key Frame Effect indicates the motion type that is used to move the Key from point to point Note Only the Linear motion type is supported All other key frame effects are ignored by ScreenPRO Il destinations 160 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation Key Menu e Press STATS to display the Status Menu Refer to the Status Menu section on page 147 for details e Press KEY to display the Key Menu Refer to the Key Menu Description section on page 156 for details e Press MATTE to display the Matte Menu Refer to the Matte Menu section on page 159 for details e Press EFX to display the Image Effects Menu Refer to the Image Effects Menu section on page 153 for details e At the bottom of the Key Adjustment Menu the TRACK SIZE check box has the following functions Check the TRACK SIZE check box to lock H Size and V Size together Regardless of the Key s current aspect ratio its size will adjust proportionally when the Joystick s Z Axis knob or the ADJ rotary knob is used to change size Uncheck the TRACK SIZE check box
151. azard use only the fuse having identical type voltage rating and current rating characteristics Refer fuse replacement to qualified service personnel Do Not Operate in Explosive Atmospheres To avoid explosion do not operate this product in an explosive atmosphere 4 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide Terms In This Manual and Equipment Marking WARNING Highlights an operating procedure practice condition statement etc which if not strictly observed could result in injury to or death of personnel Note Highlights an essential operating procedure condition or statement CAUTION The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance Le point d exclamation dans un triangle equilat ral signale alerter l utilisateur qu il y a des instructions d operation et d entretien tres importantes dans la lit rature qui accompagne l appareil VORSICHT Ein Ausrufungszeichen innerhalb eines gleichwinkeligen Dreiecks dient dazu den Benutzer auf wichtige Bedienungs und Wartungsanweisungen in der Dem Great beiliegenden Literatur aufmerksam zu machen l AVERTISSEMENT ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 5 Change History The table below lists the changes to the ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide Table 0 1 Change History Date Description
152. between the DSK and BG B Mixer Effect 1 This effect includes a non transitioning background either A or B one transitioning PIP and the DSK Background PIP A amp B DSK Figure 1 7 Effect 1 Diagram Mixer Effect 2 This transition is similar to effect 1 but because the DSK is not in use the background can transition from source A to B and the PIP can transition between layers A and B Background A lt gt B PIP AoB Figure 1 8 Effect 2 Diagram ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 27 1 Introduction System Overview Mixer Effect 3 In this effect because the DSK is in use the background cannot transition you can only use background A Here you can independently fade or cut one scaled PIP and one scaled key with complete size and position flexibility Background A Figure 1 9 Effect 3 Diagram Mixer Effect 4 This transition is similar to effect 3 but because the DSK is not in use the background can transition between sources A and B You can also independently fade cut size and position both the PIP and the key Background A lt gt B PIP a KeyB Figure 1 10 Effect 4 Diagram Mixer Effect 5 In this effect because the DSK is in use the background cannot transition you can only use background A Here you can independently fade two scaled PIPs up and down with or without the DSK on screen Background A Figure 1 11 Effect 5 Diagram 2
153. button to turn all destinations on 222 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 6 Operations Working with Destinations Clearing Destinations E Use the following steps to clear destinations 1 To clear all destinations double punch the All button 2 To clear a single destination or multiple destinations from an active group turn DEST AUX on or off as desired then simultaneously press the destinations that you want to remain on A Destinations 1 2 and 3 are active To clear destination 2 simultaneously press destinations 1 and 3 Routing Sources to Destinations When routing sources to both standard and Aux destinations please note e Remember that the Destination Aux Bus is one bus it is not two separate and independent buses e Any source that you select will apply to all enabled buses even if that bus is not currently visible due to the state of the DEST AUX button e Any transition that you perform will apply to all enabled buses even if that bus is not currently visible due to the state of the DEST AUX button B Use the following steps to route a source to a destination or multiple destinations 1 Onthe Destination Aux Bus enable or disable the DEST AUX button as desired Enable only the destination button s on which you want to pend a route For standard destinations select the desired layer LAYER A or LAYER B This step is not required for an Aux bus route 4 On the Sourc
154. can be used to directly generate image data to drive multiple screens In this case the computer generates one very high resolution image and the image is output by multiple graphics heads The inherent resolution of the output image is limited only by the processing power of the multi head graphics board Image resolutions with up to 10 000 pixels of horizontal resolution can be achieved with current technology ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 3 Hardware Installation Overview of Edge Blending Technology Video Processing The purpose of the edge blending process is to provide a smooth transition for the eye over the blending region To provide a smooth transition identical image data from two or more different projectors must be superimposed and the output from each projector must be edge feathered to provide seamless optical mixing of the two source images There are two video processing functions that are required specifically to support wide screen edge blended displays Image Overlap and Edge Feathering Original Image from Multi head Graphics Card Image Overlap Source images consist of a single HD image that has been split into multiple channels or a series of images from a multi head graphics card In either case the source images must be re formatted to provide image overlap to support the edge blending process The Image Overlap processing is illustrated below The width of the blending region determi
155. cations ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 273 C Upgrading Software Ethernet Upgrade Method Ethernet Upgrade Method W Use the following steps to upgrade ScreenPRO II Controller software using an Ethernet connection to your PC Note The default IP address is 192 168 0 2 1 Ensure that your PC or laptop uses the Windows 2000 or XP operating systems 2 Connect the ScreenPRO II Controller s Ethernet port to a Hub or Switch 3 Connect the Ethernet Hub or Switch to your PC Remember that a totally local network is recommended without IP connections to the outside world 4 Power up the ScreenPRO II Controller 5 On the PC click Start gt Programs gt Barco Folsom gt ScreenPRO II Controller Software gt Flash Loader to launch the Flash Loader utility t Barco Folsom LLC Flash Loader Ol x Exit Communication Terminal FLASH LOADER Version 2 00 pen script file to read and upload r RS 232 COM None g Ethernet WD MERXD NDCD CTS Baud 115200 Figure C 2 Flash Loader Utility 6 Click Communication gt Ethernet gt Connect to display the Ethernet Connection Dialog Barco Folsom LLC Ethernet Connection x IP Address 168 o E Port 000 Connect Note Computer s IP Addr 192 168 0 5 Figure C 3 Ethernet Connection Dialog sample Note If the Ethernet menu pick is grayed out set the COM port to None 7 Inthe dialog enter S
156. ce Press APPLY FORMAT to select the output resolution DVI EDID format can be adjusted to match the output format in the MISC gt EDID menu APPLY TEST WIDE FORMAT SETTINGS PATTERN SCREEN Figure 4 11 Output Menu sample The Output Menu enables you to configure ScreenPRO Il outputs wide screen parameters and test patterns To access the menu e Select a destination on the Destination Bus e Press OUTPUT on the Home Menu The menu cannot be accessed unless a destination is selected The currently selected destination is shown in the menu s upper right corner The menu tracks the destination thus if you switch destinations the menu is immediately re assigned ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 101 4 Menu Orientation Output Menu Output Menu Functions The following Output Menu functions are provided Destination indicates the destination on which you are currently working as selected on the Destination Bus Note The selected destination can be configured as a single screen or multiple screens in a wide screen application In this situation all changes to the Output Menu affect all ScreenPRO II units in the wide screen definition Format sets the resolution and frame rate at which you want to drive the destination s projector s To minimize synchronization problems select a frame rate that is consistent with your input sources A Example If you are using 59 94 NTSC v
157. ce and a layer e Source buttons cannot be selected if they have not been assigned during the source setup procedure The button will not light e Source buttons are also used to route inputs to selected Aux destinations In Chapter 6 refer to the Working with Destinations section on page 222 for details Note When the Controller is locked source buttons are used to enter the 4 digit password In Chapter 6 refer to the Locking and Unlocking the Controller section on page 252 for details Shift the Shift button is a toggle press once to light press again to turn off When lit press the desired source button to access the second row of numbered sources 9 16 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 45 2 Hardware Orientation Front Panel Sections Layer Functions Section The figure below illustrates the Layer Functions Section LAYER FUNCTIONS Figure 2 7 Layer Functions Section The buttons in the Layer Functions Section enable you to change or modify the selected blinking layer in the Layer Control Section PIP press to change the selected layer in the Layer Control Section and its associated source to a PIP The PIP Adjustment Menu appears on the Touch Screen In Chapter 4 refer to the PIP Adjustment Menu section on page 148 for details Key press to change the selected layer in the Layer Control Section and its associated source to a Key The Key Adjustment Menu a
158. ce that you create on Preview represents the exact appearance of Program after you transition the images to Program A The illustration below represents a simple Preview to Program transition SPLIT mode is on enabling you to have two PIPs on screen simultaneously Program Program Background A PIPA Background A PIPA PIP B Preview Preview Background A PIPA PIP B Figure 6 4 Program to Preview Transition with Lookahead Background A PIPA PIP B e Inframe 1 Program consists of a background and a single PIP e In frame 2 a second PIP is selected and positioned on Preview e When CUT or AUTO TRANS is pressed the PIP transitions to Program Frame 3 represents the Program screen identical to the Preview look in frame 2 Frame 4 represents Preview after the transition Preview will continue to match Program until you modify the preview image in preparation for the next transition With these facts in mind ensure that you always create the desired next look in Preview In this manner there won t be any operational surprises e By using lookahead you ll always know visually what PIPs and keys you want to transition TO Program e Conversely you ll always know what PIPs and keys to you wish to clear to visually remove elements FROM Program ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 219 6 Operations Operational Configuration Understanding Raster Boxes With S
159. ckground button blinking and active for modification select the type of background to which you want to transition Scroll to the Type line Select DVI to use an unscaled full screen graphic Ensure that the DVI source is properly set up Select MATTE to use a solid color Press MATTE to display the Background Matte Menu and adjust the color as required In Chapter 4 refer to the BG Matte Menu section on page 174 for details Select FG 1 FG 2 or FG 3 to use a captured still frame as the background source Refer to the Working with Still Frames section on page 246 for details 3 Setthe background toggle mode In the Layer Functions Section Enable the Toggle button to toggle between the last two selected backgrounds on each transition Disable the Toggle button to retain the last selected background on the next transition 4 Perform the desired transition Please note the following important points regarding background transitions e f BG Ais on Program and BG Ais selected in Preview there will be no change of backgrounds on the next transition The similar situation is true for BG B e f BG Ais on Program and BG B is selected in Preview BG A will transition to BG B on the next transition ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 227 6 Operations Working with Layers 228 Understanding Split and Mix Modes The ScreenPRO II Controller provides two different modes with which you can transitio
160. context sensitive It is used to reset the current effect to a nominal default value on Preview B Use the following steps to reset a specific PIP or Key parameter 1 Inthe Layer Control Section activate the layer that you wish to reset The layer button blinks to indicate that it is active 2 Ensure that the layer is on Preview Typically you cannot reset functions on Program Note In some situations such as size and position a parameter on Program can be reset provided that Modify Layers on Program is enabled Ensure that Freeze is off Frozen PIPs or Keys cannot be reset If required access the menu whose specific function you want to reset e g borders shadows special effect size etc 5 Inthe Joystick Section press Reset to reset the current effect Using Join Mode The Join mode enables you to lock Layer A and Layer B together such that they move as one You can program moves when the two layers are joined and the mode is particularly effective when using Cut Fill keys The following rules apply The Split mode must be enabled in order to enter the Join mode Any Layer A and Layer B effect can be joined including PIPs and all types of Keys You can join two PIPs two Keys or one PIP and one Key When the two layers are joined the Size and Position controls on either layer enable you to move both layers as one The relationship of the two layers at the time of the joining is maintained prop
161. creenPRO II Controller Raster Boxes are always enabled on Preview each PIP or Key is surrounded by a thin border that helps you identify the PIP or Key s original layer e The PIP or Key with a red corner style raster box is Layer A e The PIP or Key with a red dashed raster box is Layer B Figure 6 5 Raster Box Styles sample e The blinking raster box is always the one enabled for modification and its corresponding layer button will blink Raster boxes that are underneath other layers such as another PIP the DSK or the LOGO are still visible on Preview Figure 6 6 Raster Box Visibility sample B Remember that Raster Box size can be adjusted 1 From the Home Menu press OUTPUT to display the Output Menu 2 Onthe Destination Bus select the destination that you want to configure 3 Press SETTINGS to display the Settings Menu 4 On the Raster Box Size line set the size of the raster box that appears around PIPs and Keys 220 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 6 Operations Operational Configuration A Word About LOS On rare occasion you can experience LOS loss of signal typically due to a poor video graphics or computer connection In these cases the ScreenPRO Il Controller obeys a precise set of rules for how to handle the signals e Scaler LOS If there is a LOS for a video signal inside a scaler PIP or KEY the video switches to black but the scaler remains in it
162. creenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 159 4 Menu Orientation Key Menu Key Adjustment Menu From the Key Menu press SIZE amp POS to display the Key Adjustment Menu KEY ADJUSTMENT H Size lt 33 5 gt 606 V Size lt 58 3 gt H Position V Position Move Rate Key Frame Effect OPERATION JOY Z to SIZE X Y TO POSITION TRACK SIZE Figure 4 58 Key Adjustment Menu sample The Key Adjustment Menu is virtually identical to the PIP Adjustment Menu except that it pertains to Keys rather than PIPs The following functions are provided e H Size adjusts the Key s horizontal size in pixels The 96 value indicates the key s size as a percentage of the screen s horizontal resolution The numeric value is the Key s width in pixels To adjust use the ADJ knob or the Joystick s Z Axis knob e V Size adjusts the Key s vertical size in pixels The 96 value indicates the Key s size as a percentage of the screen s vertical resolution The numeric value is the Key s height in pixels To adjust use the ADJ knob or the Joystick s Z Axis knob e H Position indicates the Key s position relative to the horizontal center of the screen 00 as measured from the exact center of the Key Thus the value 160 is 160 pixels to the left of center To adjust use the ADJ knob or move the Joystick left and right e VPosition indicates the Key s position relative to the vertical center of the screen 00
163. creenPRO Il Controller s IP address 192 168 0 2 and enter the default port number 3000 274 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 10 11 12 13 14 C Uporading Software Ethernet Upgrade Method Click the Connect button If the connection is successfully the message Connect via Ethernet successful appears in the Flash Loader s Status Bar If you cannot connect refer to the Troubleshooting Ethernet Communication section on page 275 To upload files to the ScreenPRO II Controller click Open script file to read and upload In the dialog select Complete_Load sld and click Open The ScreenPRO II Controller menu should immediately display the System in LOADER MODE message It takes several minutes to load the flash memory When complete the Flash Loader utility displays the Upload Complete message Click OK to continue Cycle power on the ScreenPRO II Controller and exit the Flash Loader utility On ScreenPRO II Controller perform a factory reset In Chapter 5 refer to the Return to Factory Default section on page 189 for instructions On the ScreenPRO Ill Controller verify that the new software has been loaded correctly Press HOME gt SYSTEM gt SW VER to display the Software Version Menu Troubleshooting Ethernet Communication B Use the following steps to determine the IP address of ScreenPRO II Controller and establish proper communications Note The d
164. ct Barco Technical Support In Appendix B refer to the Contact Information section on page 268 for information In this section you will set up your projectors for both single screen and widescreen destinations The following procedures are provided Single Screen Projector Setup Wide Screen Projector Setup Single Screen Projector Setup B Use the following steps to set up a projector for a single screen destination 1 2 o N S g 11 12 From the Home Menu press OUTPUT to display the Output Menu On the Destination Bus select the destination whose projector you want to configure Press TEST PATTERN to display the Test Pattern Menu On the Output Monitor line select the output s on which you want a test pattern to appear All Preview SPII Program or BPII Program On the Mode line select On On the Type line select the Burst test pattern On the Raster Box line select On At the projector itself perform the following adjustments to ensure that the output data from the selected device is properly displayed Adjust the image for a minimum amount of noise Adjust the pixel clock for proper image position such that the entire Raster Box is visible On the Type line select one of the many Gray Scale test patterns as desired At the projector itself adjust color balance brightness and contrast Important Refer to your projector s technical manual for information on all projector
165. ction and active for modification on Preview If the Key Menu is not visible press KEY in the Layer Functions Section Key Type Use the controls in the Key Menu to select the desired key type Luma Color or Cut Fill In Chapter 4 refer to the Key Menu Functions section on page 156 for menu details Note Remember that Cut Fill keys can only be selected on Layer B when the Split Mode is enabled Clip Gain Mode Opacity Use the controls in the Key Menu to adjust the Key s clip gain invert mode and opacity on Preview In Chapter 4 refer to the Key Menu Functions section on page 156 for menu details Fill Source Use the controls in the Key Menu to select a self or matte fill key If Matte is selected press MATTE to display the Matte Menu with which you can choose the matte fill color In Chapter 4 refer to the Matte Menu section on page 159 for menu details Size and Position From the Key Menu press SIZE 8 POS to display the Key Adjustment Menu Use the controls to manipulate the Key on Preview In Chapter 4 refer to the Key Adjustment Menu section on page 160 for details Crop Press Crop in the Joystick Section to display the Crop Adjustment Menu Select the type of crop the aspect ratio and the image s H and V size In Chapter 4 refer to the Crop Menu section on page 164 for details Source Size Press Source in the Joystick Section to display the Key So
166. ction buttons are lit the 3 axis Joystick has the following functions e X Axis Control Move the Joystick left and right to move the PIP or Key left and right respectively e Y Axis Control Move the Joystick up and down to move the PIP or Key up and down on Preview e Z Axis Control Twist the Joystick s top knob clockwise and counterclockwise to increase or decrease the PIP or Key size Note The Z Axis Control can also be used to increase or decrease the value of a highlighted parameter such as a matte color key clip and gain border size and much more 42 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 2 Hardware Orientation Source JE Left Bottom Right Fine Adjust Front Panel Sections Descriptions of each button in the Joystick Section are listed below Source press to assign the Joystick to sizing and positioning the source image within the PIP or Key boundaries Please note e n Source mode the PIP or Key s placement on screen remains static while the image is adjusted within e IfaPIP is selected the Input Source Adjustment Menu appears when Source is enabled e Ifa Key is selected the Key Source Adjustment Menu appears when Source is enabled To return to normal PIP adjustment turn the button off In Chapter 4 refer to the Source Adjustment Menus section on page 165 for additional details Crop press to re assign the Joystick to cropping
167. cult 82 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 3 Hardware Installation Overview of Edge Blending Technology Left Justified Configurations Left justification means that the first pixels of the projected image begin immediately at the left and that unused source material is removed from the far right of the image A two projector sample is illustrated below Projector 2 p Projector 1 Image Image Image Unused Overlap Source Region Material Figure 3 8 Left Justification Center Justified Configurations Center justification means that the projected image is properly centered within the available number of pixels and that unused source material is removed from the far left and far right of the image A two projector sample is illustrated below Proj 2 image 0 09 Projector 1 Image Unused Image Unused Source Overlap Source Material Region Material Figure 3 9 Center Justification This completes the hardware installation chapter Please continue with Chapter 4 Menu Orientation ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 83 3 Hardware Installation Overview of Edge Blending Technology 84 ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide BARCO Visibly yours 4 Menu Orientation In This Chapter This chapter describes all ScreenPRO II Controller menus including how they are accessed the functions that are available and descriptions of each menu tree in block diagram f
168. d and edge feathered BPII Program adjustments affect only the monitors projectors connected to BlendPRO II program outputs With this selection test patterns will not be data doubled and edge feathered e Mode enables you to turn test patterns on or off Type sets the test pattern Choose between Off H Ramp V Ramp 10096 Color Bars 16x16 Grid 32x32 Grid Burst 75 Color Bars 50 Gray Gray Steps 1 Gray Steps 2 White Black Red Green and Blue Raster Box displays a raster box defined by the exact outer edges of the selected output resolution For example if the output is set to 1024 x 768 the raster box will encapsulate that exact format Please note The Burst test pattern is the only pattern that is smaller than the selected output resolution When the Raster Box is enabled the Burst pattern will appear within its boundaries The Raster Box can be enabled when the test pattern is Off ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 105 4 Menu Orientation Output Menu Alignment Test Pattern for convenience this function enables you to turn the alignment test pattern on or off from this menu in addition to the Wide Screen Settings Menu Note This field only appears when a wide screen destination is selected Wide Screen Settings Menu From the Output Menu press WIDE SCREEN to display the Wide Screen Settings Menu WIDE SCREEN SETTINGS Total Projectors 2 Total H Re
169. default mode is off The feature should be turned on to process video derived from film material e Sync Slice mv This function selects the sync comparator threshold for RGsB RGB with Sync on Green or YPP analog component video sources The value ranges from 20mV to 280mV and is adjustable in steps of 10mV The default value is 160mV When the ScreenPRO II Controller detects Macrovision copy protection on the incoming YPpP NTSC PAL video the Sync Slice value is repositioned to 60mV to account for the reduced amplitude sync pulse Note The default Sync Slice level has been optimized for virtually all sources that will be encountered and should rarely if ever require adjustment However you can adjust the level to improve sync detection and synchronization in cases of extremely noisy RGsB or YP P video signals e Sharpness sets the input s sharpness Adjustment range 10 very smooth to 10 very sharp ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 91 4 Menu Orientation Input Menu Press CFG to display the Input Configuration Menu Refer to the Input Configuration Menu section on page 93 for details Press AR to display the Aspect Ratio Menu Refer to the Aspect Ratio Menu section on page 94 for details Press SAVE to save the selected input in the designated input file using all current information on the Input Menu Using an automatic copy down function the saved file will
170. der Menu From the PIP Adjustment Menu press BORDR to display the Border Menu BORDER Mode On Style 5 Color Red 609 Green 600 Blue 531 Size Specified In of PIP Size lt of PIP gt 10 2 Figure 4 52 Border Menu sample The Border Menu enables you to add a border to a PIP and adjust its shape style and color as desired Note You can also access the Border Menu from the Shadow Menu and the Image Effects Menu by pressing BORDR The following functions are provided Mode enables or disables the PIP s border Style select one of multiple border styles including single color and dual color with various combinations of soft edge Color enables you to individually adjust the border s Red Green and Blue attributes as desired Size Specified In select the method by which you want to specify the border size either as a percentage of the PIP size or in pixels Size adjust s the border size using the method selected on the Size Specified In line Note that if 96 of PIP is selected and you switch to Pixels the system auto converts one display method to the other Press PIP to return to the PIP Adjustment Menu Refer to the PIP Adjustment Menu Functions section on page 149 for details Press SHDOW to display the Shadow Menu Refer to the Shadow Menu section on page 152 for details Press EFX to display the Image Effects Menu Refer to the
171. destination 65 single screen DVI connection 64 single screen standard destination 64 widescreen Aux destination 61 widescreen DVI connection 60 widescreen standard destination 60 Sample connection charts external routing o ooooooooooo 58 internal routing ooocoooocoooo 62 Sampling Mode lessen 91 Saturation iveco eR Ren o 99 SAVE oia oes ee Oa oe 87 Save captured frame 144 Setup aia ESSRAIDEiT Res EXE 213 still frame in permanent memory 248 system configuration 213 Scaler Ahi eed nes le EPR 19 LOS a lea ITO 221 OSGIGOLY ic a ie tele ts at 19 ScreenPRO II genlock termination menu 118 119 input doi torn ae eas ee es 126 ScreenPRO II Controller effect combinations 27 featutes viii eh 20 how to install o 73 installation o oo ooo oooooo 54 OVerVIeW ura 20 SDI Router Dame ah atte oh A AE 122 CUPU 2d Bice a teh cee les 122 Section JOYSTICK ooh ce et 35 layer control 0c eee eee eee 35 layer functions 005 35 presets tna ne anette titre AE 34 touch screen menu 34 transition oram aia as 35 ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide Index Self MN soon oe hated oles ide ois 157 Sequence system setup 185 Serial connection via Lantronix EDS200 74 co
172. e The layer button blinks to indicate that it is active for modification Inthe Source Selection Bus the source assigned to the layer blinks ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 229 6 Operations Working with Layers 230 On Preview the raster box for the selected layer blinks even if it is hidden under the DSk In the Layer Functions Section ensure that the PIP button is lit and the PIP Adjustment Menu is visible If the menu is not visible press PIP Set the desired Mix Mode To co locate the mixer s PIPs enable the Mix Source button To locate the mixer s PIPs independently enable the Swap button To toggle sources enable the Toggle button On the Source Selection Bus press the button for the desired new source The button blinks to indicate that it is selected and the source appears within the PIP on Preview Adjust the PIP s size position border shadow source image cropping and special effects Refer to the Modifying PIPs section on page 230 for details Press CUT or AUTO TRANS to transition the new look to program Refer to the Working with Transitions section on page 241 for details Repeat the procedure from step 1 for the next transition Modifying PIPs B Use the following steps to modify a PIP 1 Ensure that the PIP is selected in the Layer Conirol Section and active for modification on Preview If the PIP Adjustment Menu is not visible press PIP Size
173. e selects the router from which analog sources will be routed to the ImagePRO or PrePRO II Analog Router Output selects the specific router output designated as Aux as assigned on the router s Output Patch Menu ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 121 4 Menu Orientation System Menu ImagePRO Input or PrePRO II Input selects the ImagePRO or PrePRO II input to which the analog router output is connected e In the SDI section SDI Router Name selects the router from which SDI sources will be routed to the ImagePRO or PrePRO II SDI Router Output selects the specific router output designated as Aux as assigned on the router s Output Patch Menu ImagePRO Input or PrePRO II Input selects the ImagePRO or PrePRO II input to which the SDI router output is connected 122 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation System Menu e Inthe DVI section applies to ImagePRO Aux destinations only DVI Router Name selects the router from which DVI sources will be routed to the ImagePRO DVI Router Output selects the specific router output designated as Aux as assigned on the router s Output Patch Menu ImagePRO Input selects the ImagePRO input to which the DVI router output is connected Press RESET to return all fields to lt UNDEFINED gt Please note the following important points regarding Aux destinations e For proper operation ImageP
174. e Next e e N 4 Previous this function is currently not implemented Previous A To switch to page 5 press Page 5 instructions on all Preset modes Destination Aux Bus The figure below illustrates the Destination Aux Bus 1 2 3 4 ALL Figure 2 4 Destination Aux Bus four Aux auxiliary Important Operationally remember that the Destination Aux Bus is one bus it is not two separate and independent buses e Any source selection will apply to all enabled buses e Any transition will apply to all enabled buses ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 2 Hardware Orientation Front Panel Sections Examples of destinations are listed below Single Screen Destination this is a single projector destination that takes its input from a ScreenPRO II Wide Screen Destination this is a multiple projector destination that takes its inputs from two three or four ScreenPRO lls as routed through a BlendPRO II Aux Destination this is a single monitor that takes its input from one router output in a single format When you select an Aux destination and a source on the Controller you are talking directly to a specific router output via RS 232 or Ethernet communications and making a source to destination connection ImagePRO Aux Destination this is a standalone ImagePRO that takes its input s from multiple routers in multiple formats When connected to a single mo
175. e Joystick Section heading on page 42 for details Light Adjustment Knob The Light Adjustment Knob enables you to control the brightness of the low voltage script light XLR Connector One XLR Connector is provided for the low voltage script light Source Selection Bus The Source Selection Bus allows you to choose the sources that are routed into PIPs and keys Buttons are provided for up to 16 analog sources and up to two HD SDI SD SDI sources Refer to the Source Selection Bus section on page 44 for details Layer Functions Section When a layer is active and blinking in the Layer Control Section all buttons in the Layer Functions Section apply to that layer enabling you to change its mode and manipulate the source Refer to the Layer Functions Section heading on page 46 for details Layer Control Section The Layer Control Section is the operational heart of the ScreenPRO Il Controller enabling you to assign sources to PIPs and keys Here you control the overall look on Preview and Program Refer to the Layer Control Section heading on page 48 for details Transition Section The Transition Section includes the T Bar for manually mixing sources on and off Program plus dedicated buttons for cutting mixing and wiping Refer to the Transition Section heading on page 50 for details ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 35 2 Hardware Orientation Use of Color Use of Color cl
176. e if required B Use the following steps to power up your ScreenPRO II Controller system 1 Ensure that all individual ScreenPRO ll units are powered up 2 Power up all routers in your system and allows them to fully boot up These are your devices with static IP addresses 3 Power up the ScreenPRO II Controller and allow it to fully boot up This is the system s DHCP server If you will be using a widescreen configuration power up the BlendPRO II Power up all PresentationPRO II units and ImagePRO units in your system This sequence enables the ScreenPRO II Controller to serve IP addresses to the other peripherals Power up all additional peripherals such as monitors and projectors Check the ScreenPRO II Controllers Status Menu and ensure that all devices have been recognized By default this menu should appear at power up If it is not shown press STATUS on the Home Menu 8 Check code compatibility when the ScreenPRO II Controller connects to the individual devices it automatically checks the compatibility of the code versions fthe Controller s code version matches that of the ScreenPRO II units PresentationPRO Il units and BlendPRO ll the Status Menu is shown and you do not need to download code fthe message Checksum Mismatch appears on the Status Menu you must download code Please continue with the Downloading Code procedure on page 188 Ifthe Controller s code ver
177. e 47 Top edge ii A ee 97 left DUONO iode ee ee eee 43 left crop sioe Ro Ee de egi 164 Total H Res formula Lus 107 projectors raaa aiaa e E ee eee 106 MiRGS isis hb nu med doped 107 Touch screen ulsus 19 38 calibration 76 189 217 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide Index menu section sess 34 menu section description 38 Trademarks cana ed 3 Transition CUL S inl A MEER hae A 241 edge width 0 eee eee 146 Mania 222 25 eps dhe igs rx 51 242 MIX aia ieee tas 241 perform background 227 r te Sr ur Lei LA ERE RISE 146 SOCOM Lair ar etes E N EUN 35 section description 50 WIDE ESSE PEN DE PEERS 146 241 working With 0 0c eee eee 241 Transparency shadow 152 Triggering a move 0 eee eee 239 Troubleshoot Ethernet connection 275 Type background 20e seer eee 172 Clone at ra is e 162 communication o o o oooo 128 destination o oooooooooooo 117 DSK or DR ENY 181 genlock 2 23 ed sciet Sewn a e 103 Key onte P Iter bMS 156 LOGO v amem de e eS 182 test pattern o oooooooooooooo 105 U UDS100 UDS200 0 000 131 Understanding file mapping e eee eee eee 221 raster DOXesS 2000e eee aee 220 splitand mix modes 228 Unlock controller
178. e Manual 26 0505000 00 ScreenPRO II Controller MIT musuuHH a25 a Mapa a Pr fuma 13 LLLLIT T T ra sus m e User s Guide BARCO Revision A Visibly yours ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide Copyright Barco Inc August 3 2006 All rights reserved No part of this document may be copied reproduced or translated It shall not otherwise be recorded transmitted or stored in a retrieval system without the prior written consent of Barco Notice Barco provides this manual as is without warranty of any kind either expressed or implied including but not limited to the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Barco may make improvements and or changes to the product s and or the program s described in this publication at any time without notice This publication could contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Changes are periodically made to the information in this publication these changes are incorporated in new editions of this publication Federal Communications Commission FCC Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency ener
179. e Selection Bus select the source that you want to route to the selected destination s Note At this point the route is pending on Preview You are free to manipulate the source e g PIP and Key but the route will not occur until the destination is enabled and the next transition is performed Repeat steps 1 through 3 for additional source to destination combinations Enable all destinations that you want to transition Perform the desired transition in the normal manner Once performed the pending route is completed Note If you want to clear the pending route prior to performing it simply clear the lit Aux destination s ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 223 6 Operations Working with Destinations 224 Following are several simple examples of source to destination routing A Single source to single destination Route Source 1 to Destination 1 a b c d e Turn DEST AUX off Press Destination 1 Press LAYER A Select Source 1 Press AUTO TRANS A Single source to single Aux destination Route Source 2 to Aux Destination 2 a b c d Turn DEST AUX on Press Destination 2 Select Source 1 Press AUTO TRANS A Single source to multiple destinations Route Source 8 to Destinations 1 2 and 3 a b c d e Turn DEST AUX off Press Destinations 1 2 and 3 simultaneously Press LAYER A Select Source 8 Press AUTO TRANS A Multiple sources to
180. e Source Number selects the source button on the Controller that you want to patch The selection range is 1 16 The source is chosen with the ADJ knob not with the source buttons Connection Type determines how the selected source is connected From a router choose between up to eight MATRIXPRO routers or a third party router e g SIERRA LEITCH etc as selected on the Router Specification Menu To ScreenPRO Il s internal matrix choose ALL SP or an individual ScreenPRO II ID The ALL SP selection assumes connections from ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 125 4 Menu Orientation System Menu 126 DAs to similar ScreenPRO II inputs and enables all ScreenPRO lIls to switch simultaneously to the same input Note Asterisks around the ID number e g 1 indicate that the selected ID has not been detected by the system However you can proceed with patching and once the ID is detected the patch will be completed as programmed Router Input Applies to Router connections this option selects the physical router input that you wish to associate with the source The available range depends on the number of router inputs that are defined in the Router Specification Menu Note The same router input can be chosen for different source numbers ScreenPRO Il Input selects the specific input on the ScreenPRO Il Tally Number Applies to all connections
181. e Upgrade ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 147 4 Menu Orientation PIP Adjustment Menu PIP Adjustment Menu The following topics are discussed in this section e PIP Adjustment Menu Tree PIP Adjustment Menu Description e PIP Adjustment Menu Functions e PIP Adjustment Sub Menus PIP Adjustment Menu Tree The figure below illustrates the PIP Adjustment Menu tree Figure 4 50 PIP Adjustment Menu Tree All functions and sub menus are discussed in the following sections 148 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation PIP Adjustment Menu PIP Adjustment Menu Description The figure below illustrates a sample PIP Adjustment Menu PIP ADJUSTMENT H Size lt 37 3 gt V Size lt 58 9 gt H Position V Position Move Rate 0 8 Key Frame Effect LINEAR OPERATION JOY Z to SIZE X Y TO POSITION TRACK SIZE Figure 4 51 PIP Adjustment Menu sample The PIP Adjustment Menu provides tools that enable you to adjust the active PIP To access the menu e Press LAYER A or LAYER B in the Layer Control Section then e Press the PIP button in the Layer Function Section PIP Adjustment Menu Functions The following PIP Adjustment Menu functions are provided e H Size adjusts the PIP s horizontal size in pixels The value is the PIP s size as a percentage of the screen s horizontal resolution The numeric value is the PIP s width in
182. e a n ee iade OA JOYSTICK saarena 113 115 O ee TEST COMM 200 2 129 ae E 150 153 161 bs TEST PATTERN o oo cocca 102 105 FORCE ACQUIRE 9095 09 1 ee O en FORCE DOWNLOAD m2 hPa pee oe crew vata us USER PREF ccc ss ie science sere 134 140 GRAB COLOR 158 180 WIDE SCREEN 102 106 HOME MMC 86 INPUT PATCH 200 110 125 INPUT SETUP sees 179 180 Numerics KEY DETECT oooi aaan 113 116 KEYT A cena ey 159 161 169 1 1 Sampling as cesis ied VE rd Ed 95 LCD CAL usse eee 139 1 1 Sizing Menu oo sessi 95 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 277 Index A AC connector 000 0c e eee eee 33 Acrobat usage 2 cee eee eee 17 navigating and searching 17 Activate destinations 222 Adapter information oo ooo 55 Address company occccoccco 3 Adjustable feet oooooooooooooo 33 Adjustment color balance o oooooooooo 210 phase cida 209 Alignment Test Pattern 106 107 204 Alli RI RR RA E 90 DUON xoc d todas 41 42 test pattern 2 2 beeen 105 Lb En 125 Analog preview output 05 75 router name llus 121 router output 0000 121 Application configurator eee eee eee 106 questions siie deine PP Da 30 Aspect ratio menu description
183. e and V Size proportionally Press PIP to return to the PIP Adjustment Menu Refer to the PIP Adjustment Menu Functions section on page 149 for details Press BORDR to display the Border Menu Refer to the Border Menu section on page 151 for details Press EFX to display the Image Effects Menu Refer to the Image Effects Menu section on page 153 for details ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation PIP Adjustment Menu Image Effects Menu From the PIP Adjustment Menu or the Key Menu press EFX to display the Image Effects Menu Monochrome Mode Off Red Green Blue Invert Interval frames Figure 4 54 Image Effects Menu sample The Image Effects Menu enables you to creatively manipulate the selected PIP or Key Note When adjusting PIPs you can also access the Image Effects Menu from the Border Menu or the Shadow Menu by pressing EFX When adjusting Keys you can also access the Image Effects Menu from the Key Adjustment Menu or the Matte Menu by pressing EFX e Monochrome Mode turns chroma on or off When the mode is enabled the image is completely monochrome e Red adjusts the image s red saturation Adjustment range is 0 to 100 e Green adjusts the image s green saturation Adjustment range is O to 100 Blue adjusts the image s blue saturation Adjustment range is O to 100 Note The Red Green and Blue adjustments work
184. e output is designated as an Aux output SP Input selects the physical ScreenPRO II input to which the router s output is patched Mixer Layer this line displays N A as it does not apply to ScreenPRO II Press ADD PATCH to confirm any change that you make on the menu As you dial through the choices the SP Input is mapped to lines will show if the current choice is already in use If the patch already exists and you add it you will be asked to confirm Press DELETE PATCH to delete all Output Patch Table registers for the selected router output This function is an excellent starting point if you are uncertain about specific output patch settings In Chapter 5 refer to the Router Setup section on page 193 for important information about the system s default Output Patch Table 132 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation Miscellaneous Menu Miscellaneous Menu The following topics are discussed in this section e Miscellaneous Menu Tree Miscellaneous Menu Description e Miscellaneous Sub Menus Miscellaneous Menu Tree The figure below illustrates the Miscellaneous Menu Tree LIGHT ADJUST CHANGE CODE BACKUP CHECK CARD RESTORE LCD CAL LCD Calibration Figure 4 35 Miscellaneous Menu Tree All functions and sub menus are discussed in the following sections ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 133 4 Menu Ori
185. ected channel s data bits Stop Bit sets the selected channel s stop bit Parity sets the selected channel s parity e IP displays the IP address of the Lantronix This parameter must be set at the device itself e MAC Addr displays the hard coded MAC address of the Lantronix ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 131 4 Menu Orientation System Menu Output Patch Menu From the Router Specification Menu press OUTPUT PATCH to display the Output Patch Menu OUTPUT PATCH MATRIXPRO1 Router Output Device ID SP Input Mixer Layer SP Input is mapped to MATRIXPRO1 Output 1 Set Device ID to NONE to define the Router Output as an AUX ADD DELETE PATCH PATCH Figure 4 34 Output Patch Menu sample The Output Patch Menu allows you to associate router outputs to ScreenPRO Il inputs When a router is chosen on the Router Specification Menu you then use the Output Patch Menu to associate a specific output with a ScreenPRO II ID and input This process creates a unique Output Patch Table for each defined router The following functions are provided Router Output selects the specific router output that is being patched The selectable range is 1 to the number of outputs defined in the Router Specification Menu e g 1 16 Device ID selects the ScreenPRO II ID to which the Router s output will be connected The selectable range is 1 32 Note If None is selected th
186. ectly under the crosshair These values are immediately mapped into the Red Green and Blue color fields on the menu and can be adjusted with the knobs in the normal manner Press INPUT SETUP to display the DSK Input Setup Menu Refer to the DSK Input Setup Menu section on page 180 for details DSK Input Setup Menu The figure below illustrates a sample DSK Input Setup Menu DSK INPUT SETUP Destination 1 ID 1 DSK Input 1B Type DVI Format 1024 x 768 70 Crop H Offset V Offset APPLY FORCE FORMAT ACQUIRE Figure 4 75 DSK Input Setup Menu sample The following menu functions are provided Destination displays the currently selected destination ID displays the ID of the selected destination s associated ScreenPRO lII DSK Input displays the input connector from which the DSK source is pulled 180 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation DSK Menus e Type selects the desired DSK type When None is selected the DSK circuitry for a selected ScreenPRO lII as chosen with the ID field can be turned off This selection is recommended for example when a DSK is only required on one of three screens in a wide screen configuration and when only a single head graphics card would be required for the active DSK source When DVI is selected a digital graphic from a computer or other DVI source can be used as the DSK Source Refer to the Background Me
187. ed Press HOME gt SYSTEM gt DIAG gt TALLY to initiate the test Using Backup and Restore The ScreenPRO II Controller system enables you to backup and restore the complete system setup including all Presets using a customer supplied flash memory card The following topics are discussed e System Backup e System Restore System Backup This procedure enables you to back up your entire system configuration Please note the following important points e You can only store one system configuration on a Flash Memory Card e Customer supplied Flash Memory Cards must be equal to or greater than 512MB E Use the following steps to back up your system 1 Ensure that you have a customer supplied Flash Memory Card available Insert the Flash Memory Card into the Controller s rear panel Memory Card slot From the Home Menu press MISC to display the Miscellaneous Menu Press BACKUP RESTORE to display the Backup Restore Menu On the Device line select Cirlr SP to perform a complete backup or select a subset as desired m 0wN 6 Onthe Controller Options line select All or select a subset as desired ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 253 6 Operations Using Backup and Restore 254 7 8 Press CHECK CARD to check for the presence of a Flash Memory Card Press BACKUP to perform a backup operation to the Flash Memory Card using the selected device s and options System Restore Please note the f
188. ed routers The following functions are provided e Number select the number of the router that you wish to configure The system supports up to eight definitions e Name this non selectable field shows the router s assigned name After a factory reset router number 1 defaults to MATRIXPRO 1 in Analog format router number 2 defaults to MATRIXPRO2 in SDI format and router number 3 defaults to MATRIXPRO3 in DVI format Note When a router number is undefined the name ROUTER appears and in the Number field the word EMPTY appears before the selected number Manufacturer identifies the router manufacturer Choose between FOLSOM EXTRON SIERRA LEITCH ISIS DVILINK and DPI Refer to the Router Interface Notes section on page 128 for additional details about third party manufacturers Router Type identifies the type of router being used The choices are ANALOG DVI SDI D A ANALOG D A DVI and D A SDI Please note The COMM SETUP function must be set for Analog DVI and SDI routers The D A selections are provided for future implementation e Number of Inputs identifies the number of inputs on the selected router Number of Outputs identifies the number of outputs on the selected router ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 127 4 Menu Orientation System Menu Communication Type sets the device s communication type either RS 232 ETHERNET or
189. eens 71 Setup ee RU ger ERROR LA 192 STATUS a a IW a ULM 87 Status destination oo oooooooooo 118 information 0000 ee eee 147 menu description 147 termination ooo oooooooooo 118 Stilli frame ute a ejes 143 176 background ooo 172 capt re ota as 246 capture from background input 247 capture from layer 247 capture overview o o oo oo 246 name a saved lsusu 249 save in permanent memory 248 Stop Bits ereen a eee as 130 Store presets isis embedding n 244 Strobe effects oo ooooooooooooo 154 Style border 000000 eee eee 151 Sub menus INPUT inire epe He etek d 92 Key ven ep decent Ue hi oe 8 158 QU DUL Lata sessed dd lia 102 PIP adjustment 150 Support technical information 268 S Video sources color balance 99 SWAP ahia ieee Wee Ba eae 228 DURON sori Gries prt bur dd 47 Z order button 20000 ee 46 Z order using 2 eee eee 236 Switch sources 0000ee eee 226 SYMDOIS 4 0 til eret pee EE 18 Sync OUL Aids Betcha ee ce eren 104 Setup dere dd 200 SIGE Sento ica X Ora ee Ad Aor er 91 SYSTEM aia ao aia dd 87 SM o ate and chs 19 back up configuration to flash memory 213 backup to flash memory 253 combinations lesss 22 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide configuration
190. efault IP address is 192 168 0 2 Turn on the ScreenPRO II Controller Press HOME gt SYSTEM gt NETWORK SETUP to display the Network Setup Menu Make a note of the IP address Attempt to ping the ScreenPRO Il Controller as follows a Connect ScreenPRO II Controllers Ethernet port to a Hub or Switch b Connect the Ethernet Hub or Switch to your PC A totally local network is recommended without IP connections to the outside world c Turn on the PC or laptop Open a command prompt window on the PC Click Start gt Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt e On the command prompt line type ping 192 168 0 2 followed by Enter Note Use the unit s actual IP address as determined in step 2 above f If the computer is able to successfully communicate with the ScreenPRO II Controller you will see a series of replies from the target IP address Repeat the upgrade procedure as outlined in the Ethernet Upgrade Method section on page 274 ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 275 C Upgrading Software Ethernet Upgrade Method g Ifyou see a Request timed out message the PC is unable to locate and communicate with the ScreenPRO II Controller If this is the case Check your network connections and settings as described above or Contact your network administrator or e Contact Technical Support In Appendix B refer to the Contact Information
191. enPRO II Controller are destination based Two examples are provided below A Select destinations 1 and 3 then press WIPE Next select destination 2 only and press MIX Finally select all three destinations and press AUTO TRANS to simultaneously perform a wipe on destinations 1 and 3 and a dissolve on destination 2 Note In the above example both the WIPE and MIX buttons would be lit when all three destinations are selected A If destinations 1 2 and 3 are lit and both the WIPE and MIX buttons are lit pressing MIX changes all three destinations to MIX 242 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 6 Operations Working with Presets Working with Presets This section provides detailed instructions for working with Presets The ScreenPRO II Controller s Preset Section enables you to store and recall entire Controller setups Each preset button represents one look of the overall projected image The Controller has 6 Preset buttons and 6 page LEDs providing a total of 36 Presets that you can store and recall 6 pages of 6 Presets each The following topics are discussed e A Word About Resources e Storing Presets Recalling Presets Deleting Presets e Using Next and Previous e Preset Notes A Word About Resources Resources as they apply to Presets are the assigned layers that comprise the Controller s o current look e When you store a Preset you are not only recording the Control
192. endently You have the freedom to size position manipulate and transition each one independently of the other e Join Mode the Split Layer button is on The currently blinking layer button is considered the master Press and hold the Split Layer button then press the other non blinking layer button to join the two layers together Both layer buttons blink and in this mode both are now joined together Any manipulation that you perform to the master layer is also performed to the joined layer Both can be sized positioned moved and manipulated as if they are one To un join the two layers press and hold the Split Layer button then press either Layer button In Chapter 6 refer to the Working with Layers section on page 226 for details Transition Section The figure below illustrates the Transition Section TRANSITIONS CI Je Figure 2 9 Transition Section Descriptions of each button and control are provided below WIPE press to select a wipe as the current transition type for the selected destination The button lights when enabled and the wipe is initiated by pressing AUTO TRANS The wipe patterns edge types and transition rates are selected using the Effects Menu MIX press to select a mix dissolve as the current transition type for the selected destination The button lights when enabled and the mix is initiated by pressing AUTO TRANS Auto transition rates are defined using the
193. entation Miscellaneous Menu Miscellaneous Menu Description The Miscellaneous Menu accesses ScreenPRO II Controller functions that do not fall into other distinct menu categories Cc o N S L L o c K MISCELLANEOUS MENU LIGHT LCD BACKUP ADJUST SETTINGS RESTORE Figure 4 36 Miscellaneous Menu To access the menu Press MISC on the Home Menu The following miscellaneous functions are provided Press CONSL to access the Console Port Setup Menu Refer to the Console Port Setup Menu section on page 135 for details Press LOCK to access the Lockout Code Menu Refer to the Lockout Code Menu section on page 136 for details Press EDID to access the EDID DVI Input Format Menu Refer to the EDID DVI Input Format Menu section on page 137 for details Press LIGHT ADJUST to access the Keypad Backlight Menu Refer to the Keypad Backlight Menu section on page 138 for details Press LCD SETTINGS to access the LCD Settings Menu Refer to the LCD Settings Menu section on page 139 for details Press USER PREF to access the User Preference Menu Refer to the User Preference Menu section on page 140 for details Press BACKUP RESTORE to access the Backup Restore Menu Refer to the Backup Restore Menu section on page 141 for details 134 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation Miscellaneous Menu Miscellaneous Sub Menus The following sub menus
194. ents affect only the monitors projectors connected to BlendPRO ll program outputs Note Individual settings are maintained for each selection in the Output Monitor list e Sync Out sets the sync value Select H V H V H V H V or CSync e SOG selects a specific sync on green signal Choose between Off Standard or Tri Level for certain HD devices Gamma sets the output gamma for the selected destination e Raster Box Size sets the size of the raster box that appears around PIPs and Keys Range in pixels O to 8 104 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation Output Menu Test Pattern Menu From the Output Menu press TEST PATTERN to display the Test Pattern Menu TEST PATTERN Output Monitor Mode Type Raster Box Alignment Test Pattern Figure 4 14 Test Pattern Menu sample The Test Pattern Menu enables you to display a variety of test patterns for system and projector alignment for the destination selected on the Output Menu Output Monitor selects the monitor s and projector s that are affected by the test pattern settings Choose between All adjustments affect all program and preview monitors projectors Preview adjustments affect preview monitors only SPII Program adjustments affect only the monitors projectors connected to ScreenPRO II program outputs With this selection test patterns will be data double
195. er User s Guide 59 3 Hardware Installation Connection Charts Widescreen Sample DVI Connection Chart Each ScreenPRO II has two DVI inputs for the Background and DSK BG DSK in A and BG DSK in B Widescreen backgrounds will typically originate from a multi head graphics card while single screen backgrounds are typically distributed from one computer through a DA or signal splitter Use the following chart to map your Background and DSK DVI connections Table 3 4 Sample DVI Connection Chart Background DVI Routing Multi Head Source Graphics Card Computer 1 DA or Splitter Connects to ScreenPRO Ill 41 BG DSK In A Widescreen BG ScreenPRO Il 2 BG DSK In A Widescreen BG Computer 2 ScreenPRO II 1 BG DSK In B Single screen DSK ScreenPRO Il 2 BG DSK In B Single screen DSK Widescreen Sample Standard Destination Chart The ScreenPRO Ill Controller enables you to configure up to four standard destinations Use the following chart to map the distribution of each destination the usage of BlendPRO II if required and the routing of your additional program and preview outputs Table 3 5 Sample Standard Destination Connection Chart Standard Destinations Output ScreenPRO II 1 Pgm DVI Screen Widescreen left BlendPRO II Channel ScreenPRO II 1 Pgm Analog 1 VGA 1 ScreenPRO II 1 Pgm Analog 2 ScreenPRO ll 1 Pvw ScreenPR
196. erview of Edge Blending Technology section on page 79 ScreenPRO ll Genlock Termination On the rear of each ScreenPRO II chassis one recessed Termination Switch is provided for genlock termination adjacent to the Genlock Loop connector e Terminated when the switch is pushed in the connection is terminated 75 Ohms e Un terminated when the switch is out the connection is un terminated If a particular ScreenPRO II chassis is the last device in a reference video chain ensure that the Termination Switch is pushed in If a particular ScreenPRO Il chassis is in the middle of a reference chain ensure that the Termination Switch is out ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 3 Hardware Installation BlendPRO II Widescreen Lock Connections BlendPRO II Widescreen Lock Connections The figure below illustrates the required Widescreen Lock and Genlock connections for any ScreenPRO II Controller system that uses BlendPRO ll Use this figure for reference during the signal installation process If required refer to the BlendPRO II User s Guide and the ScreenPRO Il User s Guide for details on specific rear panel connectors GENLOCK WIDESCREEN LOCK IN OUT IN LOOP Termination e q BlendPRO II GENLOCK ja ScreenPRO II ID 1 Widescreen Genlock In Lock Optional Un terminated Un terminated
197. es back and forth with each transition Once a source transitions off Program within a PIP it flip flops to Preview Toggle is used with both the Toggle Mix Source and Swap modes and also functions with background transitions In Chapter 6 refer to the Understanding Split and Mix Modes section on page 228 for details Freeze enables you to freeze a layer on both Program and Preview In Chapter 6 refer to the Using Freeze section on page 236 for instructions BIB IE ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 47 2 Hardware Orientation Front Panel Sections Layer Control Section The figure below illustrates the Layer Control Section Program Sees Figure 2 8 Layer Control Section The buttons in the Layer Control Section enable you to select on Preview the sources that will transition to or from Program including backgrounds layers the DSK and the full screen LOGO When you select a blue layer button you are electronically selecting a scaler that you want to assign as a PIP or key or modify in some manner In this way you control the overall look on Preview before you transition that look to Program Please note the following important points e Two background sources two layers in the mixer one DSK and one full screen LOGO are provided identical to the layers on an individual ScreenPRO lII e The buttons are arranged left to right in order of visual priority from
198. es of the PIP or Key The legend on the top line reads ALL SIDES The following functions are provided e H Size adjusts the PIP or Key s horizontal size The 96 indicates size as a percentage of the screen s horizontal resolution The value is the width in pixels e V Size adjusts the PIP or Key s vertical size The 96 indicates size as a percentage of the screen s vertical resolution The value is the height in pixels e Mode in the Aspect Ratio section this function selects one of several standard aspect ratios 16 9 5 4 4 3 3 2 and 1 1 Ratio displays the corresponding ratio based on the selected Mode 1 777 1 25 1 333 1 500 1 000 and enables you to select custom aspect ratios e Enable the TRACK SIZE check box to proportionally crop H Size and V Size Disable the function for individual parameter adjustments Note To remove any crop effects from the PIP or Key press the RESET button in the Joystick Section while the Crop Menu is active No other parameters will be affected 164 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation Source Adjustment Menus Source Adjustment Menus The following topics are discussed in this section e Source Adjustment Menu Trees e Source Adjustment Menu Description e Source Adjustment Menu Functions ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 165 4 Menu Orientation Source Adjustment Menus Source Adjustment Menu Trees
199. escreen configurations only It enables you to make an exact copy of a layer onto the opposite screen All parameters of the PIP or Key are cloned including the shadow key effects border and size Once cloned you can select between a mirror or an offset clone B Use the following steps to clone a layer 1 Ensure that a PIP or Key is selected in the Layer Control Section and active for modification in Preview 2 Ensure that the PIP or Key is positioned fully within the boundaries of an outside destination s screen If the PIP or Key straddles the widescreen overlap region the mode cannot be enabled 3 Press Clone to display the Clone Setup Menu ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 235 6 Operations Working with Layer Functions Swap Z order Select the desired clone type Mirror or Offset If Offset is selected adjust the offset in pixels as desired If desired clone the other layer by repeating the procedure from step 1 Press CUT or AUTO TRANS io transition the effect to Program NO oOo gt Note You can set up and perform a Move in conjunction with a cloned image Using Swap Z Order E Use the following steps to swap the Z Order priority of two layers within the same mixer The function works with two Keys two PIPs or one of each 1 Ensure that you have two layers visible on Preview with one layer visually overlapping the other 2 Inthe Layer Functions Section
200. ess DEST SETUP to display the Destination Setup Menu On the Destination line select the Aux destination that you want to define either Aux 1 Aux 2 Aux 3 or Aux 4 Scroll to the Type line and select ImagePRO Aux or PrePRO II Aux Press AUX SETUP to display the Aux Setup Menu ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 5 System Setup AUX Destination Setup 7 Onthe Source Mapping line two choices are available Select Input Patch if you want to map Aux sources according to how inputs are patched to buttons on the Source Selection bus Note that this is the typical choice Select Direct Map if you want the Source Selection bus to be a 1 1 mapping of your router inputs for this Aux destination only 8 On the ID line select the ID of the ImagePRO or PrePRO II to which you want to route Aux sources 9 Inthe Analog section a Onthe Analog Router Name line select the router from which analog sources will be routed to the ImagePRO or PrePRO II b Onthe Analog Router Output line select the specific router output that you designated as an Aux output c On the ImagePRO Input or PrePRO II Input line select the ImagePRO or PrePRO II input to which the analog router output is connected 10 In the SDI section a Onthe SDI Router Name line select the router from which SDI sources will be routed to the ImagePRO or PrePRO II b Onthe SDI Router Output line select the specific router output that you
201. for details Press SHDOW to display the Shadow Menu Refer to the Shadow Menu section on page 152 for details Press EFX to display the Image Effects Menu Refer to the Image Effects Menu section on page 153 for details At the bottom of the PIP Adjustment Menu the TRACK SIZE check box has the following functions Check the TRACK SIZE check box to lock H Size and V Size together Regardless of the PIP s current aspect ratio its size will adjust proportionally when the Joystick s Z Axis knob or the ADJ rotary knob is used to change size Uncheck the TRACK SIZE check box to adjust H Size or V Size individually without affecting the other parameter In this way you can stretch the PIP horizontally or vertically Press Source in the Joystick Section to display the Input Source Adjustment Menu Refer to the Source Adjustment Menus section on page 165 Please note the following related functions To return the PIP to its default size and aspect ratio press the Reset button in the Joystick Section To adjust the PIP with fine resolution press the Fine Adjust button in the Joystick Section PIP Adjustment Sub Menus The following sub menus can be accessed from the PIP Adjustment Menu Border Menu Shadow Menu Image Effects Menu Complete descriptions are provided in the following sections 150 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation PIP Adjustment Menu Bor
202. g with Keys 232 mode working with PIPS 229 SQUICO 3 2 As esate ee t 228 source button 000 cee ee 47 ansio irc A 241 MIXER 2 19 Mode aspect ratio oooooooooooooo 94 border o ici 151 GOD su uem ES Re EA NIS eee EROR 164 feathering oooooococcccoco o 107 monochrome ccoo 153 shadow cocido ii 152 tally iia etes 109 Modify layers on program 109 234 Monitor layout 0 0 eee eee eee 217 Monochrome mode 153 Move DURON eu IT bL vote te eae 47 NOLES iio cre eder 240 pend on preview sess 239 pend on program 240 pending and triggering 239 program move on preview 238 program move on program 239 setup button 00000 47 USING ir LAE E 238 Move Rate MO aa dae wate aca eu er ace hoes 160 O acme 149 source adjustment 168 286 Multi head graphics boards 80 N Name router oum ld Diei ico eius 127 saved frame grab 0 145 saved still frame 249 Network DAGP x tro ia ab eg ue 124 setup menu description 124 New Name frame grab 145 Next preset 0 cece eee eee eee 40 None DSK uera edie Gee atin 181 Notes MOVE PII thy a date pce ee cet od 240 presets oe OS de abd 245 router interface o oooo ooo 128 Notice ina i
203. ground sources have been configured for all destinations press HOME to return to the Home Menu 10 Press SAVE to save the new system configuration in memory Input Setup ScreenPRO II Controller system setup Step 16 A Prerequisites Ensure that you are familiar with the Input Menu In Chapter 4 refer to the Input Menu section on page 88 In these procedures you will set up the system s inputs and adjust phase and color balance for wide screen configurations only The following procedures are provided e Standard Input Setup e Widescreen Phase and Color Balance Setup Standard Input Setup B Use the following steps to set up inputs This procedure applies to both single screen and widescreen destinations 1 Onthe Destination Bus select the destination whose inputs you want to configure On the ScreenPRO II Controller console select a layer LAYER A or LAYER B Press HOME to display the Home Menu Press INPUT to display the Input Menu On the Source Selection Bus select the first source that you want to set up Press FORCE ACQUIRE to perform the optimum image setup NO apo N Perform additional setups on the Input Menu f required a f you need to manually set the resolution scroll to the Format line and select the desired format Press APPLY FORMAT to accept Scroll to the Sampling Mode line and set the sampling mode Scroll to the Contrast line and set the input s contrast
204. gy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause harmful interference in which case the user will be responsible for correcting any interference Guarantee and Compensation Barco provides a guarantee relating to perfect manufacturing as part of the legally stipulated terms of guarantee On receipt the purchaser must immediately inspect all delivered goods for damage incurred during transport as well as for material and manufacturing faults Barco must be informed immediately in writing of any complaints The period of guarantee begins on the date of transfer of risks in the case of special systems and software on the date of commissioning at latest 30 days after the transfer of risks In the event of justified notice of compliant Barco can repair the fault or provide a replacement at its own discretion within an appropriate period If this measure proves to be impossible or unsuccessful the purchaser can demand a reduction in the purchase price or cancellation of the contract All other claims in particular those relating to compensation for direct or indirect damage and also damage attributed to the operation of software as well as to other services provided by Barco being a component of the system or independent service will be deemed invalid provided the damage is not proven to be attributed to the
205. h Split and Mix modes The following Key Menu functions are provided when Luma key is selected e invert Mode enables you to invert the key signal Clip adjusts the threshold of the video that electronically cuts into the background image A hole will be cut into the background anywhere that foreground luminance is greater than the clip level The hole is then filled with the Fill Source Adjustment range is 0 to 1023 Gain adjusts the sensitivity of the keyer enabling you to change the sharpness of the keyed image Gain only affects the key hole as set by the clip Adjustment range is 0 to 1023 99 e Opacity enables you to adjust the opacity of the keyed image from fully opaque to fully transparent Adjustment range is 0 to 1024 e Fill Source determines the video that fills the key hole Self fills the hole with the key source video itself for example the video from a character generator or logo Matte fills the hole with a color which can then be adjusted with the Matte Menu e Press STATS to display the Status Menu Refer to the Status Menu section on page 147 for details e Press EFX to display the Image Effects Menu Refer to the Image Effects Menu section on page 153 for details e Press MATTE to display the Matte Menu Refer to the Matte Menu section on page 159 for details e Press SIZE amp POS to display the Key Adjustment Menu Refer to the Key Ad
206. hat register A To store a Controller setup in Preset register 2 press Learn 2 Delete hold down Delete then press the desired Preset button to delete that register from memory A To delete Preset 5 from memory press Delete 5 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 39 40 2 Hardware Orientation Front Panel Sections Next press to recall the next valid Preset in sequential order Please note If Preset 2 is lit pressing Next recalls Preset 3 If Preset 6 is active on page 2 pressing Next advances to Preset 1 on page 3 If a Preset is undefined it will be skipped when Next is pressed Page hold down Page then press the desired Preset button to switch to that page of Presets The Red LED above the button lights to indicate the selected page Note The Page button is also used in conjunction with the ALL button to lock and unlock the Controller In Chapter 6 refer to the Locking and Unlocking the Controller section on page 252 for details In Chapter 6 refer to the Working with Presets section on page 243 for complete Each numbered button on the Destination Bus represents a ocation to which you can route some form of controller or router output The transitions that you perform will affect the selected destinations only leaving the unselected destinations as they were The ScreenPRO II Controller provides eight destinations four standard e g projectors and NS
207. he DSK Downstream Key To access the menu e Press DSK in the Layer Control Section The available DSK Adjustment Menu functions change depending upon the selected Key Type e When Luma is selected you can perform a luminance DSK Refer to the DSK Luma Key Functions section on page 178 for details e When Color is selected you can perform a color DSK Refer to the DSK Color Key Functions section on page 179 for details DSK Luma Key Functions A Luma luminance key is one in which the hole cutting information is derived from the luminance brightness level of the key source The figure below illustrates a sample DSK Adjustment Menu when Luma key is selected DSK ADJUSTMENT Key Type Luma Destination ID Invert Mode Clip Gain Opacity Fill Source Figure 4 73 DSK Adjustment Menu Luma sample The following DSK Adjustment Menu functions are provided when Luma is selected as the DSK type e Destination displays the currently selected destination e D displays the ID of the selected destination s associated ScreenPRO II e Invert Mode enables you to invert the DSK signal e Clip adjusts the threshold of the video that electronically cuts into the background image A hole will be cut into the background anywhere that foreground luminance is greater than the clip level The hole is then filled with the Fill Source Adjustment range is 0 to 1023 Gain adjusts
208. i 83 Menu Odeon a 85 In This Ghaptetz ssvidoesce den ec teer id ira Shed R 85 Global Rules sci e ecb p mene ela e ue A eR Per Rr dH 86 Home Men x xix react e P noeud og sod RO ERU 87 Input Menu i5 a e E EE ES 88 Input Menu Tree csi ce ex osa eR Ra ed 88 Input Menu Description sisse 89 Input Menu Functions 0 0 cee I 90 Input Sub Menus 1 0 2 0 en 92 Input Configuration Menu sse 93 Aspect Ratio Menu 0 eee eee 94 Sizing MENU eet seai 3a iore aed tease aide 95 Color Balance Menu 020 esee eres 98 Output Menciona ae 100 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide Table of Contents Output Menu Tree 1 0 ete eee 100 Output Menu Description 101 Output Menu Functions 2 00 00 e eee eee ees 102 Output Sub Menus 0 00 cece eee 102 Genlock Menu 1 0 0 0 cece eee 103 Settings Meru isss na e a E E tees 104 Test Pattern Menu llli 20 cee eee 105 Wide Screen Settings Menu 000 eee eee 106 System Men i in eed wed edd ii 108 System Menu Tree nannaa nananana eee tenes 108 System Menu Description 0 000 cece ee eee 109 System Sub Menus 00000 e eee eee eee 110 System Reset Menu 00 eee eee eee ee 111 Software Version Menu 0 00 cece eee eee 112 Diagnostics Setup Menu 2 0 000 e eee eee 113 Destination Setup Menu 0 0000 eee eee eee 117
209. ic menu navigation procedures Chapter 5 System Setup on page 183 outlines procedures for setting up and configuring the ScreenPRO II Controller Chapter 6 Operations on page 215 provides system operating instructions Appendix A Specifications on page 255 lists the ScreenPRO II Controller s input output video mechanical and power specifications and includes connector pinouts Appendix B Contact Information on page 267 lists important RMA warranty contact and technical support details Appendix C Upgrading Software on page 269 provides a detailed procedure for upgrading ScreenPRO II Controller software ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 1 Introduction How to Use This Guide How to Use This Guide Following are important tips for streamlining your use of this User s Guide in its electronic PDF form Navigating Use Acrobat Reader s bookmarks to navigate to the desired location All chapter files have the same bookmark structure for instant navigation to any section Please note Extensive hyperlinks are provided within the chapters e Use Acrobat s Go to Previous View and Return to Next View buttons to trace your complete navigational path e Use the Previous Page and Next Page buttons to go to the previous or next page within a file Use Acrobat s extensive search capabilities such as the Find tool and Search Index tool
210. ideo inputs run the output at the same rate in order to reduce jutter artifacts After selecting a format press APPLY FORMAT to accept the selection In Appendix A refer to the ScreenPRO Il Input and Output Resolutions section on page 263 for details on all available resolutions Color Space displays the output color space per the specifics of the selected output resolution and frame rate Press GLCK to display the Genlock Menu Refer to the Genlock Menu section on page 103 for details Press APPLY FORMAT to accept a selected output format In Appendix A refer to the ScreenPRO Il Input and Output Resolutions section on page 263 for details on all available resolutions Press SETTINGS to display the Settings Menu Refer to the Settings Menu section on page 104 for details Press TEST PATTERN to display the Test Pattern Menu Refer to the Test Pattern Menu section on page 105 for details Press WIDE SCREEN to display the Wide Screen Menu Refer to the Wide Screen Settings Menu section on page 106 for details Note This softkey only appears when a wide screen destination is selected Output Sub Menus The following sub menus can be accessed from the Output Menu Genlock Menu Settings Menu Test Pattern Menu Wide Screen Settings Menu 102 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation Output Menu Genlock Menu From the Output Menu press GLCK
211. ientation System Menu e Source Mapping two selections are available Input Patch maps Aux sources according to how your inputs are patched to buttons in the console s Source Selection bus Direct Map maps the Source Selection bus as a 1 1 map of your router inputs for this destination only e Router Name selects the router from which the Aux sources will be output Router Output selects the specific router output designated as an Aux as assigned on the router s Output Patch Menu e Press RESET to return all fields to lt UNDEFINED gt A For ImagePRO Aux and PrePRO II Aux destinations press AUX SETUP to display the Aux Setup Menu AUX SETUP AUX_2 Source Mapping Input Patch ImagePRO ID ANALOG Router Name ANALOG Router Output ImagePRO Input SDI Router Name SDI Router Output Figure 4 27 Aux Setup Menu ImagePRO Aux Destination sample The following functions are provided e Top Line displays the selected Aux destination number e Source Mapping two selections are available Input Patch maps Aux sources according to how your inputs are patched to buttons in the console s Source Selection section Direct Map maps Aux sources according to how your inputs are connected to the router magePRO ID or PrePRO II ID selects the ID of the ImagePRO or PrePRO ll to which you want to route Aux sources e nthe Analog section Analog Router Nam
212. igital Cinema format Plasma display resolutions 256 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide A Specifications ScreenPRO II Output Specifications ScreenPRO II Output Specifications The table below lists output specifications for individual ScreenPRO Il units Table A 2 ScreenPRO Il Output Specifications Parameter Specification Analog Outputs RGBHV RGBS RGsB non interlaced only on 15 pin HD connectors Preview and two Program monitor projector outputs Digital Outputs Digital DVI per DDWG 1 0 on DVI I connector Program output Output Resolutions Computer resolutions VGA 640 x 480 through UXGA 1600 x 1200 HDTV resolutions progressive up to 1920 x 1080 1080p 2048 x 1080p Digital Cinema format Plasma display resolutions User Control The table below lists ScreenPRO II Controller user control specifications Table A 3 ScreenPRO Il Controller User Control Specifications Parameter Specification LCD Touchscreen 3 8 320 x 240 pixel resolution Soft keys 8 Rotary Encoders 2 LED Pushbuttons 58 color coded ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 257 A Specifications Widescreen Functions Widescreen Functions The table below lists ScreenPRO Il Controller widescreen functions Table A 4 ScreenPRO II Controller Widescreen Functions Parameter Specification Maximum widescreen width 4 screens Maximum widescreen destinations 1
213. igital input and output connections The chart can also be used to specify digital router outputs that connect to Aux destinations Refer to the External Routing Sample Digital Router I O Chart section on page 59 for a sample chart Table 3 13 Digital Router I O Chart Router 2 Digital Router Source Name Controller Input lt Input Output Connects to _ 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 an o ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 67 3 Hardware Installation Connection Charts Internal Routing Analog Input Chart If you are using internal routing complete the following Analog Input Chart to map your analog input connections either direct or via DA The chart can also be used to specify other analog destinations such as Aux device inputs Please copy the chart as required for additional inputs Refer to the Internal Routing Sample Analog Input Chart section on page 63 for a sample chart Table 3 14 Analog Input Chart Direct or DA Connections Analog Inputs o gt Source Name Direct DA Output Target Input c p 68 ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 3 Hardware Installation Connection Charts Internal Routing Digital Input Chart If you are using internal routing complete the following Digital Input Chart to map your digital input connect
214. ihren aie alae aes 250 Dual destination dual Aux system 2 005 26 plus widescreen system 25 System ei ee RLW 23 DVI background eee eee eee 172 background menu functions 175 connection blank chart 70 DSK hh eni e a n RA dose eps 181 router name scenes 123 router output 0000 123 DVILink 18x18 Router Support 128 E Edge butted iay ces be Sie ee es 107 feathering cece eee eee 82 width transition 0 146 Edge blending technology 79 content creation o oo o 79 high definition image 79 introduction s sesanan aenn o 79 multi head graphics boards 80 video processing lusus 81 EDID DVI input format menu description 137 formatie as a dd aur ate eos 137 programming s sese 190 EDS200 device server Lantronix 74 Effect key frame luuuu 146 EFFEGIS ecu uera uet eai ep hoe corn 87 Effects combinations sees 27 lile cud LoT eee eo IR oe En 153 In Verb cos e RP RS ERA 153 menu description 146 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide Index monochrome mode 153 SIIODG a abia dates gc ERR 154 strobe interval 0 4 154 Electrical specifications 258 Equipment list installation
215. ing 2 Perform a CUT or AUTO TRANS The transition takes the Preview layer s to Program 3 To pend the move press Move in the Layer Functions Section The button lights to indicate the pending move and on Preview the raster box blinks at the destination location not the PIP or Key s current location Perform a CUT or AUTO TRANS The move begins when the button is pressed To move the layer back to keyframe 1 press Move The button lights and on Preview the raster box blinks at the starting location 6 Perform a CUT or AUTO TRANS In this ping pong manner you can continue to transit back and forth between keyframes 1 and 2 Move Noles Please note the following important points regarding the Move mode e Clearing moves To clear a move and remove the association between a layer and a move press Move Setup twice e On screen off screen The ScreenPRO II Controller enables you to move a PIP or Key from an off screen location to an on screen location and vice versa Remember that Move behaves differently depending on the selected mode e In Split mode two PIPs or Keys can be programmed and triggered independently or simultaneously You can pend LAYER A LAYER B or both and then transition as desired n Mix Source mode both PIPs or keys are perfectly co located on screen The move you program applies to both layers After a move is programmed the Move Setup button lights when either layer
216. int forward each time you press that source button and assign it to a PIP ora Key the stored file is recalled and the image appears on Preview typically after a brief delay The delay occurs as each input is instantly re scaled per the file s instructions and the scaler is instantly re programmed with the file s data With regards to router connections an input file is independent of the physical connector Even though only certain sources can be connected to specific connectors e g Analog or SDI once a connector is selected on the Input Menu and an input file is created for the source that file can be recalled on any of the same type of connectors in the system provided that a router is properly connected and assigned This in no way forces all of the other connectors to only accept that particular kind of source signal ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 221 6 Operations Working with Destinations Working with Destinations Destinations can be configured as single screens multiple screens in wide screen applications auxiliary router outputs ImagePRO Aux destinations and PresentationPRO I Aux destinations When single and wide screen Projector destinations are activated Program output is routed to the selected projectors e When Aux destinations are activated selected inputs sources can be routed to the selected router outputs or to external devices such as ImagePRO and PresentationPRO ll For
217. ion type when the WIPE button is selected Choose between Wipe Right Wipe Left Wipe Down Wipe Up Curtain Open Curtain Close Box In and Box Out Note Wide screen destinations only support Mix transitions Key frame effects are ignored by ScreenPRO II destinations e Transition Edge Width When WIPE is selected this field enables you to set the transition s edge type The range in pixels is from 0 to 256 In Chapter 6 refer to the Working with Transitions section on page 241 for instructions 146 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation Status Menu Status Menu The Status Menu provides basic status information SP Il Controller Ver 1 0 SCREENPRO II 4 PREPRO II 0 IMAGEPRO 2 ROUTERS 2 BLENDPRO Il 1 Figure 4 49 Status Menu sample To access the Status Menu Press STATUS on the Home Menu The following status information is provided e ScreenPRO Il Controller top line displays the Controller s software version e SCREENPRO II lists the number of ScreenPRO II units detected e PREPRO II lists the number of PresentationPRO ll units detected e I MAGEPRO lists the number of ImagePRO units detected e ROUTERS lists the number of Routers detected BLENDPRO II lists the number of BlendPRO II units detected Note If certain error conditions exist the Status Menu displays additional messages such as Checksum Mismatch and Pleas
218. ions either direct or via DA The chart can also be used to specify other digital destinations such as Aux device inputs Please copy the chart as required for additional inputs Refer to the Internal Routing Sample Digital Input Chart section on page 63 for a sample chart Table 3 15 Digital Input Chart Direct or DA Connections Digital Inputs og gt Source Name Direct DA Output ScreenPRO II Input c p ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 69 3 Hardware Installation Connection Charts DVI Connection Chart Each ScreenPRO II has two DVI inputs for the Background and DSK BG DSK in A and BG DSK in B Widescreen backgrounds will typically originate from a multi head graphics card while single screen backgrounds are typically distributed from one computer through a DA or signal splitter Use the following chart to map your Background and DSK DVI connections Refer to the Widescreen Sample DVI Connection Chart section on page 60 for a sample chart Table 3 16 Sample DVI Connection Chart Background DVI Routing Multi Head DA Source Graphics Card or Splitter Connects to Computer 1 Computer 2 Computer 3 Computer 4 70 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 3 Hardware Installation Connection Charts Standard Destination Chart The ScreenPRO II Controller en
219. itor Analog DA 2 Out 1 ImagePRO Analog DA 2 Out 2 Record VTR Digital Betacam Analog DA 2 Out 2 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 65 3 Hardware Installation Connection Charts Blank Connection Charts The following blank connection charts are provided External Routing Analog Router I O Chart External Routing Digital Router I O Chart nternal Routing Analog Input Chart e Internal Routing Digital Input Chart e DVI Connection Chart e Standard Destination Chart Auxiliary Destination Chart External Routing Analog Router 1 0 Chart If you are using external routing complete the following Analog Router I O Chart to map your analog input and output connections The chart can also be used to specify analog router outputs that connect to Aux destinations Refer to the External Routing Sample Analog Router I O Chart section on page 59 for a sample chart Table 3 12 Analog Router I O Chart Router 1 Analog Router Source Name Controller Input lt Input Output gt Connects to 4 6 8 l kl 10 E Er N ax A 16 66 ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 3 Hardware Installation Connection Charts External Routing Digital Router 1 0 Chart If you are using external routing complete the following Digital Router I O Chart to map your d
220. ity layer The LOGO source is selected from one of the individual ScreenPRO II s three internal frame stores The LOGO layer is often used as a black preview function If Black is selected as the type on the Logo Input Setup Menu you can fade to black at any time by selecting LOGO on preview In Chapter 4 refer to the LOGO Menu section on page 182 for details e Thelogo is not a live input and does not have an associated key signal Important All layers are maintained underneath the LOGO For example if you have two PIPs and a DSK on Program when you transition to the LOGO when you fade the LOGO off the previous look is still there Clear Layer press Clear Layer to remove the currently selected blinking layer from Preview in preparation for transitioning it off Program In Chapter 6 refer to the Clearing Layers from Program section on page 234 for instructions ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 49 2 Hardware Orientation Front Panel Sections XA Split press to select whether or not the mixer s two layers work independently in Split Mode in tandem Mix Mode or in Join mode e Mix Mode the Split Layer button is off In this mode the two layers are ganged together offering a variety of additional transitions including the toggle mix source and swap functions e Split Mode the Split Layer button is on In this mode each layer works indep
221. justment V Position 168 adjustment V size 168 button oi EREEIE s 43 44 connections 00e eee eee 74 fine adjust 0 00 eee 169 QENIOCK Siia pae eet Ree the Peg ees 103 mapping ssesnn n BR 121 MIE y erpai mata eala e E E a 228 number s add ER id 125 1 PT 169 route destinations 223 routing examples 224 selection bus lesus 35 selection bus description 44 setup background 205 switching 0000 eee eee eee 226 SP INPUT 132 Io add 3 uere rete res 118 toremove lessen 118 to restore backup restore 141 Specifications o ooooooooo 255 communications 259 electrical usa Eb rd eeu ent 258 INPUT i is er E DE ERE CR RUSO 256 input and output resolutions 263 mechanical lesus 259 QU PUE pe 257 290 physical 2 24 n edd airada lt 258 PINQUIS e roce faceted ERES 260 user control c xe n SUA 257 widescreen functions 258 SPII Program output monitor Less 104 test pattern ooooooomoo cm 105 Split DUON evacrisa arras 50 mode aii iy Gd wee 50 mode operations 228 mode understanding 228 mode working with Keys 231 mode working with PIPS 229 Standard destination blank chart sisii aare a A
222. justment Menu section on page 160 for details Color Key Functions A Color key is one in which the hole cutting information is derived from a specific RGB value including luminance Note Color keys can be selected on both the Layer A and Layer B keyers in both Split and Mix modes The following Key Menu functions are provided when Color key is selected e Red Color adjusts the red component of the selected key color from 0 to 1024 Green Color adjusts the green component of the key color from 0 to 1024 e Blue Color adjusts the blue component of the key color from O to 1024 e Red Threshold adjusts the key s clip along the Cyan vector as demonstrated using a CIE color chip chart ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 157 4 Menu Orientation Key Menu Green Threshold adjusts the key s clip along the Magenta vector Blue Threshold adjusts the key s clip along the Yellow vector Red Mask adjusts the background mask to from black along the Cyan vector Green Mask adjusts background mask to from black along the Magenta vector Blue Mask adjusts background mask to from black along the Yellow vector Opacity adjusts the opacity of the keyed image from fully opaque to fully transparent Adjustment range is 0 to 1024 Press STATS to display the Status Menu Refer to the Status Menu section on page 147 for details Press EFX to display the Image Effects Me
223. l Upgrade Method 0 cece ee 272 Ethernet Upgrade Method 0 0 cee eee eee 274 Troubleshooting Ethernet Communication 275 A AN APATENANS EET PEA A SE 277 ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 13 Table of Contents 14 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide BARCO Visibly yours 1 Introduction This chapter is designed to introduce you to the ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide Areas to be covered are e Chapter Structure e How to Use This Guide e Conventions Terms and Definitions e System Overview Application Questions Note Once you have reviewed all of the sections in this chapter please continue with Chapter 2 Hardware Orientation on page 31 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 15 1 Introduction Chapter Structure Chapter Structure The following chapters provide instructions for all aspects of ScreenPRO II Controller operations 16 Chapter 1 Introduction provides a system overview a list of features and discusses easy ways to use this guide Chapter 2 Hardware Orientation on page 31 explains the ScreenPRO II Controller s front and rear panels in detail Chapter 3 Hardware Installation on page 53 provides comprehensive system installation instructions Chapter 4 Menu Orientation on page 85 explains the system s configuration setup and adjustment menus and provides bas
224. le Controller Lockout feature allows operators to lock the Controller thus disabling all button presses The lockout code is user programmable The Controller s Flash Memory Card Slot enables users to backup and restore system configuration parameters The Flash Memory card itself is customer supplied The Join feature allows both layers to be locked together proportionally Manipulations to one layer are automatically performed on the other layer including size position moves PIPs and Keys 20 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 1 Introduction System Overview e Router control Support for internal routers within individual ScreenPRO II units Support for external analog and digital routers such as MatrixPRO and other third party router manufacturers e Enhanced transition capability Automatic transitions via dedicated AUTO TRANS button Manual transitions via T Bar Preset control Control of up to 36 user presets in a dedicated Preset section six pages of six preset each NEXT and PREV Previous buttons for convenient preset recall A Word About Layers Just like the individual ScreenPRO Il units the ScreenPRO II Controller is a five layer System as illustrated below Background
225. lect the output that you want to patch If you are uncertain about the current patch or if you want to remove the current existing patch and start clean press DELETE PATCH On the Device ID line select the ScreenPRO Il ID to which you want to patch the selected router output On the SP Input line select the specific ScreenPRO Il input to which you want to patch the selected router output Press ADD PATCH to confirm your changes The new mapping appears on the menu Repeat step 17 to patch additional outputs 18 To designate a router output as an Aux output a c d e On the Router Output line select the specific router output that you want to designate as an Aux output If you are uncertain about the current patch or if you want to remove the current existing patch and start clean press DELETE PATCH On the Device ID line select None Press ADD PATCH to confirm the change Repeat step 18 to designate additional Aux outputs 19 Press BACK to return to the Router Specification Menu 194 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 5 System Setup AUX Destination Setup 20 Repeat from step 6 for the next router that you wish to assign 21 When you have configured all of your system s routers on the Router Specification Menu scroll to the Number line and scan through the remaining router numbers Other than the ones which you just assigned if there are any router numbers that do n
226. lection Bus to enter the code Ifthe correct code has been entered the message Unlocking Coniroller appears on the display and the Controller is ready for use Ifthe incorrect code has been entered the Controller remains locked Important If you have selected a Custom lockout code but you have forgotten the code a Master Code is available Refer to the ScreenPRO Il Controller system s most current Whatsnew ScreenPRO Il Controller txt document for details This document is bundled with every software download Note that the Master Code changes with each software version 252 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 6 Operations Working with Tallies Working with Tallies The Tally function can be enabled or disabled as required E Use the following steps to enable or disable tallies 1 Ensure that your tallies are properly set up In Chapter 5 refer to the Input Patching section on page 198 for instructions Press HOME gt SYSTEM to display the System Menu On the Tally Mode line Select On to enable all assigned tally relay closures Select Off to disable all assigned tally relay closures Please note e Remember that tallies are mapped to inputs When Tally Mode is On if a mapped tally goes to Program one of the associated eight tally circuits will be turned on e When the mapped input is removed from Program the associated tally will turn Off Tally functionality can be test
227. ler s entire look but you are also recording the priorities e g the layers of PIPs and Keys that were selected in the Layer Control Section When you recall a Preset you are recalling the entire setup and all previously stored priorities PIPs Keys Colors Sources Moves etc Two resource examples are provided below A If you store a Preset that contains LAYER A with SPLIT mode on you can recall it to Preview only if LAYER A is not already in use in the current Program setup A If you store a Preset that contains LAYER A with SPLIT mode off because there is always an available layer in Mix Mode you can recall the Preset to Preview at any time However note that the system will pick the available layer based on resources e g if you stored the Preset in LAYER A the system may recall it to LAYER B if LAYER A is in use With these facts in mind you may wish to store and organize your Presets according to the use of resources e For example you could store Presets on Page 1 that only use one PIP and presets on Page 2 that use two PIPs e As an alternate method you may want to plan your presentations such that Presets are always recalled to an empty Program setup with only a background visible This method avoids all resource issues entirely ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 243 6 Operations Working with Presets Storing Presets E Use the following steps to store a preset 1
228. line only appears when a widescreen destination is selected If All is shown in a widescreen configuration menu values represent those of the lowest numbered ID in the destination When a parameter is adjusted all values for all ScreenPRO Il s in the destination will snap to the new value Ifan individual ID is shown e g 2 it represents that ScreenPRO Il alone and adjustments will only affect that unit ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 95 4 Menu Orientation Input Menu Layer for widescreen destinations indicates the layer on which you are adjusting the selected input Important In a widescreen configuration because the electronics on individual ScreenPRO II scalers may not match from unit to unit you may be required to adjust ScreenPRO II scalers and layers individually by first selecting a specific destination ID followed by a specific layer Clock Phase sets the system s A D converter allowing you to select where pixels are sampled ideally on the pixel s peak Adjustment range 16 to 15 For optimum visual results when adjusting high resolution sources project a burst test pattern and adjust the sampling for minimum noise Refer to the Test Pattern Menu section on page 105 for information on test patterns H Total for the selected source sets the total pixel count per line Note This field is not adjustable for digital sources including digital sign
229. ll frames can therefore be controlled from the ScreenPRO II Controller A Mixer is the electronic circuitry that enables you to transition and scale PIPs and Keys over a background M E Mix Effects is synonymous with mixer Each individual ScreenPRO II has one internal M E that can layer either two PIPs two keys or one of each Operator refers to the person who uses the system PIP refers to Picture in Picture an on screen setup in which one picture typically of reduced size is positioned over another background image or another PIP PIPs can be reduced enlarged bordered shadowed and mixed on and off Program PIPs can overlap each other depending on their visual priority Screen and Menu both refer to the Touch Screen menus System refers to the ScreenPRO II Controller and its associated individual ScreenPRO II units A Scaler is the electronic circuitry that enables you to reduce or enlarge source images thus creating PIPs and Keys that can be positioned and transitioned ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 19 1 Introduction System Overview System Overview The following topics are discussed in this section e ScreenPRO Ill Controller A Word About Layers e System Combinations e Effect Combinations ScreenPRO II Controller The ScreenPRO II Controller is a versatile interface that enables users to control up to four individual
230. ll snap to the new value To adjust an individual ScreenPRO II s values within the widescreen configuration highlight the ID line use the ADJ knob to select a specific destination and then adjust a parameter in the normal manner Press HOME to return to the Home Menu Press BACK to return to the menu from which you accessed the current menu Note The HOME and BACK buttons will not be explained again in this chapter 86 ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation Home Menu Home Menu The figure below illustrates the Home Menu ScreenPRO II CONTROLLER INPUT OUTPUT SYSTEM MISC FRAME GRAB EFFECTS STATUS SAVE Figure 4 1 Home Menu The Home Menu is the system s top level menu To access a menu press the desired button on the Touch Screen You can also return to the Home Menu by pressing the HOME softkey at the top left of the Touch Screen on most menus The following menus can be accessed from the Home Menu Press INPUT to access the Input Menu Refer to the Input Menu section on page 88 for details Press OUTPUT to access the Output Menu Refer to the Output Menu section on page 100 for details Press SYSTEM to access the System Menu Refer to the System Menu section on page 108 for details Press MISC to access the Miscellaneous Menu Refer to the Miscellaneous Menu section on page 133 for details Press FRAME GRAB to access the Frame Grab
231. ller User s Guide 43 2 Hardware Orientation Front Panel Sections Source Selection Bus The figure below illustrates the Source Selection Bus SOURCE SELECTI ON Program 0650065050058 Fi Figure 2 6 Source Selection Bus On the Source Selection Bus each numbered button represents an input that you can assign to a PIP or Key or route to an Aux destination Each input is either a direct connection to a ScreenPRO II or a router input Please note e fyou have configured a ScreenPRO l to use internal routing on the Destination Setup Menu both the white buttons analog sources and the yellow buttons HD SDI SD SDI sources are active You can assign a maximum of 16 analog and 2 HD SDI SD SDI sources e If you have configured a ScreenPRO II to use external routing on the Destination Setup Menu only the white buttons are active You can assign a maximum of 16 sources comprised of any mix of analog and digital Important In this mode with external routing enabled the two yellow SDI buttons are disabled Following are descriptions of each button s function in the Source Selection Bus Source Buttons press to assign the source analog or digital to the blinking mixer button in the Layer Control Section The following rules apply O Sw e When the source button is lit and blinking the source is on Preview the associated layer is active for modification and the associated la
232. lowing information is provided e Network DHCP this non selectable field confirms that the Controller is a DHCP server by showing the SERVER label e Ctrlr IP this non selectable field shows the Controller s IP address e Port this non selectable field shows the Controller s port P Range from to these non selectable fields show the system s available IP range that the server can provide 124 ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation System Menu Input Source Patch Menu From the System Menu press INPUT PATCH to display the Input Source Patch Menu INPUT SOURCE PATCH Source Number 1 Connection Type MATRIXPRO1 Router Input Tally Number Press ADD PATCH to log change PATCH PATCH Figure 4 29 Input Source Patch Menu sample The Input Source Patch Menu enables you to associate patch specific router inputs to specific source buttons on the ScreenPRO II Controller The menu also enables you to assign tallies and select connections to the ScreenPRO II units Important The fields that are shown on the Input Source Patch Menu change depending upon the selected Connection Type Important From a conceptual standpoint there are no direct connections to a ScreenPRO Il scaler All connections whether they are from a single source or an external router connect to each ScreenPRO Il s internal router matrix The following functions are provided
233. lt during a factory reset To change the EDID you must use the EDID DVI Input Format Menu Keypad Backlight Menu From the Miscellaneous Menu press LIGHT ADJUST to show the Keypad Backlight KEYPAD BACKLIGHT Keypad Backlight Menu Figure 4 41 Keypad Backlight Menu sample The Keypad Backlight Menu enables you to adjust the backlight level of all buttons on the ScreenPRO II Controller The following functions are provided e Keypad Backlight adjusts the backlight level Backlight range is 0 backlight off to 100 backlight on full 138 ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation Miscellaneous Menu LCD Settings Menu From the Miscellaneous Menu press LCD SETTINGS to show the LCD Settings Menu LCD SETTINGS Brightness Contrast C o N T R A S T LCD Cal Figure 4 42 LCD Settings Menu sample The LCD Settings Menu enables you to adjust contrast and brightness settings for the touch screen and also calibrate the touch screen The following functions are provided e Rotate the BRITE knob to adjust touch screen brightness e Rotate the CONTRAST knob to adjust touch screen contrast Press RESET to return settings to the factory default values e Press LCD CAL to calibrate the touch screen display to your finger or to a stylus Once pressed you will be prompted to touch the center of a target three times At the conclusion of the procedure the display is calibra
234. mat e g an analog monitor can only accept signals from an analog router e AnImagePRO Aux destination is an external ImagePRO a multi format processor with three inputs one analog one SDI and one DVI and the ability to scale these inputs to one common output format Typically the ImagePRO output is connected to another display device such as a monitor or projector e APrePRO Aux destination is an external PresentationPRO ll a multi format processor with nine inputs eight analog and one SDI and the ability to scale these inputs to one common output format Similar to ImagePRO the PrePRO II output is connected to another display device such as a monitor or projector ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 195 5 System Setup AUX Destination Setup 196 Aux Destination Setup This section provides instructions for setting up an Aux destination E Use the following steps to set up an Aux destination 1 Ensure that your have properly configured one or more router outputs as Aux outputs If not refer to the Router Setup section on page 193 for instructions 2 From the Home Menu press SYSTEM to access the System Menu Press DEST SETUP to display the Destination Setup Menu On the Destination line select the Aux destination that you want to define either Aux 1 Aux 2 Aux 3 or Aux 4 Scroll to the Type line and select Aux Press AUX SETUP to display the Aux Setup Menu On the Source Mapping line
235. n on page 53 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 31 2 Hardware Orientation ScreenPRO II Controller Rear Panel ScreenPRO ll Controller Rear Panel The figure below illustrates the ScreenPRO II Controller rear panel e e KEYBOARD TALLY qu a MEMORY CARD T250V 2A FUSE CAUTION FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST RISK OF FIRE REPLACE ONLY ETHERNET WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING OF FUSE 008 9 00 Figure 2 1 ScreenPRO II Controller Rear Panel 1 Keyboard Port 4 Ext Comm Port 7 Adjustable Feet 2 Tally Connector 5 Console Port 8 AC Connector and Fuse 3 Memory Card Slot 6 Ethernet Port 32 Following are descriptions of each rear panel connector and section 1 2 3 Keyboard Port On the optional Tally board one standard PS 2 connector is provided for the Keyboard Port When a customer supplied keyboard is connected users can enter system values and names Tally Connector On the optional Tally board one 25 pin D connector is provided for issuing tally relay closure commands to external devices such as cameras Eight tally circuits are provided In Appendix A refer to the Tally Connector section on page 262 for pinout details Memory Card Slot One Memory Card Slot is provided for a customer supplied Flash Memory Card which enables users to externally store and recall system configurations one
236. n PIPs and Keys e Split Mode e Mix Mode Split Mode With the Split button lit the mixer s two layers operate independently You can size position manipulate and transition the following combinations of effects e One or two PIPs e One or two Keys e One PIP and one Key Mix Mode With the Split button off the mixer s layers are ganged together and two mutually exclusive sub modes now determine the mixer s function Mix Source and Swap e With Mix Source mode enabled both of the mixer s PIPs or Keys are perfectly co located Layer A and Layer B are exactly the same size in exactly the same position with exactly the same border and shadow This mode is ideal for transitioning images inside a static PIP Even though two identical PIPs are used they visually appear as one e With Swap mode enabled both of the mixer s PIPs or Keys can be located independently with different positions sizes borders and shadows Layer A and Layer B can be positioned and sized as desired but only one can be on Program at a time With both Mix Source and Swap modes one additional transition function can be used without restriction e With Toggle mode enabled sources toggle back and forth with each transition When a PIP or Key source is selected in Preview and a transition is performed the Program source flip flops to Preview Subsequent transitions simply alternate between sources Any new source can be selected in Preview
237. n Color is selected as the DSK type Destination displays the currently selected destination ID displays the ID of the selected destination s associated ScreenPRO lII Red Color adjusts the red component of the DSK color from 0 to 1024 Green Color adjusts the green component of the DSK color from 0 to 1024 Blue Color adjusts the blue component of the DSK color from 0 to 1024 Red Threshold adjusts the DSK s clip along the Cyan vector as demonstrated using a CIE color chip chart Green Threshold adjusts the DSK s clip along the Magenta vector ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 179 4 Menu Orientation DSK Menus Blue Threshold adjusts the DSk s clip along the Yellow vector Red Mask adjusts the background mask to from black along the Cyan vector Green Mask adjusts background mask to from black along the Magenta vector Blue Mask adjusts background mask to from black along the Yellow vector Opacity adjusts the opacity of the keyed image from fully opaque to fully transparent Adjustment range is 0 to 1024 Press STATS to display the Status Menu Refer to the Status Menu section on page 147 for details Press PICK COLOR to choose the keying color visually Once pressed the GRAB COLOR label appears and a crosshair appears on Preview Use the Joystick to move the crosshair around the Preview monitor as desired Press GRAB COLOR to select the color dir
238. nd the DSK are mutually exclusive This occurs because the BG DSK Input B is shared between the DSK and BG B on all individual ScreenPRO Il units B Use the following steps to set up your DSK source 1 Determine how you would like to configure your background and DSK sources As a recommendation the following configuration is typically used The BG A input is configured as a live DVI source The BG DSK Input B is used primarily as the DSK source and secondarily as a background frame grab source 2 Onthe Destination Bus select the destination whose DSK source you want to configure 3 Onthe ScreenPRO II Controller console press DSK to display the DSK Adjustment Menu Press INPUT SETUP to display the DSK Input Setup Menu To configure a live DVI input as the DSK a Ensure that your DVI source PC is properly connected to the ScreenPRO II chassis and that the PC is turned on b Ensure that EDID is properly set If not refer to the Programming EDID section on page 190 for details c Scroll to the Type line and select DVI d Press FORCE ACQUIRE e Press SAVE 6 To configure a frame grab DSK a Ensure that you have captured a still frame either from a live DVI background or from one of the two layers LAYER A or LAYER B In Chapter 6 refer to the Working with Still Frames section on page 246 for instructions b Scroll to the Type line and select FG_1 FG_2 or FG 3 c Press SAVE
239. ndicates the source s vertical position relative to its default vertical position 00 with no offset Thus the value 10 is 10 pixels below its default position To adjust use the ADJ knob or move the Joystick up and down Move Rate adjusts the rate in 0 1 second increments for programmed Key or PIP movement from key frame to key frame To adjust use the ADJ knob or twist the Joystick Z Axis knob Key Frame Effect indicates the motion type that is used to move the PIP or Key from point to point Note Only the Linear motion type is supported All other key frame effects are ignored by ScreenPRO Il destinations At the bottom of each menu the TRACK SIZE check box has the following functions Check the TRACK SIZE check box to lock H Size and V Size together Regardless of the PIP or Key s current aspect ratio its size will adjust proportionally when the Joystick s Z Axis knob or the ADJ rotary knob is used to change size Uncheck the TRACK SIZE check box to adjust H Size or V Size individually without affecting the other parameter In this way you can stretch the PIP horizontally or vertically For Input Source Adjustments Press BORDR to display the Border Menu Refer to the Border Menu section on page 151 for details Press SHDOW to display the Shadow Menu Refer to the Shadow Menu section on page 152 for details ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 4 Menu
240. nections Analog Inputs Source Name Direct DA Output Target Input Camera PresentationPRO ll Analog Input ImagePRO Analog Input ScreenPRO Ill 1 Input 1 Analog ScreenPRO II 2 Input 1 Analog ScreenPRO II 1 Input 2 Analog ScreenPRO II 2 Input 2 Analog ScreenPRO II 1 Input 3 Analog ScreenPRO Il 2 Input 3 Analog ScreenPRO Ill 1 Input 4 Analog ScreenPRO II 2 Input 4 Analog Internal Routing Sample Digital Input Chart With a ScreenPRO II configured to use internal routing use the following chart to map Digital Inputs to each ScreenPRO II and other target digital destinations The use of DAs is recommended to provide identical inputs to each ScreenPRO Il or target device Table 3 8 Sample Digital Input Chart Direct or DA Connections Digital Inputs Source Name Direct DA Output ScreenPRO II Input ScreenPRO II 1 Input 1 Digital ScreenPRO II 2 Input 1 Digital ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 63 3 Hardware Installation Connection Charts Single Screens Sample DVI Connection Chart Each ScreenPRO II has two DVI inputs for the Background and DSK BG DSK in A and BG DSK in B Single screen backgrounds are typically distributed from one computer through a DA or signal splitter Use the following chart to map your Background and DSK DVI connections Table 3 9 Sample DVI Connection Chart Background DVI Routing Multi Head DA
241. nes the amount of required image overlap and this must be programmable to support different applications e 1280 gt lt 1280 gt 1024 Unused Source Image for Material Projector 1 Image for Projector 2 Image Overlap Region Figure 3 6 Image Overlap and Data Doubling ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 81 3 Hardware Installation Overview of Edge Blending Technology e Edge Feathering The overlapping image data in the blend region must be edge feathered to support a seamless optical blend The transfer function must be programmable to support blend regions of different widths and adjust to different video characteristics A typical blend function is illustrated below Blend Region Image Intensity Image Intensity for Image 1 for Image 2 Figure 3 7 Typical Blend Function Projector Setup and System Adjustments Accurate projector setup is essential for creating seamless images Please note the following important guidelines e The projectors must be precisely aligned to overlap the adjacent blending regions e The brightness contrast and color balance of the projectors must be adjusted to provide a uniform appearance across the entire screen e Custom test patterns and an alignment procedure are used to simplify this process and provide an optimal result Mixing and matching projectors is not recommended as it makes the adjustment process much more diffi
242. nfiguration menu values represent those of the lowest numbered ID in the destination When a parameter is adjusted all values for all ScreenPRO II s in the destination will snap to the new value Ifan individual ID is shown e g 2 it represents that ScreenPRO Ill alone and adjustments will only affect that unit Layer for widescreen destinations indicates the layer on which you are adjusting the selected input Important In a widescreen configuration because the electronics on individual ScreenPRO II scalers may not match from unit to unit you may be required to adjust ScreenPRO II scalers and layers individually by first selecting a specific destination ID followed by a specific layer e Select and adjust Right Edge Left Edge Top Edge or Bottom Edge as required to fit the image precisely in the layer s blinking raster box e Press SAVE to save the selected input in the designated input file ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 97 4 Menu Orientation Input Menu e Press FORCE ACQUIRE to force the system to perform the optimum image setup After the Force Acquire function is performed the system remains on the Oversample Sizing Menu Note If you switch to another input and there is no valid input video the settings are not applicable and N A is displayed Color Balance Menu From the Input Menu press COLOR BALANCE to display the Color Balance Menu COLOR BALAN
243. nge DISTO Vian iaa 6 lockout code menu 136 Chapter structure 00005 16 Chart blank connection 0 66 blank Aux destinations 72 blank DVI connection 70 blank external routing analog router I O 66 blank external routing digital router I O 67 blank internal routing analog inputs 68 blank internal routing digital inputs 69 blank standard destinations 71 Charts CONNECTION n un rd is 56 connection overview 56 instructions llle 56 Check termination status 118 Checksum Mismatch 147 Clear destination oooooo 223 layer button 0 002 eee eee 49 layers from program 0 234 Clip DSK 2 tes A LeFr 178 QT 157 Clock Phase c eS a 96 Clone DUHOM gone ness dad 46 menu parameters 162 MUITO os 163 OSEE tit unicos as 162 setup menu sasir i anni a 162 Pia soa Bone teta aa tree E 162 USING Aaa 235 Code downloading 188 Color balance menu description 98 DAS da eke ore ias 105 borderi ceneni eee eee es 151 DSK amato e rit Sadan one et necu 178 key functions 0 0 e eee 157 Space ssi a ii tees 91 102 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide Index Color balance adjustment usus 210 setup widescreen 209 Combinations
244. nitor or projector a scaled output signal is provided in one format Whereas an Aux Destination requires a single input format an ImagePRO Aux Destination accepts inputs in multiple formats PresentationPRO Il Aux Destination similar to an ImagePRO Aux destination this is a standalone PresentationPRO II that takes its input s from standalone sources or routers in multiple formats When connected to a single monitor or projector a scaled signal is provided in one format In Chapter 5 refer to the Standard Destination Setup section on page 192 for details on all destination setup procedures Following are descriptions of each button s function 7 Destination Aux Buttons press to toggle the numbered destination on or off Any combination of destinations can be selected The transitions that you perform will affect only the selected destination s Please note The four destination buttons work in conjunction with the DEST AUX button See the description of the DEST AUX button immediately below for details Press a numbered destination button by itself to enable that destination and toggle all other destinations off In this mode the buttons are mutually exclusive Press two or more destination buttons simultaneously to enable a group of destinations In this mode the selected group is mutually exclusive with any other active destinations A Destinations 1 2 and 3 are lit If you press destinations 1 and 2
245. nnections lesse 74 connector pinouts 261 software upgrade method 272 Set user preferences 221 Settings menu description 104 Setup Aux destination 120 195 196 Aux destination overview 195 background sources 205 backup to flash memory 213 downloading code 188 DSK tle DEL een 211 genlock c ue ad as 201 ID and remote enable 186 ImagePRO destination 196 input patching 0 0ee 198 inputs 1i e le ad 206 LOGO sitem tem 212 MOVE eric SERE AFER 47 output format 0 20 0 ee 199 PrePRO II destination 196 prerequisites o oo ooooooo 184 programming EDID 190 projector uds dca mL AES 82 projectors dat y verssd pr er idees 202 restore from flash memory card 191 return to factory default 189 LOUIS ue ke ee 193 SAVE nis rt Soe erae sees 213 save system configuration 213 sequence deta one reels aed 185 single screen projectors 202 standard destinations 192 SYNE eat dust tame Sine pne re rtp ed 200 SySIeI o a 183 system power Up 187 touch screen calibration 189 wide screen projectors 203 widescreen color balance 209 widescreen phase 209 Shadow EROS
246. nology section on page 79 for details e Justification sets the desired wide screen justification either Center or Left Once set wide screen markers adjust accordingly In the Feathering section e Mode enables or disables edge feathering Gamma sets gamma for the feathered regions Adjustment range 1 0 to 5 0 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 107 4 Menu Orientation System Menu System Menu The following topics are discussed in this section e System Menu Tree e System Menu Description e System Sub Menus System Menu Tree The figure below illustrates the System Menu Tree SYSTEM TALLY START LED TEST ROTARY ENCODER TBAR amp JOYSTICK KEY DETECT Diagnostic Diagnostic DOWNLOAD CODE FORCE DOWNLOAD REMOVE Diagnostic NETWORK INPUT ROUTER SETUP PATCH SETUP ADD PATCH DELETE PATCH DELETE ROUTER ADD NEW NEXT IP QUAD ADD PATCH DELETE PATCH Figure 4 16 System Menu Tree All functions and sub menus are discussed in the following sections 108 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation System Menu System Menu Description The figure below illustrates a sample System Menu SYSTEM MENU Modify Layers On Program Off Tally Mode Off DEST NETWORK INPUT ROUTER SETUP SETUP PATCH SETUP Figure 4 17 System Menu sample To access the menu e Press SYS
247. nu Refer to the Image Effects Menu section on page 153 for details Press PICK COLOR to choose the keying color visually Once pressed the GRAB COLOR label appears and a crosshair appears on Preview Use the Joystick to move the crosshair around the Preview monitor as desired Press GRAB COLOR to select the color directly underneath the crosshair These values are immediately mapped into the Red Green and Blue color fields on the menu and can be adjusted with the knobs in the normal manner Press SIZE amp POS to display the Key Adjustment Menu Refer to the Key Adjustment Menu section on page 160 for details Cut Fill Key Functions A Cut Fill key is one in which the hole cutting information is provided by a Key on Layer B while the fill information is provided by the effect on Layer A either a PIP or a Key Note Cut Fill keys can only be selected on Layer B when the Split Mode is enabled Cut Fill functions are identical to those available when a Luma Key is selected Refer to the Luma Key Functions section on page 157 for details In Chapter 6 refer to the Working with Layers section on page 226 for instructions on using all types of keys Key Sub Menus The following sub menus can be accessed from the Key Adjustment Menu Matte Menu Key Adjustment Menu 158 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation Key Menu Matte Menu From the Ke
248. nu Functions DVI Type section on page 175 for menu details Note that the functions on the Background Input Setup Menu are identical to those on the DSK Input Setup Menu when DVI is selected When FG_1 FG_2 or FG_3 is selected a captured still image can be used as the DSK source Refer to the Background Menu Functions FG Type section on page 176 for menu details Note that the functions on the Background Input Setup Menu are identical to those on the DSK Input Setup Menu when FG_1 FG_2 or FG_3 is selected ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 181 4 Menu Orientation LOGO Menu LOGO Menu The figure below illustrates a sample LOGO Menu Temp FG1 Info File Name FG1_T Resolution 1024 x 768 Figure 4 76 LOGO Menu sample The LOGO Menu enables you to select the full screen source for the panel s LOGO button You can choose between the three internal frame stores FG_1 FG_2 or FG_3 or black Because the LOGO is the highest priority layer and downstream of all other effects the black source can serve as a convenient way to fade all effects to black without changing any of the image setups underneath the LOGO Note On factory reset black is the default LOGO source If you capture a frame and assign it as the LOGO source that frame will be the default upon power up To access the menu e Press the LOGO button in the Layer Control Section The following
249. ny 192 168 0 xxx address will work provided it does not conflict with the Controller VPs or other network routers and devices DVILink 18x18 Router Support The ScreenPRO II Controller supports the DVILink 18x18 router enabled with serial control Connect the router to the EXT COMM port on the back of the Controller In Appendix A refer to the Serial Connector section on page 261 for pinouts Sierra Video Systems Router Support The ScreenPRO II Controller supports Sierra Video Systems routers enabled with serial control Connect the router to the EXT COMM port on the back of the Controller In Appendix A refer to the Serial Connector section on page 261 for pinouts 128 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation System Menu Comm Setup Menus Information is provided for three different Comm Setup Menus e Ethernet Setup Menu e RS 232 Setup Menu e Lantronix Setup Menu Ethernet Setup Menu On the Router Specification Menu when the Communication Type is set to ETHERNET press COMM SETUP to display the Ethernet Setup Menu ETHERNET SETUP IP Address 192 168 0 241 IP Port Number TEST NEXT COMM IP QUAD Figure 4 31 Ethernet Setup Menu sample The Ethernet Setup Menu enables you to set the selected router s IP address and port number e P Address sets the router s IP address e P Port Number sets the router s IP port number if applicable e Press
250. o oooococooooooo 221 Scaler s A p EY eva 221 Loss of signal 0 0c eee eee 221 Luma A ton nae tata ncaa MeL 178 key functions 0 eee eee 157 key functions DSK 178 M ME a ev RENDER 19 MAC Addr Lantronix 131 Macrovision copy protection 91 Manual transition 51 242 Manufacturer router ooooo ooo o 127 Marker Mode 2 0 00ee eee 107 Markers center justified 218 left justified oooooooo o 218 widescreen sess 218 Master Code lockout 252 MatrixPRO eene 20 125 Matte background 20 20000 172 background menu functions 173 Matte menu description 159 Mattel o REI 157 Mechanical specifications 259 Memory card slot controller 32 permanent frame grab 143 temporary frame grab 143 Men eeen e OI 19 121 SIZING aia ara 95 AUX Setup iue deve ll 120 background input setup 170 BG malle uec A 174 change lockout code 136 clone setup 0000e0e eee 162 comm set p e eee Fee EA 129 description crop ooooooooooo 164 download code results 188 DSK adjustment 178 genlock termination 118 119 shared functions background 172
251. oftware enables the PC to send commands to the ScreenPRO II Controller ScreenPRO II Controller software What s New File Note All software files listed above and more are contained in the file that you will download Software files can be downloaded from either the Folsom FTP site or the Barco Folsom website as described in the following Downloading Software section on page 271 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide C Upgrading Software Downloading Software Downloading Software Two different methods can be used to download ScreenPRO II Controller software and the Flash File Loader utility e ViaFTP Site e Via Web Site Via FTP Site Barco Folsom s FTP site address is ftp folsom com E To download from the FTP site 1 Create a target folder on your PC e g ScreenPRO II Controller 2 Ifyou are using an FTP client logon to our site as follows User name anonymous Password your email address A Example johndoe somecompany com If you are using a web browser to access our FTP site point the browser to ftp ftp folsom com 3 Once logged on navigate to the following directory ftp ftp folsom com Products Video ScreenPROIl Controller 4 Transfer the following file to the target folder on your PC ScreenProController_Rev EXE 5 As required please continue with the Serial Upgrade Method section on page 272 or the Ethernet Upgrade Method section on page 274
252. ole port controller ico IIIS 33 setup menu description 135 Contact information 268 Sale sickest hoe uer CAESUS 268 Contrast ia ated ox pss e es 91 LCD settings 0000 139 Controller 4 3 fos ne ded erro e eter Ales 19 adjustable feet o 33 console POS 33 ext comm port Lo 33 USO iii ed 33 279 Index keyboard port connector 32 lock and unlock 25 252 memory card slot 32 options backup restore 141 tally connector ooocoocoooo o 32 Conventions ooooooco cece eee eee 18 Copy down ooo 123 Copyright lt e lios lI ne Shes 2 Crop background 00 00eee 175 bottom right 164 button il 28 hea ke Ame eR tar ee dad 43 FASIZO E iaa TL 164 menu description 164 ModE it a p at 164 A te betonte decns 164 top leccion 164 ra A os hee Su eae Pate fas go ce 164 Ctrl P cee nei Meee eed esi 124 Current name frame grab 145 Custom lockout code 136 252 Customer service 00000055 268 Cut A aW etaed 51 transition cue one ioe xS 241 Cut 4 Fill how to use essssess 232 key functions lesus 158 USING io il ee ee ce ia ene 232 D Data DIS tet eet bue bea eee 130 doubling REIR es 107 Default IP address sesus 274 lockout code s i a a 136 router input patch table
253. ollowing important points regarding the restore function When restoring you must have the same version of software installed in the Controller as was used to perform the backup Conversion between versions can only be done with the Barco Backup and Restore utility Note The Barco Backup and Restore utility can be found in the ScreenPRO Ill Controller software bundle available via download from the website E Use the following steps to restore from the flash memory card Please note the following important points 1 m ON 7 8 Ensure that your flash memory card is properly inserted in the Controller s MEMORY CARD slot on the rear panel On the Home Menu press MISC to access the Miscellaneous Menu Press BACKUP RESTORE to display the Backup Restore Menu Press CHECK CARD to ensure that the Controller recognizes the card On the Device line select Cirlr SP to perform a complete restore or select a subset as desired On the Controller Options line select All or select a subset as desired On the SP to Restore line select All or select a subset as desired Press RESTORE to restore the selected system configuration At the conclusion of this procedure your system is completely set up exactly the way that you left it when you performed a complete system backup ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide BARCO Visibly yours A Specifications In This Appendix This ap
254. olsom com www events barco com Barco N V Noordlaan 5 8520 Kuurne BELGIUM e Phone 32 56 36 82 11 e Fax 32 56 35 16 51 Website www barco com ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 3 Operators Safety Summary The general safety information in this summary is for operating personnel Do Not Remove Covers or Panels There are no user serviceable parts within the unit Removal of the top cover will expose dangerous voltages To avoid personal injury do not remove the top cover Do not operate the unit without the cover installed Power Source This product is intended to operate from a power source that will not apply more than 230 volts rms between the supply conductors or between both supply conductor and ground A protective ground connection by way of grounding conductor in the power cord is essential for safe operation Grounding the Product This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord To avoid electrical shock plug the power cord into a properly wired receptacle before connecting to the product input or output terminals A protective ground connection by way of the grounding conductor in the power cord is essential for safe operation Use the Proper Power Cord Use only the power cord and connector specified for your product Use only a power cord that is in good condition Refer cord and connector changes to qualified service personnel Use the Proper Fuse To avoid fire h
255. om BG B ensure that the DSK is not in use In the Layer Control Section select the background from which you want to capture a still The button blinks the source appears on Preview and the selected Background Input Setup Menu appears Press HOME gt FRAME GRAB to display the Frame Grab Menu On the Frame Number line select the temporary frame store into which the still will be captured FG_1 FG_2 or FG_3 Press CAPTURE Once pressed the screen will indicate that the frame is being captured A pop up message confirms the procedure Repeat the procedure from step 4 to capture additional stills from a background input Remember that you can always overwrite FG_1 FG_2 or FG_3 Please note The captured still s can now be assigned as the input type for BG A BG B the DSK or the LOGO In Chapter 5 refer to the following sections for instructions Background Setup page 205 DSK Setup Procedure page 211 LOGO Setup Procedure page 212 Captured stills reside in temporary memory If the system is powered down or reset the stills will be lost To save stills in permanent memory refer to the Saving Still Frames in Permanent Memory section on page 248 Note Only saved still frames can be named Capturing Still Frames from a Layer E Use the following steps to capture a still frame from a layer 1 Ensure that BG A BG B or the DSK are not on Program If they are you
256. omprehensive installation instructions for the ScreenPRO II Controller system s hardware The following topics are discussed e Safety Precautions e Unpacking and Inspection Site Preparation Controller Installation Cable Adapter and Accessory Information e Connection Charts e System Installation e BlendPRO Il Widescreen Lock Connections e Overview of Edge Blending Technology Note Once you have reviewed all of the sections in this chapter please continue with Chapter 4 Menu Orientation on page 85 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 53 3 Hardware Installation Safety Precautions Safety Precautions For all ScreenPRO II Controller installation procedures please observe the following important safety and handling rules to avoid damage to yourself and the equipment e To protect users from electric shock ensure that the chassis connects to earth via the ground wire provided in the AC power Cord e The AC Socket outlet should be installed near the equipment and be easily accessible Unpacking and Inspection Before opening the ScreenPRO Il Controller shipping box inspect it for damage If you find any damage notify the shipping carrier immediately for all claims adjustments As you open the box compare its contents against the packing slip If you find any shortages contact your sales representative Once you have removed all the components from their
257. on Chart Note Abbreviated charts are used in the following sections ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 3 Hardware Installation Connection Charts External Routing Sample Analog Router 1 0 Chart With a ScreenPRO II configured to use external routing on the Destination Setup Menu use the following chart to map Analog Router input and output connections Table 3 2 Sample Analog Router I O Chart Router 1 Analog Router Source Name Controller Input lt Input Output gt Connects to DVDA 7 ScreenPRO II 1 Input 1 Analog DVD B 8 ScreenPRO Il 1 Input 2 Analog LOGO 9 ScreenPRO Il 2 Input 1 Analog PowerPoint ScreenPRO Il 2 Input 2 Analog PowerPoint Backup PrePRO II Input 1 Analog Demo A ImagePRO Analog Input Demo B Betacam External Routing Sample Digital Router 1 0 Chart With a ScreenPRO II configured to use external routing use the following chart to map SDI Router input and output connections Table 3 3 Sample Digital Router I O Chart Router 2 SDI Router Source Name Controller Input lt Input Output gt Connects to Camera 1 1 ScreenPRO ll 1 Input 1 SDI Camera 2 ScreenPRO II 1 Input 2 SDI Camera 3 ScreenPRO II 2 Input 1 SDI C5 ro Digital Betacam ScreenPRO II 2 Input 2 SDI PrePRO II Input 1 SDI ImagePRO SDI Input Server a jA N ScreenPRO II Controll
258. onal a If you will be using synchronous camera sources in your production use a BNC cable to connect a PAL or NTSC black burst or a composite sync signal to the Genlock In connector on each ScreenPRO Il b If desired you can loop reference video from one ScreenPRO II chassis to another by connecting a BNC cable from the Genlock Loop connector to the next ScreenPRO Il s Genlock In connector or to other video devices in the chain c Ifa particular ScreenPRO ll is the last device in a reference video chain do not make any connections to the Genlock Loop connector Refer to the ScreenPRO Il Genlock Termination section on page 76 for details Important For wide screen applications that use BlendPRO Il specific Widescreen Lock connections are mandatory Refer to the BlendPRO II Widescreen Lock Connections section on page 77 for instructions ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 75 3 Hardware Installation System Installation 76 12 Power Connection a Connect an AC power cord to the AC Power Connector on the rear of each ScreenPRO II chassis and then to AC outlets b Connect an AC power cord to the AC Power Connector on the rear of the ScreenPRO II Controller chassis and then to an AC outlet c Per your system configuration connect AC Power cords to MatrixPRO routers and BlendPRO Ill and then to AC outlets d Connect AC Power cords or AC adapters to all peripheral equipment
259. ooooocoooooooo 223 Working with Layers lesse III 226 Switching Sources iles eee 226 Background Transitions llle 227 Understanding Split and Mix Modes 02000000 228 Split Mode isse ii ea y e a A a eee 228 Mix Mode Limp DE prx e aE EER an 228 Working with PIPs in Split Mode 00 00 e eee ee eee 229 Working with PIPs in Mix Mode 0c eee eee eee 229 Modifying PIPS eh Selene tee Peta See Goa 230 Working with Keys in Split Mode lille 231 Working with Keys in Mix Mode 0 00 e eee ee eee 232 Using GUES Fill ccoo ge ake here ke eR aed se ah reti 232 Modifying Keys 0 0 0 cece eee n 233 Clearing Layers from Program 000 e eee eee eee eee 234 Modifying Layers On Program 00 0 cece eee eee eee 234 Working with Layer Functions 0 0 cee eee eee 235 Changing the Layer Mode esee 235 Using Full Screen 0 000 cece es 235 Using Clone 2 eevee ee a oe ba yee a ba ed 235 Using Swap Z Order 0 0 cece eee 236 Using Frezen cat das REA oe RS ee a ie 236 Using Reset use pue RUE xum pedet 237 Using Join Mode IERI O EE 237 USING MOV O cosita ek LEA Oa yet onde eR AER EROR A doge 238 Programming Moves 00 e eee eee nh 238 Program a Move on Preview 00 ee eee 238 ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 11 Table of Contents Program a Move on Program
260. or or projector a scaled signal is provided in one format Inputs from routers and direct sources ScreenPRO II Controller ScreenPRO II m OM es o BA TS Input sources Ethernet single format 42 MatrixPRO SDI Router Hub Switch Input sources multiple formats wy Scaled 1 PresentationPRO Ill Figure 1 6 ScreenPRO II Controller system with two Aux destinations 26 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 1 Introduction System Overview Effect Combinations This section illustrates the many but not all combinations of image effects that you can create using the ScreenPRO II Controller Please note e In the following illustrations the specific layers used in creating each effect are labeled e g PIP A PIP B e The symbol lt gt denotes a PIP or a key that can transition For example PIP A lt gt B indicates that you can dissolve between sources within the PIP Similar to individual ScreenPRO Il units the ScreenPRO II Controller enables you to control two backgrounds two scalable layers in the mixer plus an unscaled DSK and a full screen unscaled LOGO The LOGO DSK and backgrounds are always unscaled Important If the DSK is in use the background cannot transition between A and B This occurs because BG DSK Input B is shared
261. orization number RMA e 866 374 7878 RMA Conditions are listed below a Prior to returning any item you must receive a Return Merchandise Authorization RMA number All RMA numbers must appear on their return shipping label RMA numbers are valid for ten 10 days from issue date All shipping and insurance charges on all RMAs must be prepaid by the customer ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 267 B Contact Information Contact Information Contact Information Barco Media and Entertainment 11101 Trade Center Drive Rancho Cordova California 95670 USA e Phone 916 859 2500 e Fax 916 859 2515 Websites www folsom com www events barco com Sales Contact Information Direct 916 859 2505 Toll Free 888 414 7226 e E mail folsomsales barco com Barco N V Noordlaan 5 8520 Kuurne BELGIUM e Phone 32 56 36 82 11 e Fax 32 56 35 16 51 Website www events barco com Technical Support Customer Service Information e Tech Line 866 374 7878 24 hours per day 7 days per week e E mail folsomsupport barco com 268 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide BARCO Visibly yours C Uporading Software In This Appendix The following topics are discussed in this Appendix e Software Upgrade Overview e Hardware Requirements e Software Requirements e Downloading Software e Serial Upgrade Method e Ethernet Upgrade Method ScreenPRO Il Controller
262. ormat Note In this chapter softkey labels on the menus are shown in bold upper and lowercase letters between brackets A Press BORDR to The following topics are discussed e Global Rules Home Menu nput Menu e Output Menu e System Menu e Miscellaneous Menu e Frame Grab Menu e Effects Menu e Status Menu e PIP Adjustment Menu e Key Menu e Clone Setup Menu Crop Menu e Source Adjustment Menus e Background Input Setup Menu e DSK Menus e LOGO Menu Note Once you have reviewed all of the sections in this chapter please continue with Chapter 5 System Setup on page 183 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 85 4 Menu Orientation Global Rules Global Rules The following global rules apply to all menus Brackets parameters and values displayed between brackets e g 525 cannot be changed ID All For widescreen destinations when the value All is shown for the ID parameter it represents the lowest numbered ID in the destination as configured typically number 1 Exclamation Points For widescreen destinations if an exclamation point appears after a value e g Contrast 100 one or more of the destinations is not set to 100 All Adjustments For widescreen destinations if a parameter is adjusted on a menu displaying an All ID condition all values for all ScreenPRO Il s in the destination wi
263. ormat that contains information about a display device and its resolution both preferred and allowed The system s EDID file is stored in non volatile memory This file is read by an external computer s DVI graphic card when the computer s DVI output is connected to ScreenPRO Il via the DVI I connector during boot up The ScreenPRO Il must be powered on first for the EDID information to be read The following functions are provided Destination sets the destination bus on which you want to program EDID all or individual ScreenPRO Il units Format selects the preferred DVI video format with which you want to program the selected ScreenPRO Il s EDID non volatile memory e Current displays the current EDID video format that resides in memory e Press PROGRAM EDID to program EDID with the new selected format A warning message will be shown ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 137 4 Menu Orientation Miscellaneous Menu Please note the following important points regarding EDID e For the computer to correctly see the EDID data a Turn on ScreenPRO ll power b Connect the DVI cable from the computer s video card to one of ScreenPRO II s DVI connectors Boot the computer Once EDID programming is complete you will be prompted to power down the external computer power it back on again and then ensure that the computer s format is set to match e AScreenPRO II s EDID prom is not reset to any defau
264. ortionally When the two layers are joined the effects e g border shadow clip on each layer are locked and cannot be changed until the join is cancelled You can only enter and exit the mode when the join is on Preview B Use the following steps to join Layer A and Layer B 1 2 3 4 In the Layer Control Section ensure that Split mode is enabled On Preview create a Key or PIP on Layer A in the normal manner Create a Key or PIP on Layer B in the normal manner Press and hold the Split button then press either of the two layer buttons This action enables the Join mode and causes both layer buttons to blink Use either layer s Size and Position controls to modify the joined layers or to program a move Note that the two layers move and size as one Transition the new look to program with a CUT or AUTO TRANS To exit the mode transition the effect off Program and back to Preview Press and hold the Split button then press either of the two layer buttons ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 237 6 Operations Using Move Using Move The following topics are discussed in this section Programming Moves Pending and Triggering Moves Move Notes Programming Moves The ScreenPRO II Controller enables you to move a PIP or a Key or both smoothly from one screen location to another at a predefined rate while the layer s are on air All moves are two keyframe effects with
265. ot say lt EMPTY gt on the Number line press DELETE ROUTER to remove the specification from the system 22 Press BACK to return to the System Menu 23 Press HOME to return to the Home Menu 24 Press SAVE to save the current configuration AUX Destination Setup ScreenPRO II Controller system setup Step 9 In this procedure you will set up the system s Aux Auxiliary destinations A Prerequisites Ensure that you are familiar with the following menus Destination Setup Menu In Chapter 4 refer to the Destination Setup Menu section on page 117 Aux Destination Setup Menu In Chapter 4 refer to the Aux Destination Setup section on page 120 Note Up to 4 Aux destinations can be assigned These are accessible by pressing the red DEST AUX button The following topics are discussed e Aux Destination Overview e Aux Destination Setup e magePRO or PrePRO II Aux Destination Setup Aux Destination Overview The ScreenPRO Il Controller system provides three types of Aux destinations Aux ImagePRO Aux and PrePRO II Aux Each type of destination can be switched from the ScreenPRO II Controller by selecting it on the Destination Bus then selecting the desired source on the Source Selection Bus An Aux destination is the output of a router which is typically connected directly to a monitor rather than to the ScreenPRO Il This type of destination is single for
266. ou return to the associated layer the button lights again 8 Tosetup an additional move on the other layer provided that you are in Split Layer mode repeat the procedure from step 1 To pend and trigger the move refer to the Pending and Triggering Moves section on page 239 238 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 6 Operations Using Move Program a Move on Program This mode enables you to program a move with the layer on both Program and Preview after the layer has transitioned to Program E Use the following steps to program a move on Program 1 Inthe Layer Control Section select the layer on Program that you want to move LAYER A or LAYER B The button blinks to indicate that it is active for modification Note that its current position is the move s starting location 2 Inthe Layer Functions Section press Move Setup The button blinks to indicate that you are now actively defining the properties of the move 3 Size and position the PIP or Key to its ending location Note that on Preview only the raster box moves 4 Press Move Setup again to complete the programming The button remains lit and the raster box returns to its starting location on Preview 5 Tosetup an additional move on the other layer provided that you are in Split Layer mode repeat the procedure from step 1 To pend and trigger the move refer to the Pending and Triggering Moves section Pending
267. our configuration 16 Scroll to the Justification line and set the desired wide screen justification either Center or Left 17 In the Feathering section scroll to the Mode line and enable or disable edge feathering as required for your configuration 18 Scroll to the Gamma line and set the gamma for the feathered regions as desired The default value is 2 2 19 At each projector perform the following adjustments to ensure that the output data is properly displayed Adjust the images for a minimum amount of noise Adjust the pixel clocks for proper image position such that the entire Raster Box is visible 20 Press BACK to return to the Output Menu 21 Press TEST PATTERN to display the Test Pattern Menu 22 On the Type line select one of the many Gray Scale test patterns as desired 23 At each projector adjust color balance brightness and contrast Important Refer to your projector s technical manual for information on all projector setup and adjustment procedures 24 Once each projector is properly set scroll to the Alignment Test Pattern line and enable the function This special test pattern allows you to perform projector lens shift and registration adjustments a Ateach projector perform lens shift and registration adjustments b If required adjust the horizontal and vertical totals to match those entered on the Wide Screen Settings Menu Note Refer to your projector s technic
268. ows Set to HI Z SP 3 Error Termination setup incorrect Press CHECK TERM to retest setting Figure 4 25 ScreenPRO ll Genlock Termination Menu This menu provides important information about the current status of your system s Widescreen Lock chain and each ScreenPRO II s Termination Switch Important To correct the error If you press BACK the ScreenPRO II Genlock Termination Menu and the Destination Setup Menu will endlessly loop until the termination problem is fixed e Review the menu information in detail Follow the instructions as noted in the menu to change the physical position of the termination switch es as instructed For information on the termination switch in Chapter 3 refer to the ScreenPRO II Genlock Termination section on page 76 e Press CHECK TERM to re test the settings e f required press MORE for additional help menus ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 119 4 Menu Orientation System Menu Aux Destination Setup When Aux 1 2 3 or 4 is selected on the Destination Setup Menu you can select one of three types of Aux Destinations on the Type line e Aux magePRO Aux e PrePRO I Aux In each case the AUX SETUP button appears and when pressed the Aux Setup Menu appears which enables you to set parameters for the selected Aux destination Note that the menu changes depending upon the selected type of destination By way
269. p Menu will not appear Ifthe selected background is not on Program the menu appears The following topics are discussed in this section e Background Input Setup Menu Tree e Shared Background Menu Functions e Background Menu Functions Matte Type Background Menu Functions DVI Type Background Menu Functions FG Type ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation Background Input Setup Menu Background Input Setup Menu Tree The figure below illustrates the Background Input Setup Menu Tree BG INPUT SETUP MENU Destination Type Matte Type DVI Key Type FG Format Crop V Offset RESET SAVE o o APPLY FORMAT FORCE ACQUIRE Figure 4 66 Background Input Setup Menu Tree All functions and sub menus are discussed in the following sections ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 171 4 Menu Orientation Background Input Setup Menu Shared Background Menu Functions The figure below illustrates a sample BG Input Setup Menu showing shared functions BG INPUT SETUP BG_A Destination 1 A ID All V Type Matte Figure 4 67 BG Input Setup Menu sample The following functions are shared regardless of the selected background type e Top Line indicates the selected background BG A or BG B e Destination displays the currently selected destination Note that different backgrounds can be assigned to different destinations e 1ID
270. pendix provides detailed technical specifications for the ScreenPRO II Controller The following topics are provided ScreenPRO II Input Specifications ScreenPRO II Output Specifications User Control Widescreen Functions Physical and Electrical Specifications Communications Specifications Pinouts ScreenPRO II Input and Output Resolutions ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 255 A Specifications ScreenPRO II Input Specifications ScreenPRO II Input Specifications The table below lists input specifications for individual ScreenPRO Il units Table A 1 ScreenPRO II Input Specifications Parameter Specification Scaled Channel Inputs Analog inputs 8 RGBHV RGBS RGsB computer video YPbPr video SD or HD S video or composite video on 15 pin HD connector SD and HD SDI Input 2 optional Per SMPTE 259M C NTSC PAL resolution SMPTE 292M HDTV on BNC connector Scaler Input Resolutions 480i Computer resolutions VGA 640 x 480 through UXGA 1600 x 1200 HDTV resolutions up to 1920 x 1080 720p 1080i 1080p 2048 x 1080p Digital Cinema format Plasma display resolutions Un scaled Background DVI Inputs 2 Digital DVI per DDWG 1 0 on DVI I connector DSK Channel Inputs Background DSK Input Computer resolutions VGA 640 x 480 through UXGA 1600 x Resolutions 1200 HDTV resolutions progressive up to 1920 x 1080 1080p 2048 x 1080p D
271. ppears In Chapter 4 refer to the Key Menu section on page 155 for details Full Screen press to take the active PIP or Key to full screen In each case the source s height is used as the parameter that defines the full screen size A If a source s original dimension is 1280 x 1024 pressing Full Screen expands or reduces the PIP or Key to fill the output screen vertically If borders are ON they will be taken into account so that they are visible In Chapter 6 refer to the Using Full Screen section on page 235 for instructions Clone for widescreen configurations only press to make an exact copy of a layer onto the opposite screen All parameters of the PIP or Key are cloned including the source s shadow key effects border and size Once cloned you can select between a mirror or an offset clone A If Layer A is a PIP on screen 1 press Clone to make an exact copy of the PIP on screen 2 When you adjust the PIP both the original and the cloned copy are adjusted simultaneously In Chapter 6 refer to the Using Clone section on page 235 for instructions Swap Z order press to change the visual priority on Preview of the two mixer layers The PIPs or Keys remain at their current locations only the priority changes A Ifthe PIP on Layer B is visually on top of the PIP on Layer A press Swap Z Order to place Layer A s PIP on top In Chapter 6 refer to the Using Swap Z Order section on p
272. priority the LOGO layer can also be used as a convenient black preview function This enables you to fade to black at any time from any simple or complex setup without affecting the underlying look After a transition the LOGO layer is automatically cleared from Preview In this way the next transition will always fade up from black to your previous setup ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 251 6 Operations Locking and Unlocking the Controller Locking and Unlocking the Controller This section provides instructions for locking and unlocking the Controller A Prerequisite Ensure that you are familiar with the Lockout Code Menu and its associated submenu In Chapter 4 refer to the Lockout Code Menu section on page 136 B Use the following steps to lock the Controller 1 Onthe Lockout Code Menu select the type of lockout code you wish to use once the panel is unlocked Default or Custom 2 If Custom is selected use the Change Lockout Code Menu to enter the desired code Make a note of the selected code 3 To lock the Controller press and hold the PAGE button in the Presets Section then press the ALL button in the Destination Aux Bus The message KEYBOARD LOCKED appears on the menu B Use the following steps to unlock the Controller 1 Press and hold the PAGE button then press the ALL button The Enter Lockout Code menu appears 2 Use the eight numbered buttons on the Source Se
273. put Menu On the Destination Bus select your system s wide screen destination Press TEST PATTERN to display the Test Pattern Menu On the Output Monitor line select the output s on which you want a test pattern to appear All Preview SPII Program or BPII Program On the Mode line select On On the Type line select the Burst test pattern On the Raster Box line select On Press BACK to return to the Output Menu Press WIDE SCREEN to display the Wide Screen Settings Menu Note that the Total Projectors line shows the total number of ScreenPRO Il units that you defined in the wide screen configuration on the Destination Setup Menu Scroll to the Total H Res line and enter the total number of horizontal pixels in the overall wide screen display Scroll to the Background Format line and select the method by which your background graphics were originally produced Edge butted or Overlapped Scroll to the Marker Mode line and enable or disable the system s wide screen markers to show the boundaries of active data Note As required you can change the Marker Mode value during operations without affecting other wide screen settings ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 203 5 System Setup Projector Setup 14 Scroll to the Overlap Width line and enter the desired overlap in pixels between projectors 15 Scroll to the Data Doubling line and enable or disable data doubling as required for y
274. r User s Guide 57 3 Hardware Installation Connection Charts Sample Connection Charts External Routing Following are sample connection charts for a ScreenPRO II Controller system configured for external routing The system is comprised of the following components e 2x ScreenPRO II e 1x widescreen destination using two projectors e 1x BlendPRO II e 2 x Aux destinations PresentationPRO Il ImagePRO e 1x Analog router 8x8 e 1x SDI router 8x8 The figure below provides a simplified diagram of the system PresentationPRO II Aux Destination 1 Widescreen Destination MatrixPRO RGBHV Router EA O ImagePRO Aux Destination 2 So ScreenPRO ll 1 EJEJESESIEIESIET EET BlendPRO II Preview Left Preview Right 58 ScreenPRO II 2 b ooo j E xe tendens nen asia e EN Lu O Ethernet Distribution PC PC Local Network Only Background DSK DVI py v v Program Left Program Right Figure 3 1 Sample System with External Routing The following sample charts are provided e External Routing Sample Analog Router I O Chart e External Routing Sample Digital Router I O Chart Widescreen Sample DVI Connection Chart e Widescreen Sample Standard Destination Chart e Widescreen Sample Auxiliary Destinati
275. r BG B must occur on Preview the desired full screen source to capture must be visible on Preview You will get an error message if you attempt to capture while the source is on Program All captures of the layers Layer A or Layer B can occur on either Preview or Program Once captured a still frame can be assigned as the input type for BG A BG B the DSK source or the LOGO basically any green button in the Layer Control Section Each frame store utilizes the temp temporary memory for on air production During operation you can overwrite the memory with new captured stills as desired as it takes only a few seconds to capture a still Note that stills in temp memory are lost when the system is powered down You can also store three stills in permanent flash memory which will not be lost when the ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 143 4 Menu Orientation Frame Grab Menu system is powered down Thus at any one time you could have a maximum of three stills in temporary memory and three different stills in permanent memory At bootup the contents of flash memory is read into temp memory for use on air It takes several minutes to save a still into permanent memory and this procedure should not be performed on air Permanent frames can also be overwritten The following Frame Grab Menu functions are provided Destination displays the currently selected destination ID displa
276. r from memory The Touch Screen displays a confirmation message Using Next and Previous E Use the following steps to utilize the Next function 1 Check the available resources on Program If the resources layers that you wish to recall are already in use on Program they must first be cleared before the 2 Inthe Preset Section press Next to recall the next valid Preset in sequential If Preset 2 is lit pressing Next recalls Preset 3 f Preset 6 is active on page 2 pressing Next advances to Preset 1 on A recall is permitted order Please note page 3 244 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 6 Operations Working with Presets Ifa Preset is undefined it will be skipped when Next is pressed E Use the following steps to utilize the Previous function Note The Previous feature is currently not implemented 1 Information to be provided Previous Preset Notes Please note the following important points regarding Presets e Active destinations both standard and Aux are stored as part of a Preset e Aux source selections are saved and recalled in Presets e f different Presets have different Move definitions stored for the same Layer when you recall a Preset to a Layer that already has a PIP on Program the starting location of the recalled Move is ignored Instead the PIP s current location will be used as the move s starting point and the ending point from the recalled Pre
277. rate in 0 1 second increments 3 Inthe Transition Section press MIX 4 Press AUTO TRANS to dissolve the setup to Program Wipe All types of wipes can be performed on single screen destinations On widescreen destinations you can perform a Wipe Up or Wipe Down E Use the following steps to perform a Wipe 1 Set up the desired look in Preview 2 Preset the desired transition rate wipe effect and wipe edge a Press HOME gt EFFECTS to display the Effects Menu b Adjust the Transition Rate field for the desired rate in 0 1 second increments c Adjust the Transition Wipe field for the desired wipe pattern ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 241 6 Operations Working with Transitions d Adjust the Transition Edge field for the desired wipe edge Note Key Frame effects are fixed as LINEAR and cannot be changed 3 Inthe Transition Section press WIPE 4 Press AUTO TRANS to wipe the setup to Program Manual Transitions Any of the transitions outlined above can be performed manually with the T Bar E Use the following steps to perform a manual transition 1 Set up the desired look in Preview 2 Select WIPE or MIX as desired Remember that wipes can only be performed on single screen destinations 3 Inthe Transition Section move the T Bar to manually dissolve or wipe the images on Preview to Program Transition Notes Using the Effects Menu transitions performed on the Scre
278. ration Menu sample Each input has an associated file that stores all input parameters and settings Each time an input is selected on the Source Selection Bus its associated file is recalled the instant before it appears on Preview The Input Configuration Menu enables you to save or delete the input s associated file which guarantees that the exact parameters you set are those that are used on air The following functions are provided e File Number sets the file number into which data is stored In the current version the file number defaults to the input number and cannot be changed File Name sets the alphanumeric file name In the current version the file name automatically defaults to the input name and cannot be changed e Delete Applies To because inputs may be set up differently depending upon the destination this parameter enables you to identify the destination from which you want to delete the associated file Press SAVE to save the selected input in the designated input file Press DELETE to delete the selected input file from the designated destination Note If multiple destinations are selected for example when you are using two single screen configurations pressing SAVE copies input parameters to both destinations eliminating the need to configure and save each input twice ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 93 4 Menu Orientation Input Menu Aspect Ratio
279. re Installation System Installation 5 As required ensure that your system interconnection charts are handy Refer to the Connection Charts section on page 56 for details on completing the charts 6 Ethernet Connections a completely local network connection is recommended without IP connections to the outside world a d Using an Ethernet cable connect the ScreenPRO II Controller s Ethernet port to a Hub or Switch Connect all ScreenPRO Il units to the Ethernet Hub or Switch If your system uses BlendPRO II connect the BlendPRO II chassis to the Ethernet Hub or Switch Connect all routers such as MatrixPRO to the Ethernet Hub or Switch 7 Serial Connections the ScreenPRO II Controller s serial port is configured as DCE 115K baud 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity bits e Note For a single serial controlled router use an RS 232 cable to connect the router to the ScreenPRO II Controllers EXT COMM port To connect two or more serial routers a third party Ethernet to Serial converter box is required such as the Lantronix model UDS200 Device Server http www lantronix com pdf UDS200_PB pdf Each Lantronix UDS200 can control two serial routers e Using RS 232 cables connect each router to the UDS200 Setup a static IP address on the Lantronix device itself The recommended range is 192 168 0 200 192 168 0 239 such as not to conflict with other devices Refer to the Lantronix
280. reen Sample Auxiliary Destination Chart 61 Sample Connection Charts Internal Routing 62 Internal Routing Sample Analog Input Chart 63 Internal Routing Sample Digital Input Chart 63 Single Screens Sample DVI Connection Chart 64 Single Screens Sample Standard Destination Chart 64 Single Screens Sample Auxiliary Destination Chart 65 Blank Connection Charts a se aas asana eese 66 External Routing Analog Router I O Chart 66 External Routing Digital Router I O Chart 67 Internal Routing Analog Input Chart 68 Internal Routing Digital Input Chart 69 DVI Connection Chart 0 00 0 esee 70 Standard Destination Chart 00000 e eee eae 71 Auxiliary Destination Chart 0 000 e eee eee 72 System Installation teens 73 ScreenPRO II Genlock Termination 0 00 eee eee 76 BlendPRO II Widescreen Lock Connections 0 0 eee eee 77 Overview of Edge Blending Technology 00e cece eee eee 79 Introduction to Edge Blending 0 00 e eee eee eee 79 Content Creation 0 cece e 79 Video Processing ei ceid eraai cece eee eee eres 81 Projector Setup and System Adjustments 82 Left Justified Configurations llle 83 Center Justified Configurations lll
281. rocedure page 212 B To complete your setup 19 Saving the Setup page 213 20 Backup to Flash Memory Card page 213 All of the above procedures are covered in the following sections ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 185 5 System Setup ID Setup and Remote Enable ID Setup and Remote Enable ScreenPRO II Controller system setup Step 1 In this procedure you will set up individual ScreenPRO II IDs and enable remote control Each ScreenPRO II in your system must have a unique ID B Use the following steps to set up ScreenPRO Il IDs and remote control 1 Onan individual ScreenPRO II system press REMOTE CONTROL on the Home Menu to access the Remote Control Menu 2 Scroll to the Unit ID line and select a unique ID for the ScreenPRO II chassis The ID range is 1 to 32 3 Scroll to the Remote Control DHCP line and enable remote control and DHCP Note When remote control is on the HOME buttons disappears the ScreenPRO Il s front panel is disabled and the unit s IP address is dynamically assigned All control now originates from the ScreenPRO II Controller s console 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 for all other ScreenPRO II units in your system 186 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 5 System Setup System Power Up System Power Up ScreenPRO II Controller system setup Step 2 In this procedure you will power up the entire system and download cod
282. rom V sync Press SAVE to save the input configuration Press BACK to return to the Input Menu If Oversample was selected Scroll to the Right Edge line and adjust as required Scroll to the Left Edge line and adjust as required Scroll to the Top Edge line and adjust as required Scroll to the Bottom Edge line and adjust as required Press SAVE to save the input configuration Press BACK to return to the Input Menu 10 Perform additional setups on the Color Balance Menu if required Press COLOR BALANCE to display the Color Balance Menu a b ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide If an RGB source was selected Scroll to the Red Contrast line and adjust as required Scroll to the Red Brightness line and adjust as required Scroll to the Green Contrast line and adjust as required Scroll to the Green Brightness line and adjust as required Scroll to the Blue Contrast line and adjust as required Scroll to the Blue Brightness line and adjust as required Press SAVE to save the input configuration 207 5 System Setup Input Setup Press BACK to return to the Input Menu c Ifa Composite S Video or YP P source was selected Scroll to the Saturation line and adjust as required Scroll to the Hue line and adjust as required Press SAVE to save the input configuration Press BACK to return to the Input Menu 11 Repeat from step 5 for the next source that you want to set up 12 When all so
283. ry ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 199 5 System Setup Sync Setup Sync Setup ScreenPRO II Controller system setup Step 12 A Prerequisites Ensure that you are familiar with the Settings Menu In Chapter 4 refer to the Settings Menu section on page 104 In this procedure you will set up sync parameters for the monitors and projectors connected to the system for the destination selected on the Output Menu Note It is recommended that you leave the sync parameters at their default factory reset values However should you need to adjust individual settings for a particular monitor and projector configuration use the following procedure B Use the following steps to set up sync parameters 1 2 3 4 10 11 12 From the Home Menu press OUTPUT to display the Output Menu On the Destination Bus select the destination that you want to configure Press SETTINGS to display the Settings Menu On the Output Monitor line select the device s that are affected by the sync settings All Preview SPII Program or BPII Program On the Sync Out line set the desired sync value H V H V H V H V or CSync On the SOG line select a specific sync on green signal Off Standard or Tri Level for certain HD devices On the Gamma line set the output gamma for the selected destination Important It is recommended that you leave Gamma at the unity setting 1
284. s 2048 Total V Res 768 Background Format Edge Butted Marker Mode Off Overlap Width 0 Alignment Test Pattern Data Doubling Justification Figure 4 15 Wide Screen Settings Menu sample The Wide Screen Settings Menu provides the tools required for wide screen setup and adjustment Note that this menu can only be accessed when the destination selected in the Output Menu is designated as wide screen Refer to the Destination Setup Menu section on page 117 for details Important As an important prerequisite to widescreen setup and to make widescreen setup easy Barco offers the Configurator application to assist with wide screen setup The software is available via download from the website or you can contact Barco Technical Support for details In Appendix B refer to the Contact Information section on page 268 for information The following functions are provided on the Wide Screen Settings Menu e Total Projectors indicates the total number of ScreenPRO II systems that have been assigned to the wide screen destination This field is for information only as derived from the Destination Setup Menu 106 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation Output Menu e Total H Res sets the total number of horizontal pixels in the overall wide screen display The formula is screens horizontal output resolution overlap width screens 1 A Example If two screens
285. s current size and position e Background LOS If there is a LOS for a background DVI input the video switches to the background s selected matte color e DSK LOS If there is a LOS for the DSK the system switches the DSK Off specifically selecting none as the type In each case when the video signal recovers the system re enables it as before Setting User Preferences W Prior to operations be sure to set user preferences as desired 1 From the Miscellaneous Menu press USER PREF to display the User Preference Menu 2 On the Black Invalid Video line select the method by which the scaler loading procedure is shown on Preview when you change inputs Select ON to show black when scalers are loaded In addition Black will be shown when a background channel BG becomes invalid and the DSK will be turned off when source video becomes invalid Select OFF to show the full scaler loading procedure which can temporarily include non sync and non stable video Understanding Input File Mapping This section provides information on how the ScreenPRO II Controller system stores the characteristics of each input in files and how those files are used during operations During the input setup procedure after adjusting each input parameter pressing the SAVE button saves those characteristics in a file The file stores all definitions for that source alone along with the associated destination From that po
286. screen test pattern can be generated on the desktop A test pattern application is available on the website http video folsom com Click Downloads select BlendPRO from the drop down list then download the Alignment Patterns application The following phase adjustment steps apply to RGB and YUV analog sources The following color balance steps apply to all types of analog sources RGB YUV Composite and S Video The following adjustment steps are not required for digital sources Note These adjustments are primarily visual rather than precisely numerical Here for each destination you are visually matching sources across your system s scalers Phase Adjustments E Use the following steps to set up phase for widescreen destinations for RGB and YUV sources only 1 ON Oo FS DN 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Ensure that you have performed the standard setups for your sources If not refer to the Standard Input Setup section on page 206 for details From the Home Menu press SYSTEM to display the System Menu Turn the Modify Layers on Program function to On On the Destination Bus select your widescreen destination On the ScreenPRO II Controller console select LAYER A On the Source Selection Bus select the first source that you want to set up Press PIP to display the PIP Adjustment Menu Ensure that the image s border and shadow are turned off Use the Border Men
287. sentationPRO II Aux Destination 1 gt m Single Screen Destinations DVD or VTR soso Hn ImagePRO Aux Destination 2 ScreenPRO Il 1 i SN o i Server or D VTR L Preview Left Preview Right ScreenPRO ll 2 Digital DA panas O I wy Background ED DSK Ethernet Distribution DVI DVI Local Network Only Program Left Program Right Figure 3 2 Sample System with Internal Routing The following sample charts are provided e Internal Routing Sample Analog Input Chart e internal Routing Sample Digital Input Chart e Single Screens Sample DVI Connection Chart e Single Screens Sample Standard Destination Chart e Single Screens Sample Auxiliary Destination Chart Note Abbreviated charts are used in the following sections 62 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 3 Hardware Installation Connection Charts Internal Routing Sample Analog Input Chart With a ScreenPRO Il configured to use internal routing on the Destination Setup Menu use the following chart to map Analog Inputs to each ScreenPRO II and other target analog destinations Note that the use of DAs is recommended to provide identical inputs to each ScreenPRO II or target device Table 3 7 Sample Analog Input Chart Direct or DA Con
288. serseri eerren ea rack xd e eris 255 In This AppendixXss arosi edith a we gga E Phen 255 ScreenPRO Il Input Specifications llle 256 ScreenPRO Il Output Specifications ooooooooooooooo 257 User Controla A Ede atid EN UE ee eese 257 Widescreen Functions leseeeeeee eene 258 Physical and Electrical Specifications ooooococoooooooo 258 Communications Specifications l l 259 PINQUIS cocum A pe d i rta E 260 Ethernet Connector uoc mS EESTI ERREUR RE 260 Serial Connector ooococccoco eese 261 Tally Connector xe or eet rece ead de eee uus 262 ScreenPRO Il Input and Output Resolutions ooo oooo o 263 Appendix B Contact Information lt o lt 267 In This Appendbes eL ii a eer X E RIDERE Rd 267 Wartantya s e norte be pP P iid dee rui 267 12 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide Appendix C Index Table of Contents Return Material Authorization RMA 00 eee eee eee 267 Gontact Information tit tae tia he DN Make eee aS 268 Upgrading Software cece eee eee eens 269 In This Appendix eho wee RR ee ee eg ee 269 Software Upgrade Overview 0 0 0 0 cece eee tte ee 270 Hardware Requirements llle 270 Software Requirements 0 0 cece eee eee eee 270 Downloading Software 0 0 0 0 cece teeta 271 Via ETP Site caia A PO AAA E E A aA 271 Via Web Site cio nd dls ha oi e P 271 Seria
289. set will be used In this manner you can effectively recall a series of end points all of which use the end point from the previous Preset as their new starting point If you recall a Preset with a defined Move to an empty layer both the starting and ending points of the recalled Move will be used ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 245 6 Operations Working with Still Frames Working with Still Frames The following topics are discussed in this section Still Frame Capture Overview Capturing Still Frames from a Background Input Capturing Still Frames from a Layer Saving Still Frames in Permanent Memory Naming a Saved Still Frame Still Frame Capture Overview The ScreenPRO Ill Controller enables you to capture still frames into each ScreenPRO Il s three internal frame stores The sources of the still frames are each ScreenPRO Il s BG A and BG B inputs or the scaled inputs Layer A or B Please note For widescreen destinations even though you are using the frame stores of multiple ScreenPRO II units you are conceptually working with only three frame stores each of which captures s its slice of the complete widescreen image For single screen destinations you are working with the individual destination s three frame stores in the normal manner Regarding captures All captures of the background BG A or BG B must occur on Preview the desired full screen source to cap
290. settings and repeat the test 130 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation System Menu Lantronix Setup Menu On the Router Specification Menu when Communication Type is set to LANTRONIX press COMM SETUP to display the Lantronix Setup Menu LANTRONIX SETUP Number lt EMPTY gt Channel Baud rate Data bits Stop bit Parity IP N A MAC Addr N A DISCOVER LTRX Figure 4 33 Lantronix Setup Menu sample The Lantronix Setup Menu enables you to set parameters for multiple Lantronix Ethernet to Serial device servers The ScreenPRO II Controller supports Lantronix models UDS100 and UDS200 The menu will appear blank until the Lantronix device is discovered Important Prior to pressing DISCOVER LTRX it is highly recommended that you set up a static IP address on the Lantronix device itself The recommended range is 192 168 0 200 192 168 0 239 such as not to conflict with other devices in the ScreenPRO II Controller system Refer to the Lantronix UDS100 or UDS200 User s Guide for instructions e Number selects the number of the Lantronix device that you wish to set up e Press DISCOVER LTRX to set up communications with the Lantronix device Channel sets the specific Lantronix channel 1 or 2 that you wish to set up Each Lantronix can control two serial routers e Baud Rate sets the selected channel s baud rate e Data Bits sets the sel
291. simultaneously to enable them destination 3 turns off Use the All button to turn all destinations on or off See the description of the All button below for details DEST AUX press to switch the bus between standard projector destinations and Aux auxiliary destinations such as monitors When DEST AUX is off you are selecting standard projector destinations When DEST AUX is lit you are selecting Aux auxiliary destinations ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 41 2 Hardware Orientation Front Panel Sections o All the All button works in conjunction with the currently selected bus as chosen with the DEST AUX button e Press All once to turn all defined destinations on e Double punch the All button to turn all defined destinations off Note The All button is also used in conjunction with the Page button to lock and unlock the Controller In Chapter 6 refer to the Locking and Unlocking the Controller section on page 252 for details In Chapter 6 refer to the Working with Destinations section on page 222 for complete instructions on all destination modes Joystick Section The figure below illustrates the Joystick Section Adjustment Panel Figure 2 5 Joystick Section When a PIP or Key is selected in the Layer Control Section the controls in the Joystick section are automatically assigned to manipulate that feature on Preview When none of the six fun
292. sion is incompatible with the code version of a ScreenPRO II PresentationPRO II or BlendPRO II or a combination of units all buttons will flash on the Controller console The Status Menu is shown with the message Please Upgrade Please continue with the Downloading Code procedure on page 188 ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 187 5 System Setup System Power Up 188 Downloading Code When an incompatibility exists between software code versions all buttons will flash on the Controller console In this situation the Status Menu automatically appears with the message Please Upgrade E Use the following steps to download code from the Controller to the target device s including ScreenPRO ll PresentationPRO II and BlendPRO Il 1 From the Controllers Home Menu press SYSTEM gt SW VER to display the Software Version Menu Any incompatibilities will be listed SOFTWARE VERSION c 1 10 ontroller lt gt Z BlendPRO II Software versions SP 1 1 10 incompatible with Controller s version SP 4 1 10 Software version mismatch Download device s software DOWNLOAD CODE Figure 5 2 Software Version Menu sample FORCE DOWNLOAD 2 Press DOWNLOAD CODE to begin the download process which takes several minutes to complete During the procedure several progress messages will be shown When the entire procedure is complete the Download Code Results Menu
293. ss EXIT when complete e Press ROTARY ENCODER to display the Rotary Encoder Menu Refer to the Rotary Encoder Menu section on page 114 for details e Press TBAR amp JOYSTICK to display the TBar amp Joystick Menu Refer to the TBar amp Joystick Menu section on page 115 for details e Press KEY DETECT to display the Key Detect Menu Refer to the Key Detect Menu section on page 116 for details ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 113 4 Menu Orientation System Menu Rotary Encoder Menu From the Diagnostics Setup Menu press ROTARY ENCODER to display the Rotary Encoder Menu ROTARY ENCODER DIAGNOSTICS Rotary RelCnt AbsCnt 1 0 0 2 0 0 Figure 4 21 Rotary Encoder Menu sample The Rotary Encoder Menu enables you to test the functionality of each rotary encoder displaying both relative and absolute counts for each e Press EXIT to return to the Diagnostics Setup Menu 114 ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation System Menu TBar amp Joystick Menu From the Diagnostics Setup Menu press TBAR amp JOYSTICK to display the TBar amp Joystick Menu TBAR amp JOYSTICK DIAGNOSTICS Joystick Figure 4 22 TBar amp Joystick Menu sample The TBar amp Joystick Menu enables you to test the functionality of the TBar and Joystick e The TBAR range is 0 to 100 The Joystick range is 100 to 100 on each axis X Y and Z e Press EXIT to re
294. standing Split and Mix Modes Working with PIPs in Split Mode Working with PIPs in Mix Mode e Modifying PIPs Working with Keys in Split Mode Working with Keys in Mix Mode Using Cut amp Fill e Modifying Keys e Clearing Layers from Program e Modifying Layers On Program Switching Sources The Source Selection Bus allows you to choose the sources that are routed into PIPs and keys Please note e Use the SHIFT button to access sources 9 through 16 e The SDI 1 and SDI 2 buttons are only active when a ScreenPRO II is configured to use internal routing The buttons are disabled when external routing is used B Use the following steps to switch sources into a PIP or a Key 1 Press LAYER A or LAYER B in the Layer Control Section Note The button blinks to indicate that it is available for modification The associated layer s raster box blinks on Preview faPIP or Key is assigned to the layer its source can now be changed 2 Pressthe desired button on the Source Selection Bus to assign that source to the PIP or Key The button blinks to indicate that it is active for modification Please note the following important points regarding sources e When the Red LED above a source button is lit the source is on Program provided that its associated Destination button is active e When a source button is lit solid the source is on Preview but it is not active for manipulation Only blinking
295. such as Ethernet Hubs and monitors Please note Connect each unit only to a properly rated supply circuit Reliable grounding of rack mounted equipment should be maintained 13 Tally Connection If you are using the optional Tally board connect tally relay closure lines from the ScreenPRO Il Controller s Tally connector to the desired external devices Such as cameras Eight tally circuits are provided In Appendix A refer to the Tally Connector section on page 262 for pinout details 14 Power On turn on power to all units 15 System ID required for use with the ScreenPRO II Controller On each ScreenPRO II chassis a Access the Remote Control Menu by pressing REMOTE CONTROL on the Home Menu This menu enables you to set the ID of the ScreenPRO II chassis b Set the ScreenPRO Ill chassis ID to a unique value that is not used by another chassis The system will not function if duplicate IDs are in use Note The ScreenPRO II Controller will detect duplicate IDs and prompt the user to correct the problem Only the first device will connect to the console Other devices with conflicting IDs will be refused a connection 16 Display Calibration calibrate the ScreenPRO II Controllers Touch Screen display using the Display Settings Menu From the Home Menu press DISPLAY gt LCD CAL and following the prompts to calibrate the display If you are using BlendPRO ll please review the Ov
296. t ee eS arte RS 2 Number OPINDUIS 222 ie Sh dee o LAS 127 Of Outputs dao 127 TOUtOr 1 hop med ibt ek esos hal 127 0 Offset clone 0 cee ee eee 162 Opacity DSK I knIRGuGdg ue a 179 180 key itte mese at decet 157 158 Operations eos ey es 215 activate and deactivate destinations 222 background transitions 227 change layer mode 235 clear layers from program 234 clearing destinations 223 configuration 0 eee eee 217 deleting presets 244 destinations o ooooooooo 222 A nee See oe ee ees 17 Keys in mix mode 05 232 Keys in split mode 231 MX MOIE xo as a 228 modify PIPS o ooooccoccoocooooo 230 modifying keyS oooooo oooo o 233 pend move on preview 239 pend move on program 240 PIPs in mix mode 229 PIPs in split mode 229 prerequisites ooooooooo 216 recalling presets 244 route aux and standard destinations 223 split mode ooccccccc 228 storing presets 005 244 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide understanding split and mix modes 228 using Clone aeae ae aae aa 235 using cut fill 232 using freeze ee eee eee eee 236 using fullscreen o o o o o 235 using join mode 237
297. t port is 10 100 Mbit auto sensing capable and is configured to run as a DHCP server A variety of Barco Folsom protocols for communication control and code loading are implemented The Ethernet connector is compatible with Standard RJ 45 Ethernet cables Neutrik EtherCon series cables In Appendix A see the Ethernet Connector section on page 260 for pinouts Adjustable Feet The two rear feet of the ScreenPRO II Controller are adjustable enabling you to raise the rear of the Controller for increased Touch Screen visibility y i i y D N y c in a UE gt Figure 2 2 Controller Side View showing adjustable feet retracted and extended 8 AC Connector and Fuse One AC Connector with integral Fuse is provided to connect the ScreenPRO II Controller to your facility s AC power source Please note The integral switch turns the chassis on and off The fuse rating is T250V 2A For continued protection against risk of fire replace only with a fuse of the same type and rating ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 33 2 Hardware Orientation ScreenPRO II Controller Front Panel ScreenPRO II Controller Front Panel The figure below illustrates the ScreenPRO II Controller front panel PRESETS DESTINATIONS AUX BUBUO 0o00 O TRANSITIONS So SOURCE SELECTION Figure 2 1 ScreenPRO II Controller Front Panel 1
298. t with the highest numbered ID e Setthe Termination Switch for all ScreenPRO lls in your system For all ScreenPRO lls except the last one in the chain ensure that the ScreenPRO II is un terminated HI Z Refer to the ScreenPRO II Genlock Termination section on page 76 for details On the last unit in the chain only ensure that the ScreenPRO II is terminated 75 OHM 78 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 3 Hardware Installation Overview of Edge Blending Technology Overview of Edge Blending Technology The following topics are discussed in this section e Introduction to Edge Blending e Content Creation e Video Processing Projector Setup and System Adjustments Left Justified Configurations Center Justified Configurations Introduction to Edge Blending Edge blending technology is becoming increasingly popular for supporting very large high resolution displays The technology is very flexible and supports a wide range of screen configurations A typical three projector system is illustrated below As shown multiple projectors are used to project on a common surface in order to create one high resolution image The creation of a seamless image requires careful attention to detail High quality results depend upon a system level approach that integrates content creation video processing projector setup and system adjustments as described below Adjustable Lo Image Overlap
299. te The layer button blinks to indicate that it is active for modification Inthe Source Selection Bus the source assigned to the layer blinks On Preview the raster box for the selected layer blinks even if it is hidden under the DSK 3 Inthe Layer Functions Section ensure that the KEY button is lit and the Key Menu is visible If the menu is not visible press KEY 4 Setthe desired Mix Mode Toco locate the mixer s Keys enable the Mix Source button Tolocate the mixer s Keys independently enable the SWAP button Totoggle sources enable Toggle 5 Onthe Source Selection Bus select the desired new key source The button blinks to indicate that it is selected and the source appears on Preview 6 Adjust the Key s mode clip gain opacity fill size position source image and cropping Refer to the Modifying Keys section on page 233 for details 7 Transition the new look to Program with a CUT or AUTO TRANS Refer to the Working with Transitions section on page 241 for details 8 Repeatthe procedure from step 1 for the next transition Using Cut amp Fill A Cut Fill key is one in which the hole cutting information is provided by a Key on Layer B while the fill information is provided by an effect on Layer A either a PIP or a Key Note Cut Fill keys can only be selected on Layer B when the Split Mode is enabled B Use the following steps to create a Cut amp Fill Key 1 2 In the Layer
300. techie cc ss data 152 HSize ici ia a 152 menu description 152 MOTE esci en RIS Wr plo 152 transparency 152 Vi POSS 2 patere me he ACE ES 152 Misa REPERI 152 Shared functions background menu 172 Sharpness 00 2c cece eee eee 91 SRITEDUION a los Res Sy Bites weg ces iaa eee 45 Sierra scelus 125 video systems router support 128 289 Index Single screen destination 0 0 eee eee 41 destinations frame grab 143 destinations genlock 103 sample Aux destination chart 65 sample DVI connection chart 64 sample standard destination chart 64 Site preparation o o ooooooooooo 54 Size border iuris 151 specified in border 151 Sizing menu description 95 SMPTE color space ssesse 91 SoftkeyS 0 0 0 c eee eee eee 38 Software downloading 0 e eee 271 requirements upgrading 270 upgrade overview 5 270 upgrade via Ethernet 274 version menu description 112 version mismatch 112 SOG oA tit 104 Source adjustment menu description 167 adjustment menu functions 168 adjustment H Position 168 adjustment H size 168 adjustment menu tree 166 adjustment move rate 168 ad
301. ted and the system returns to the Home Menu ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 139 4 Menu Orientation Miscellaneous Menu User Preference Menu From the Miscellaneous Menu press USER PREF to display the User Preference USER PREFERENCE MENU Black Invalid Video Menu Figure 4 43 User Preference Menu sample The User Preference Menu enables you to set a variety of user preference parameters The following functions are provided e Black Invalid Video selects the method by which the scaler loading procedure is shown on Preview when the user changes inputs ON shows black when scalers are loaded In addition Black is shown when a background channel BG becomes invalid The DSK will be turned off when source video becomes invalid OFF shows the full scaler loading procedure which can temporarily include non sync and non stable video In Chapter 6 refer to the Setting User Preferences section on page 221 for instructions 140 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation Miscellaneous Menu Backup Restore Menu From the Miscellaneous Menu press BACKUP RESTORE to display the Backup Restore Menu BACKUP RESTORE Device Ctrlr SP Controller Options SP To Restore Select option to Backup Restore to or from the Flash card CHECK BACKUP CARD RESTORE Figure 4 44 Backup Restore Menu sample The Backup Restore Menu enables you
302. tes a sample BG Input Setup Menu when DVI is selected as the background type BG INPUT SETUP BG_A Destination Format 1024 x 768 O 60 Crop H Offset V Offset APPLY FORCE FORMAT ACQUIRE Figure 4 70 BG Input Setup Menu DVI Type sample The following functions are provided for a DVI background e Format this line performs two functions Displays the resolution that is automatically determined by the FORCE ACQUIRE function Enables you to manually set the resolution of the incoming source if desired Once the format is selected manually with the ADJ knob press APPLY FORMAT to accept and activate the format Forthe two Crop settings fthe source s input resolution matches the output resolution or if the output resolution is larger than the input resolution the Crop settings will be bracketed Ifthe input data is smaller than the output resolution the area around the active data is set to black fthe source s input resolution is larger than the output resolution the H Offset and V Offset values can be used to choose which portion of the background you want to display Press RESET to reset the H and V offsets to 0 e Press SAVE to store all selected settings Press APPLY FORMAT to activate the selected format e Press FORCE ACQUIRE to automatically detect the input signal resolution and update the display Format field accordingly ScreenPRO Il Controller
303. the backgrounds at the lowest priority to the LOGO at the highest visual priority e Any combination of backgrounds layers DSK and LOGO can be selected on Preview for transition to or from Program Note In both single and widescreen modes the only restriction is that BG B and the DSK are mutually exclusive This occurs because the BG DSK Input B is shared between the DSK and BG B on all individual ScreenPRO Il units Following are descriptions of each button s function Important Each ScreenPRO II unit uses a lookahead Preview monitor that fully represents how the Program output will appear next By selecting combinations of PIPs keys backgrounds and the DSK you are composing a Preview image that will appear on Program after the next transition A lit button does not necessarily mean that the source will transition on or off it simply means that it is part of the look on Preview e Background Buttons press to select an unscaled background on Preview for transition to or from Program The button lights when selected Please note e ifthe Red LED is lit the background is on Program e If BG Ais on Program and BG Ais selected in Preview there will be no change of backgrounds on the next transition 48 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 2 Hardware Orientation Front Panel Sections e f BG Ais on Program and BG B is selected in Preview BG A will dissolve cut or wipe
304. the boundaries of the PIP or Key When enabled the Top Left and Bottom Right buttons are also enabled and the Crop Adjustment Menu appears To return to normal PIP adjustment toggle the button off In Chapter 4 refer to the Crop Menu section on page 164 for additional details Reset the Reset button is a momentary function Press to reset the current effect e g PIP Key crop etc to a nominal default value Think of this function as being context sensitive as it resets only the current effect without affecting other modifications Top Left when the Crop button is lit press to crop the PIP or Key s top and left edges e Move the Joystick left and right to crop the left edge e Move the Joystick up and down to crop the top edge In Chapter 4 refer to the Crop Menu section on page 164 for additional details Bottom Right when the Crop button is lit press to crop the PIP or Key s bottom and right edges Move the Joystick left and right to crop the right edge e Move the Joystick up and down to crop the bottom edge In Chapter 4 refer to the Crop Menu section on page 164 for additional details Fine Adjust the Fine Adjust button is a atching function In any PIP or Key adjustment mode press to increase the precision of the Joystick s adjustment range In Chapter 6 refer to the Modifying Layers On Program section on page 234 for additional details on Joystick usage ScreenPRO Il Contro
305. the selected resolution ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 90 4 Menu Orientation Input Menu nput Type sets the type of input connected to the ScreenPRO II Available choices change depending on the selected Format and the choice affects the Color Space selection Input types include RGB YP P Composite S Vid HDSDI SDI e Color Space sets the input s color space either SMPTE or RGB The system automatically sets the Color Space based on the selected Format and or Input Connector and Input Type but in some cases color space can be changed e Sampling Mode sets the sampling mode for the selected input When 1 1 Sampling is selected the system provides pixel for pixel sampling and generally better image quality When Oversample is selected the system performs multiple samples for every pixel with a resulting softer image e Contrast sets the input s contrast Adjustment range 75 to 125 Brightness sets the input s brightness Adjustment range 75 to 125 e Gamma sets the input gamma enabling you to match the gamma of the source Adjustment range 1 0 to 3 0 e Input Sync Type sets the type of sync used by the selected source Choices include HN CSync composite sync SOG sync on green Auto e Pulldown Compensation On Off This function is applicable only for standard video component s video composite inputs The
306. to 49 clear from program sss 234 control section oooooo ooooooo 35 control section description 48 functions section oooooooooo 35 functions section description 46 functions working with 235 how to change mode 235 how to clear llus 234 OVERVIEW euch ed Ree ee NRI ad 21 working With 0 00 eee 226 LCD Brite une uhes eu er i DR 139 contrasto r2 lA E 139 settings menu description 139 Learn preset lseseseess 39 LED red aco 39 44 45 Left edge cass eese 97 justified Phe nsn Dee le ege 218 justified configuration 83 E tans Gh tk gta oo hate tests 125 Light adjustment knob o o 35 Lock and unlock controller 252 controller omo 252 widescreen o o o ooooooo o 75 119 Lockout code CUSTOM media potere pus PRI 136 default esos seme 136 menu description 136 programmable sese 136 LOGO ara E PEOR 19 DUO or orbe old bien ede RSS 49 menu description 182 menu functions 182 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide SOU viva eS Ree ewe oe eet 212 source black o oooooooooooo 182 lype Sce sade eRMPEYIISUCOS 182 USING i excep ie Rote Rx Ris 251 Lookahead preview 48 219 LOS background ooo 221 DSK Lu REA xxr e 221 loss of signal
307. ts typically from multi head graphics cards to the BG DSK in A and BG DSK in B inputs on each ScreenPRO Il d For single screen backgrounds and DSK sources connect your computers DVI outputs typically from DAs or splitters to the BG DSK in A and BG DSK in B inputs on each ScreenPRO lII 9 Output Connections a One Analog Preview Output is provided on each ScreenPRO II Connect this output to the input of each analog Preview Monitor as required per your configuration b Three Program Outputs are provided on each ScreenPRO Il one digital and two analog For each chassis for single screen applications use these outputs to connect your Program Monitor s and your projector s For example A Connect the Digital Program Output to the input of your projector A Connect Analog Program Output 1 to the input of your main program monitor A Connect Analog Program Output 2 to an auxiliary or spare program monitor 10 BlendPRO II Input Output Connections for widescreen applications BlendPRO II requires the following connections a Connect the Digital Program Output on each ScreenPRO Il to the desired DVI Input 1 4 on BlendPRO II b Per your system configuration connect DVI Outputs 1 4 on BlendPRO II to the DVI inputs on your projectors or connect Analog Outputs 1 4 on BlendPRO II to the analog inputs on your projectors 11 Genlock Connections For single screen applications genlock connections are opti
308. ture must be visible on Preview You will get an error message if you attempt to capture while the source is on Program All captures of the layers LAYER A or LAYER B can occur on either Preview or Program The system only captures the active layer in its current size and position with no borders and with black as the background Note The Preview capture ensures that the Program output does not glitch when a live image is momentarily frozen and placed in temporary memory Please note the following important prerequisites to all frame grab procedures Ensure that you are familiar with the Background Input Setup Menu In Chapter 4 refer to the Background Input Setup Menu section on page 170 Ensure that you are familiar with the Frame Grab Menu In Chapter 4 refer to the Frame Grab Menu section on page 142 for details ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 246 6 Operations Working with Still Frames Capturing Still Frames from a Background Input E Use the following steps to capture a still frame from a background input 1 Ensure that the background input from which you want to capture a still is properly set up as a DVI input In Chapter 5 refer to the Background Setup section on page 205 for instructions Ensure that BG A BG B or the DSK are not on Program If they are you will get a pop up prompt Transition these layers off Program in the normal manner If you want to capture fr
309. turn to the Diagnostics Setup Menu ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 115 4 Menu Orientation System Menu Key Detect Menu From the Diagnostics Setup Menu press KEY DETECT to display the Key Detect Menu KEY DETECTION DIAGNOSTICS Key Label SOURCE 1 Key Status Released Key Scan Code 0xCO row 0 col 8 Figure 4 23 Key Detect Menu sample The Key Detect Menu shows you the key that is pressed its status pressed or released its scan code and its location in the row and column matrix e Press EXIT to return to the Diagnostics Setup Menu 116 ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation System Menu Destination Setup Menu From the System Menu press DEST SETUP to display the Destination Setup Menu DESTINATION SETUP Destination 1 Type Widescreen SP SP to Add N A SP to Remove 1 Routing Mode External SPs assigned to destination 1 1 2 Figure 4 24 Destination Setup Menu sample The Destination Setup Menu enables you to define each destination The following functions are provided e Destination sets the destination that you want to define Choices are 1 4 standard destinations and Aux 1 4 This field is independent of the destination s currently selected on the Destination Bus Note The destination that you select does equate to the same destination button on the Controller e Type displays or sets the selected
310. u and Shadow Menu as required Recommended Output a Burst test pattern from the selected source On the PIP Adjustment Menu use H Size and V Size to size the PIP such that that it matches the input s resolution In this way there will be no scaling Press AUTO TRANS to transition the PIP to program This will ensure that you can make your adjustments with data doubling and edge feathering visible Using the H Position function move the PIP into the screen 1 region Press HOME gt INPUT gt SIZING to display the Sizing Menu for the source On the Destination line select the screen 1 destination Adjust Clock Phase for the cleanest and brightest image If required adjust H Position so that all of the image s pixels are visible Press PIP to display the PIP Adjustment Menu ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 209 5 System Setup Input Setup 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Press SAVE to save the input configuration Move the PIP into the next screen s region Repeat steps 13 through 19 for all remaining widescreen destinations When complete clear the layer and transition it off program On the ScreenPRO II Controller console select LAYER B Repeat the entire procedure from step 6 for the same source When you have completed setting up the first source for both layers repeat the entire procedure from step 5 for all remaining RGB and YUV sources that you want to set up Ensure that yo
311. u may notice a glitch in the image as the scalers recall the source s file e fyouuse camera inputs in this mode it is recommended that you use an external Genlock signal Refer to the Understanding Input File Mapping section on page 221 for details on source files ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 6 Operations Working with Layer Functions Working with Layer Functions The following topics are discussed in this section Changing the Layer Mode e Using Full Screen e Using Clone e Using Swap Z Order Using Freeze e Using Reset Using Join Mode Changing Ihe Layer Mode E Use the following steps to change the layer mode 1 Ensure that the PIP or Key that you wish to change is selected in the Layer Control Section and active for modification 2 Inthe Layer Functions Section Press PIP to change a Key to a PIP or Press Key to change a PIP to a Key Using Full Screen N 4 B Use the following steps to take the active PIP or Key to full screen 1 Ensure that the PIP or Key is selected in the Layer Control Section and active for modification in Preview 2 Inthe Layer Functions Section press Full Screen The source s height will be used as the parameter that define s the full screen size If borders are ON they will be taken into account so that they are visible Shadows will not be taken into account for the full screen size Using Clone The Clone mode is designed for wid
312. u set up both layers for each source Color Balance Adjustments The following steps are a continuation of the complete widescreen source setup procedure E Use the following steps to set up color balance for widescreen destinations for all types of analog sources RGB YUV Composite and S Video 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Recommended Output a Gray Steps test pattern from the selected source On the ScreenPRO II Controller console select LAYER A On the Source Selection Bus select the first source that you want to set up Press PIP to display the PIP Adjustment Menu Scale the source such that it spans all screens in your widescreen configuration Press AUTO TRANS to transition the PIP to program This will ensure that you can make your adjustments with data doubling and edge feathering visible Press HOME gt INPUT to display the Input Menu for the source Visually find the pair of adjacent destinations that most closely match each other across your widescreen blend regions Select one of these as your reference destination and the other as your first adjustment destination On the Destination line select the first adjustment destination Adjust the source as follows a On the Input Menu adjust Brightness and Contrast to visually match the reference destination b Onthe Color Balance Menu adjust Red Green and Blue values to vis
313. u will be asked to confirm before proceeding Press DELETE to mark the selected permanent frame as deleted but note that the ERASE function is still required for permanent deletion You can consider this as a quick delete function Press RECALL to recall a selected frame from permanent flash storage back into temporary memory In Chapter 6 refer to the Working with Still Frames section on page 246 for instructions 144 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation Frame Grab Menu Frame Grab Name Menu The figure below illustrates a sample Frame Grab Name Menu FRAME GRAB NAME Saved Location Current Name New Name SAVED FG 1 SAVED FG 1 Enter a new name for this saved frame grab using a PS2 keyboard then hit Enter to save it Figure 4 47 Frame Grab Name Menu sample The Frame Grab Name Menu enables you to name a saved frame grab using a customer supplied PS 2 keyboard Note The optional Tally board is required for the naming feature The board includes the tally connector plus a PS 2 connector for the Keyboard Port The following functions are provided e Saved Location enables you to select the saved frame that you want to name You must use the Save function on the Frame Grab Menu as a prerequisite to naming the frame Current Name displays the name of the saved frame e New Name enables you to enter a new
314. ually match the reference destination If a Composite or S Video source was selected adjust Saturation and Hue c Press SAVE to save the input configuration On the Destination line select the next adjacent destination and repeat step 34 matching Brightness Contrast and Color Balance across the blend region Repeat step 35 for all remaining destinations When complete clear the layer and transition it off program On the ScreenPRO II Controller console select LAYER B Repeat the entire procedure from step 27 for the same source When you have completed adjusting color balance for the first source for both layers repeat the entire procedure from step 26 for all remaining RGB YUV Composite and S Video sources that you want to set up Ensure that you set up both layers for each source 210 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 5 System Setup DSK Setup Procedure DSK Setup Procedure ScreenPRO II Controller system setup Step 17 A Prerequisites Ensure that you are familiar with the following menus DSK Adjustment Menu In Chapter 4 refer to the DSK Adjustment Menu section on page 178 DSK Input Setup Menu In Chapter 4 refer to the DSK Input Setup Menu section on page 180 In this procedure you will set up the system s DSK Remember that the DSK can be configured as a live DVI input or as a frame grab Note In both single and widescreen modes remember that BG B a
315. urce Adjustment Menu Adjust the source image s size and position within the Key In Chapter 4 refer to the Source Adjustment Menu Description section on page 167 for menu details Special Effects From the Key Key Adjustment Key Source Adjustment or Matte Menu press EFX to display the Image Effects Menu Select the desired effect including monochrome chroma and hue invert and strobe In Chapter 4 refer to the Image Effects Menu section on page 153 for details ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 233 6 Operations Working with Layers 234 10 Global Functions Remember that the following global functions are always available to you Press Reset to reset the current effect e g PIP Key crop etc toa nominal default value Press Full Screen to bring the Key to full screen using the source s height as the defining factor Press Freeze to freeze the Key on both Program and Preview Press again to unfreeze 11 Transition Transition the new look to program with a CUT or AUTO TRANS Refer to the Working with Transitions section on page 241 for details Clearing Layers from Program The clear layer procedure enables you to remove layers from Program including backgrounds layers the DSK and the LOGO In this mode always remember to take advantage of the system s Lookahead Preview function Refer to the Lookahead Preview section on page 219 for additional details
316. urces have been set up for this destination press HOME to return to the Home Menu 13 Press SAVE to save the new system configuration in memory Important You do not have to repeat the input setup procedure for your other destinations if either of the following criteria are met e Your other destinations use sources that are patched to the same router Your other destinations are configured using the ALL SP function on the Input Source Patch Menu In this case all other system destinations will automatically receive input configuration files via the system s copy down functionality You do have to repeat the input setup procedure if either of the following criteria are met e Your other destinations use a different router Your other destinations use unique input patching 14 If required repeat the entire procedure from step 1 for other destinations 208 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 5 System Setup Input Setup Widescreen Phase and Color Balance Setup This section provides instructions for phase and color balance setup for wide widescreen destinations utilizing BlendPRO II Please note the following important points For the optimum setup it is highly recommended that you can output a test pattern from each source however you can make adjustments using a live image if necessary For example if the source is a PC the best results can be achieved when a full
317. ure Tally 4 contact closure Tally 4 grounding closure Tally 4 contact closure Tally 5 contact closure Tally 5 grounding closure Tally 5 contact closure Tally 6 contact closure Tally 6 grounding closure Tally 6 contact closure Tally 7 contact closure Tally 7 grounding closure Tally 7 contact closure Tally 8 contact closure Tally 8 grounding closure Tally 8 contact closure Signal ground ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide A Specifications ScreenPRO Il Input and Output Resolutions ScreenPRO II Input and Output Resolutions This section provides a comprehensive list of available input and output resolutions on the individual ScreenPRO II units These resolutions can be assigned to the selected input on the Input Menu and as the system s output format on the Output Menu In Chapter 4 refer to the Input Menu Description and Output Menu Description sections for details Note Please contact Barco Technical Support if you would like to request the addition of a new resolution Input and output resolutions are listed below Each entry lists Format Fv Hz Important ScreenPRO II Controller does not support interlaced output resolutions All interlaced video formats listed below are supported as inputs only and noted as such in red e NTSC 480i Input Only e 720x480p PAL 576i Input Only e 720x575p e 640
318. visible If the menu is not visible press KEY Note Even if the layer is on Program the Key Menu appears but parameters can not be adjusted On the Source Selection Bus select the desired new key source The button blinks to indicate that it is selected and the source appears on Preview Adjust the Key s type clip gain opacity fill size position source image and cropping Refer to the Modifying Keys section on page 233 for details Prior to the transition you can set up an additional effect if desired in Split Mode Tosetup an additional Split Mode Key in Preview repeat the procedure from step 2 To set up a PIP in Preview refer to the Working with PIPs in Split Mode section on page 229 Press CUT or AUTO TRANS to transition the look to Program Refer to the Working with Transitions section on page 241 for details Repeat the procedure from step 1 for the next transition ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 231 6 Operations Working with Layers 232 Working with Keys in Mix Mode In Mix Mode the mixer s layers are ganged together Both Keys can be perfectly co located on screen Mix Source mode or both can operate independently Swap mode but only one Key can be on Program at a time E Use the following steps to work with Keys in Mix Mode 1 Inthe Layer Control Section ensure that the Split button is Off 2 Press the desired layer button A or B Please no
319. w to activate and deactivate destinations 222 adjust raster box size 220 back up system to flash memory 213 253 calibrate touch screen 189 217 capture still frame from a layer 247 capture still from background input 247 change layer mode 235 clear destinations 223 Clear layers 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee 234 connect BlendPRO II widescreen lock 77 delete presets o oo oooo 244 download code 188 enable or disable tallies 253 enable widescreen markers 218 install ScreenPRO II Controller 73 lock controller o 252 modify keys 0 eee eee ee eee 233 modify layers on program 234 modify PIPS oir 230 name a saved still frame 249 patch router inputs 198 pend move on preview 239 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide pend move on program 240 perform a cut 20005 241 perform a mix 0 eee eee 241 perform a wipe sess 241 perform background transition 227 perform background transitions 227 perform DSK 000 eee eee 250 perform manual transition 242 power up system 187 program EDID lesus 190 program move on preview 238 program move on program 239 recall presets
320. whether or not Monochrome Mode is enabled Tip For a sepia tone effect turn Monochrome Mode on and set Red to 100 Green to 65 and Blue to 10 nvert inverts all image colors e Hue adjusts the image s hue by rotating color vectors throughout the 360 degree color spectrum ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 153 4 Menu Orientation PIP Adjustment Menu Mode In the Strobe section enables or disables the strobe mode which when enabled acts as a programmable freeze Interval frames In the Strobe section sets the freeze interval Press RESET RGB to reset all image colors to their default values Press PIP to return to the PIP Adjustment Menu Refer to the PIP Adjustment Menu Functions section on page 149 for details Press BORDR to display the Border Menu Refer to the Border Menu section on page 151 for details Press SHDOW to display the Shadow Menu Refer to the Shadow Menu section on page 152 for details Note To remove any image effects from the PIP or Key press the RESET button in the Layer Functions Section while the Image Effects Menu is active No other PIP parameters will be affected 154 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 4 Menu Orientation Key Menu Key Menu The following topics are discussed in this section Key Menu Tree Key Menu Description Key Menu Functions Key Sub Menus
321. will display a summary of the download Please note e Results may appear on multiple pages e frequired press PG DN and PG UP to move between pages Press DETAILS to view additional information for a specific download At the conclusion of the procedure each ScreenPRO II PresentationPRO Il and BlendPRO II is running the same version of code as the Controller ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 5 System Setup Return to Factory Default Return to Factory Default ScreenPRO II Controller system setup Step 3 In this procedure you will perform a factory reset in order to reset all router tables and source mappings The procedure guarantees that any previous setups and presets e g those that may have been programmed by other users do not remain in system memory A Prerequisite Ensure that you are familiar with the System Reset Menu In Chapter 4 refer to the System Reset Menu section on page 111 B Use the following steps to return the system to factory default values 1 m RON On the Home Menu press SYSTEM to access the System Menu Press RESET to display the System Reset Menu On the Device line and select ALL Scroll to the Reset Type line and select FACTORY Press RESET When the confirmation screen appears press YES to delete all user configurations and reset the system to factory default values Touch Screen Calibration ScreenPRO II Controller system setup
322. will get a pop up prompt Transition these layers off Program in the normal manner In the Layer Control Section select the layer from which you want to capture a still The button blinks indicating that it is selected Note The layer can be on Program or Preview Select PIP or Key in the normal manner The selected PIP or Key Adjustment Menu appears Adjust the PIP or Key s size and position Remember that ScreenPRO II Controller User s Guide 247 6 Operations Working with Still Frames The system will capture the selected layer in its current size and position with no borders and with black as the background Ifyou have two layers on Preview only the active selected layer will be captured regardless of image priority Press HOME gt FRAME GRAB to display the Frame Grab Menu On the Frame Number line select the temporary frame store into which the still will be captured FG_1 FG_2 or FG_3 7 Press CAPTURE Once pressed the screen will indicate that the frame is being captured A pop up message confirms the procedure 8 Repeat the procedure from step 1 to capture additional stills from a layer Remember that you can always overwrite FG_1 FG_2 or FG_3 Please note e The captured still s can now be assigned as the input type for BG A BG B the DSK or the LOGO In Chapter 5 refer to the following sections for instructions Background Setup page 205 DSK
323. x480 059 94 e 640x480 260 e 640x480 72 e 640x480 75 e 640x480 85 e 800x600 50 e 800x600 056 e 800x600 059 94 e 800x600 260 e 800x600 072 e 800x600 075 e 800x600 285 e 1024x768 047 95 e 1024x768 848 e 1024x768 050 1024x768 059 94 e 1024x768 960 e 1024x768 970 e 1024x768 971 93 e 1024x768 72 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 263 A Specifications ScreenPRO Il Input and Output Resolutions 264 1024x768 75 1024x768 85 1152x864 75 1280x768 47 95 1280x768 48 1280x768 50 1280x768 59 94 1280x768 75 1280x960 50 1280x960 59 94 1280x960 60 1280x960 85 1280x1024 47 95 1280x1024 48 1280x1024 950 1280x1024 59 94 1280x1024 60 1280x1024 71 93 1280x1024 972 1280x1024 975 1280x1024 285 1364x768 47 95 1364x768 48 1364x768 50 1364x768 59 94 1364x768 75 1364x1024 47 95 1364x1024 48 1364x1024 950 1364x1024 59 94 1364x1024 075 1400x1050 48 1400x1050 950 1400x1050 59 94 1400x1050 60 1400x1050 975 1680x1050 60 1600x1200 47 95 1600x1200 48 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide A Specifications ScreenPRO Il Input and Output Resolutions e 1600x1200 50 e 1600x1200 59 94 e 1600x1200 60 e 1280x720p 50 e 1280x720p 059 94 e 1280x720p 060 e 1920x1080p 223 98 e 1920x1080p 224 e 1920x1080p 025 e 1920x1080p 229 97 e 1920x1080p 930 e 1920x1080p 950 e 1920x1080p 959 94 e 1920x1080p 260 e 1920x108
324. y Menu press MATTE to display the Matte Menu TRACK RGB Figure 4 57 Matte Menu sample Note The menu and slight variations of the menu can also be accessed from the DSK Adjustment Menu and the BG Input Setup Menus The menu s title on the top line will change accordingly The Matte Menu enables you to adjust the fill color of a matte key The following functions are provided e Red adjusts the red component of the matte fill as required from 0 to 1024 e Green adjusts the green component of the matte fill from O to 1024 e Blue adjusts the blue component of the matte fill from O to 1024 e Press STATS to display the Status Menu Refer to the Status Menu section on page 147 for details e Press KEY to display the Key Menu Refer to the Key Menu Description section on page 156 for details Press EFX to display the Image Effects Menu Refer to the Image Effects Menu section on page 153 for details e Check TRACK RGB to lock RGB values together and adjust them all simultaneously Uncheck to unlock the values and adjust colors individually Press SIZE amp POS to display the Key Adjustment Menu Refer to the Key Adjustment Menu section on page 160 for details Press MIN if present to change the highlighted color to 0 e Press MAX if present to change the highlighted color to 1023 e Press BLACK if present to change all three colors to 0 S
325. yer s raster box blinks on Preview e When the source button is lit solid the source is on Preview but its associated layer is not active for modification e Multiple source buttons can be lit simultaneously but only one source button can be blinking with its associated layer active for modification and the associated raster box blinking on Preview e When the Red LED above a source button is lit solid the source is on Program and its associated destination is enabled Important The Red LEDs only appear if the route s associated destination button is enabled For example if Source 1 on Destination 1 is on Program the Red LED above Source 1 will turn off if Destination 1 is cleared 44 ScreenPRO Il Controller User s Guide 2 Hardware Orientation Front Panel Sections e When the Red LED above a source button is blinking The mixer is set to Mix Mode the Split button is not lit The blinking Red LED indicates the layer that is on Program The alternate layer is enabled for modification on Preview and its associated raster box blinks A The Red LED above source 1 is blinking and the Red LED above Layer A is blinking This indicates that the mixer is set to Mix Mode source 1 is on program in Layer A and Layer B is active for modification on Preview e Multiple Red LEDs can be lit simultaneously but only one Red LED can be blinking indicating a Mix Mode association between a sour
326. ys the ID s of the selected destination s associated ScreenPRO I system s Frame Number enables you to select FG_1 FG_2 or FG_3 for capture storage erasure recall or deletion Capture Format displays the output resolution Each ScreenPRO Il always captures a full screen image at the output resolution regardless of the input resolution Name displays the name of the file UNSAVED indicates that the file s source is temporary memory SAVED indicates that the file is permanently stored If this appears the permanent file has been read into temp memory for use on air Format displays the resolution of the captured frame Press NAME to display the Frame Grab Name Menu Refer to the Frame Grab Name Menu section on page 145 for details Press ERASE to permanently erase the selected frame from permanent flash memory This process takes from 1 to 2 minutes and locks the console during the procedure You will be asked to confirm before proceeding Note You can perform this function even if there is no frame stored in the permanent register Press CAPTURE to capture a still into the selected temporary frame store Once pressed the screen will indicate that the frame is being captured Press SAVE to save the captured frame into permanent flash memory within the selected register This process takes from 2 to 3 minutes and locks the console during the procedure Yo

Barco BlendPRO-II Instruction manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents